-
1 σκευάζω
A : [tense] aor. , etc.; [dialect] Dor. - αξα ([etym.] κατ-) Ti.Locr.99a: [tense] pf. :—[voice] Med., [tense] aor.ἐσκευασάμην Din.Fr.89.31
: [tense] pf., v. infr.:—[voice] Pass., [tense] fut.- ασθήσομαι Gal.6.501
as cited by Orib.4.1.16 ( σκευασθῇ codd. Gal.), ([etym.] κατα-) D.19.219: [tense] pf. ἐσκεύασμαι, [dialect] Ion. [ per.] 3pl.ἐσκευάδαται Hdt.4.58
, and so of [tense] plpf. - ατο, Id.7.62; used in med. sense, E.Supp. 1057, Lys.Fr.54: ([etym.] σκεῦος, σκευή):—prepare, make ready, esp. prepare or dress food, [ πρόβατα] Hdt.1.207, cf. 73;ὅ τι ἄν τις.. σκευάσῃ Ar.Eq.53
; ἄλφιτα ib. 1104 ([voice] Pass.);ὄψον Alex.49
, Philem.79.2, Thphr.Char.20.9;τὸ δεῖπνον Pl.Com.46.2
; ([voice] Pass.);σ. ἑλλέβορον μετὰ φαρμάκου Str.9.3.3
; κρέα ὀπτὰ ς. D.S.2.59: metaph., ἐπίστασαι τὸν σαῦρον ὡς δεῖ σκευάσαι; Alex.133.1; περικόμματ' ἐκ σοῦ -άσω make mincemeat of you, Ar.Eq. 372;ὑμᾶς.. φρυκτοὺς σκευάσω Id.V. 1331
:—[voice] Med., prepare for oneself, and then much like the [voice] Act., ; .2 generally, make ready, arrange, Hdt.1.80; make a barrier, IG12.44.9; κέραμον ς. ib.313.164; χαλινὸν.. χαλκεῖ ἐκδιδόντα σκευάσαι giving it him to make, Pl.Prm. 127a; σ. ἡδονάς provide, procure, Id.R. 559d:—[voice] Med., σ. τόξ' ἑαυτοῦ παισί made his arrows ready for (i.e. against) them, E.HF 969; contrive, bring about, πόλεμον, προδοσίην ς., Hdt.5.103, 6.100.II of persons, furnish, supply, only in [voice] Pass.,σιτίοισι εὖ ἐσκευασμένος καὶ προβάτοισι Hdt.1.188
; ;ἐς πρᾶγμα νεοχμὸν ἐσκευάσμεθα E.Supp. 1057
.2 dress up,τὴν γυναῖκα σ. πανοπλίῃ Hdt.1.60
;ἄνδρας τῇ τῶν γυναικῶν ἐσθῆτι Id.5.20
; τὴν ἀδελφεὴν ὡς εἶχον ἄριστα ib.12;σ. τινὰ ὥσπερ γυναῖκα Ar.Th. 591
;χοίρως ὑμὲ -άσας Id.Ach. 739
;σ. [αὐτὴν] ὡς ἐδύνατο κάλλιστα X.An. 6.1.12
;οὕτω σκευάσαντες ἑαυτούς Plu.Caes.31
; also σ. τοὺς θεράποντας ἐς ὑπηρέτας, ἐς στρατιώτας, App.BC4.45,46; σ. εἴδωλόν τινι dress up an effigy of him, Hdt.6.58:—[voice] Pass., ἐσκευασμένοι accoutred, Th.4.32; εὐνοῦχος ἐσκευασμένος dressed up as.., Ar.Ach. 121; rarely of things, τὰ προπύλαια τύποισι.. ἐσκευάδαται are decorated with.., Hdt.2.138.III cheat, cozen, Men.Sam. 254. (From iii B.C. sts. written [pref] σκεα-, asπαρασκεαστέον PTeb.703.248
.)Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > σκευάζω
-
2 φέρω
φέρω ([dialect] Locr. [full] φάρω [ᾰ], IG9(1).334.5 (Oeanthea, v. B.C.)), only [tense] pres. and [tense] impf. (late 1 [tense] aor. [ per.] 3pl.Aἤφεραν IG3.1379
), Il.21.458, etc.: [dialect] Ep. forms, [ per.] 2pl. imper.φέρτε Il.9.171
; [ per.] 2sg. subj. ; [ per.] 3sg. subj.φέρῃσι Il.18.308
, Od.5.164, al.; [dialect] Ep. inf.φερέμεν Il.9.411
, al.: [tense] impf. ἔφερον, [dialect] Ep.φέρον 3.245
; also φέρεσκε, φέρεσκον ([ per.] 3pl.), Od.9.429, 10.108.II [tense] fut.οἴσω Il.7.82
, etc.; [dialect] Dor.οἰσῶ Theoc.3.11
; [ per.] 1pl.οἰσεῦμες Id.15.133
; [ per.] 3pl. ηοίσοντι Tab.Heracl.1.150: the foll. act. forms are not [tense] fut. in sense, imper.οἶσε Od.22.106
, 481, Ar.Ach. 1099, 1101, 1122, Ra. 482;οἰσέτω Il.19.173
, Od.8.255; [ per.] 3pl.οἰσόντων Antim.15
; inf.οἴσειν Pi.P.4.102
, [dialect] Ep.οἰσέμεν Od.3.429
,οἰσέμεναι Il.3.120
, Od.8.399, etc.: [tense] aor. 1 inf.οἶσαι Ph.1.611
codd. ( ἀν-οῖσαι is prob. in Hdt.1.157):—[voice] Med., [tense] fut.οἴσομαι Il.22.217
, S.El. 969, etc. (in pass. sense, E.Or. 440, X.Oec.18.6; so [dialect] Dor.οἰσεῖται Archim.Fluit.1.7
, al.): [tense] fut. [voice] Pass.οἰσθήσομαι D.44.45
, Arist. Ph. 205a13, Archim.Fluit.1.3, al., ([etym.] ἐξ-) E.Supp. 561:—[voice] Pass., [tense] pf.προοῖσται Luc.Par.2
; cf. οἰστέον, οἰστός ([etym.] ἀν-οιστός).III from ἐνεγκ- (not found in Hom. or Hdt., exc. as v.l. in Il.19.194, but in Pi.O.13.66, I.8(7).21, ([etym.] προς-) Id.P.9.36, also B.16.62, and normal in [dialect] Att. and Trag., also in codd.Hp., Epid.1.1.2, al.) come [tense] aor. 1 ἤνεγκα, and [tense] aor. 2 ἤνεγκον:—Indic., [ per.] 1sg. (lyr.), 964, Ar.Ra. 1299, Th. 742, Lys. 944, ([etym.] δι-) Isoc.18.59, butἤνεγκα S.El. 13
, E. Ion38, Aeschin.2.4, and in compos. with Preps.; [ per.] 2sg. always (lyr.), ([etym.] ἐξ-) S.Tr. 741 (in Ar.Th. 742, δέκα μῆνας αὔτ' ἐγὼ ἤνεγκον is answd. by ἤνεγκας σύ;); [ per.] 3sg. ἤνεγκε, common to both forms; dualδι-ηνεγκάτην Pl.Lg. 723b
; pl. always ἠνέγκαμεν, -ατε, -αν ([ per.] 3pl.ἀπ-ήνενκαν IG22.1620.37
, al., once ἀπ-ήνεγκον ib. 1414.2; δι-ηνέγκομεν is f.l. in X.Oec.9.8): imper., [ per.] 2sg. , Ar.Eq. 110, X.Mem.3.6.9 ( ἔνεγκον cj. Pors. in Anaxipp. 8); [ per.] 3sg. (troch.), Th. 238, Pl.Phd. 116d, ([etym.] προς-) X.Smp.5.2; butἐξ-ενεγκέτω IG12.63.33
, 76.61; [dialect] Dor. [ per.] 3pl. ἐνεγκόντω ib.5 (1).26.16 (Amyclae, ii/i B. C.); [ per.] 2pl.ἐξ-ενέγκατε Ar.Ra. 847
: subj. ἐνέγκω common to both forms: opt., [ per.] 1sg. , Pl.Cri. 43c: [ per.] 3sg. ἐνέγκαι (cod.A, but - κοι cod.Laur.) S.Tr. 774, butἐνέγκοι Id.Fr.84
(anap.), Pl.R. 330a, ([etym.] ξυν-) Th.6.20, etc.; [ per.] 2pl. ἐνέγκαιτε ( ἐνέγκατε codd.) E.Heracl. 751 (lyr.): inf. , S.OC 1599, IG22.40.18, etc., ([etym.] προς-) Pi.P.9.36, Hp.VM15; Hellenistic ([etym.] εἰς-), PAmh.2.30.35 (ii B. C.), Ev.Marc. 2.4 ([etym.] προς-), etc., found also in codd.Hp., Aff.3 ([etym.] προς-), Nat.Mul.19 ([etym.] δι-): part.ἐνεγκών Pi.I.8(7).21
, S.El. 692, Th.6.56, etc.,ἐνέγκας IG22.1361.21
([etym.] εἰς-), 333.4, D.49.51 (and later, Demetr.Com.Nov.1.10 ([etym.] εἰς-), Arist.Oec. 1351a14, etc.; in X. we findἐξ-ενεγκόντες Mem.1.2.53
, and δι-ενεγκοῦσα, συν-ενεγκόντες, vv. ll. in ib.2.2.5, An.6.5.6):— [voice] Med., only ἠνεγκάμην, Ar.Ec.76 ([etym.] ἐξ-), etc. (exc. imper. ); [ per.] 2sg. , X.Oec.7.13; [ per.] 3sg. , Pl.R. 406b, etc.; [ per.] 1pl.ἠνεγκάμεθα Id. Ion 530b
, ([etym.] προ-) Phlb. 57a; inf.εἰς-ενέγκασθαι Isoc.15.188
: part.ἐνεγκάμενος Aeschin.1.131
, ([etym.] ἀπ-) X.Ages.6.2.IV from ἐνεικ- comes [tense] aor. 1 ἤνεικα, found mostly in [dialect] Ion. (but not in codd. Hp.), [dialect] Ep. and Lyr., also at Cos (v. infr.) and implied elsewh. in pass. forms (v. infr. v):—the endings are those of [tense] aor. 1, exc. in imper.ἔνεικε Od.21.178
, inf. ἐνεικέμεν (v.l. ἐνεγκέμεν) Il.19.194, ἐνείκην (v. infr.), and part. μετ-ενεικών, ἐξενικοῦσι (v. infr.), cf. συνενείκομαι:—[ per.] 1sg.ἀν-ένεικα Od.11.625
; [ per.] 2sg.ἀπ-ένεικας Il.14.255
; [ per.] 3sg.ἤνεικε Od.18.300
, al., Hdt.2.146, [dialect] Ep.ἔνεικε Il.15.705
, al.; [ per.] 1pl.ἐνείκαμεν Od.24.43
; [ per.] 3pl.ἤνεικαν Hdt.3.30
, [dialect] Ep.ἔνεικαν Il.9.306
; imper. [ per.] 2sg.ἔνεικον Anacr.62.3
; [ per.] 2pl.,ἐνείκατε Od. 8.393
; [ per.] 3pl.ἐνεικάντων Schwyzer 688
B 3 (Chios, v B. C.); inf.ἐνεῖκαι Il.18.334
, Pi.P.9.53, Hdt.1.32; ἐνεικέμεν (v. supr.); [dialect] Aeol.ἐνείκην Alc.Oxy.1788
Fr.15ii 20; part.ἐνείκας Il.17.39
, ([etym.] ἀν-) Hdt.2.23;μετ-ενεικών Abh.Berl.Akad.1928(6).22
(Cos, iii B. C.):—[voice] Med., [ per.] 3sg.ἀν-ενείκατο Il.19.314
; [ per.] 3pl.ἠνείκαντο 9.127
, Hdt.1.57, ([etym.] ἐς-) 7.152; part.ἐνεικάμενος Alc.35.4
.2 [tense] aor. 1 ἤνῐκα is found in the foll. dialect forms: [ per.] 3sg.ἤνικε IG42(1).121.110
(Epid., iv B. C.); Bi11 (Delph., iv B. C.);ἀν-ήνικε IG4.757A12
, al. (Troezen, ii B. C.); ἀπ-ήνικε ib.42(1).103.16, al. (Epid., iv B. C.); but ἤνῑκε is prob. written for ἤνεικε in IG4.801.3 (Troezen, vi B. C.); [ per.] 1pl. ἀν-ηνίκαμες [ῐ] GDI 3591b21 ([place name] Calymna); [ per.] 3pl. Bi 17 (Delph., iv B. C.), IG 12(2).15.15 (Mytil., iii B. C.); [ per.] 3sg. subj.ἐνίκει Berl.Sitzb.1927.161
([place name] Cyrene); ἐς-ενίκη, and inf. ἐς-ένικαι, IG12(2).645b43,39 (Nesus, iv B. C.); part. (dat. pl.)ἐξ-ενικοῦσι IG4.823.49
(Troezen, iv B. C.); so in later Gr.,εἰς-ήνικα Supp.Epigr.7.381
,382 (Dura-Europos, iii A. D.); ἤνιγκα ib.383 (ibid., iii A. D.):—[voice] Med., part.ἐξ-ε[νικ]άμενος IG12
(2).526a5 (Eresus, iv B. C.).b [dialect] Boeot. [tense] aor. 1 in [ per.] 3pl.εἴνιξαν IG7.2418.24
(Thebes, iv B. C.); [ per.] 1sg. ἤνειγξα Hdn.Gr.2.374.V other tenses: [tense] pf.ἐνήνοχα D.21.108
, 22.62, ([etym.] ἐξ-) Luc.Pr.Im.15,17, ([etym.] μετ-) Pl.Criti. 113a, ([etym.] συν-) v. l. in X.Mem.3.5.22:—[voice] Pass., [tense] fut.ἐνεχθήσομαι Arist.Ph. 205b12
, Archim.Fluit.2.2, al., ([etym.] ἐπ-) Th.7.56, ([etym.] κατ-) Isoc.13.19: [tense] aor.ἠνέχθην X.An.4.7.12
and freq. in compds.; [dialect] Ion.ἀπ-ηνείχθην Hdt.1.66
, etc.; ([etym.] περι-) ib.84; [ per.] 3pl. written ἠνείχτθησαν in Schwyzer 707B9 (Ephesus, vi B. C.); [dialect] Dor. part.ἐξ-ενειχθείς IG42(1).121.115
(Epid., iv B. C.); Hellenisticἐνεγχθείς PCair.Zen.327.42
(iii B. C.), ([etym.] συμπερι-) IPE12.32A31,78, B70 (Olbia, iii B. C.); in dialects, [ per.] 3sg. indic.ἀπ-ηνίχθη IG42(1).103.111
(Epid., iv B. C.); [ per.] 3sg. subj. ἐξενιχθῇ ib.12(5).593 A23 (Ceos, v B. C.), Abh.Berl.Akad.1928(6).21 (Cos, iii B. C.); [dialect] Boeot.ἐν-ενιχθεῖ IG7.3172.150
(Thespiae, iii B. C.); part. (neut.)ἐπ-ενιχθέν Abh.Berl.Akad.1928(6).53
(Telos, iv B. C., ined.); [dialect] Att. [tense] pf.ἐνήνεγμαι, ἐνήνεκται Pl.R. 584d
,εἰς-ενήνεκται E. Ion 1340
;ἀν-ενήνεγκται IG12.91.4
; ἐπαν-ενήνειγκται ib.22.1607a7; [dialect] Ion.ἐξ-ενηνειγμένος Hdt.8.37
; [dialect] Att. [tense] plpf.προς-ενήνεκτο X.HG4.3.20
; part.κατ-, μετ-ενηνεγμένος Plb.10.30.2
, Str.13.1.12. (With φέρω cf. Lat.fero, OE. beran, Skt. bhárati 'bear'; οἴσω is of uncertain origin; ἐνεγκ- is prob. redupl. ἐγκ- ( ἐνεκ- in [voice] Pass. forms and in δουρηνεκής, etc.), cogn. with Skt. náśati 'attain,' Lat. nanciscor, Lith. nèšti 'carry, bear'; ἐνεικ- ([etym.] ἐνῐκ-) is of uncertain origin; the glosses ἐνέεικαν· ἤνεγκαν, and ἐνεείκω· ἐνέγκω (Hsch.) are not corroborated.)A [voice] Act.,I bear or carry a load,ἐν ταλάροισι φέρον μελιηδέα καρπόν Il.18.568
;μέγα ἔργον, ὃ οὐ δύο γ' ἄνδρε φέροιεν 5.303
;ἦγον μὲν μῆλα, φέρον δ' εὐήνορα οἶνον Od.4.622
;χοάς A.Ch.15
;φ. ἐπ' ὤμοις S.Tr. 564
;χερσὶν φ. Id.Ant. 429
;φ. ὅπλα βραχίονι E.Hec.14
; bear (as a device) on one's shield, A.Th. 559, etc.; γαστέρι κοῦρον φ., of a pregnant woman, Il.6.59; φ. ὑπὸ ζώνην or ζώνης ὕπο, A.Ch. 1000(992), E.Hec. 762: in Trag. stronger than ἔχω, ἁγνὰς αἵματος χεῖρας φ. to have hands clean from blood, E.Hipp. 316 (v.l. φορεῖς); ἀλαὸν ὄμμα φέρων Id.Ph. 1531
(lyr.);γλῶσσαν εὔφημον φ. A.Ch. 581
, cf. Supp. 994;καλὸν φ. στόμα S.Fr. 930
codd. (nisi leg. φορῇ) ; ἄψοφονβάσιν φ. Id.Tr. 967
(lyr.).II bear, convey, with collat. notion of motion, freq. in Hom.,πῇ δὴ.. τόξα φέρεις; Od.21.362
; πρόσω φ. ib. 369;εἴσω φέρω σ' ἐντεῦθεν Ar.V. 1444
, cf. Pl.Lg. 914b;πόδες φέρον Il.6.514
;πέδιλα τά μιν φέρον 24.341
, etc.; of horses, 2.838;ἵππω.. ἅρμα οἴσετον 5.232
, etc.; of ships, Od.16.323, cf. Il.9.306;τὰ σώματα τῶν ζῴων συνέστηκεν ἐκ τοῦ φέροντος καὶ τοῦ φερομένου Diocl. Fr.17
.b of persons, bring to bear, μένος or μένος χειρῶν ἰθύς τινος φέρειν hurl one's strength right upon or against him, Il.16.602, 5.506; φ. τὴν ὀργήν, τὴν αἰτίαν ἐπί τινα, Plb.21.31.8, 33.11.2.2 of wind, bear along, [πνοιὴ Ζεφύρου] φ. νῆάς τε καὶ αὐτούς Od.10.26
; [σχεδίην] ἄνεμοι φέρον ἔνθα καὶ ἔνθα 5.330
, cf. 4.516, Il.19.378, etc.;ἐπέλασσε φέρων ἄνεμος Od.3.300
, 7.277, cf. 5.111, etc.: abs., ὁ βορέας ἔξω τοῦ Πόντου εἰς τὴν Ἑλλάδα φέρει is fair for Greece, X.An.5.77: metaph.,ὅπῃ ἂν ὁ λόγος ὥσπερ πνεῦμα φ. Pl.R. 394d
;φ. τινὰ φρένες δύσαρκτοι A.Ch. 1023
, cf. Th. 687 (lyr.):—[voice] Pass., v. infr. B.III endure, suffer,λυγρά Od.18.135
;ἄτην Hdt.1.32
; χαλινόν, ζυγόν, A.Ag. 1066, 1226; πημονάς, τύχας, Id.Pers. 293, E.Or. 1024;ξυμφοράς Th.2.60
; ; also of food,ἐσθίουσι πλείω ἢ δύνανται φ. X.Cyr.8.2.21
; of strong wine, bear, admit, καὶ τὰ τρία φέρων καλῶς, i.e. three parts of water, instead of ἴσον ἴσῳ, Ar.Eq. 1188, cf. Ach. 354; so τὰς ἐπιδείξεις.. φέρουσιν αὐτοῦ (sc. Ἰσοκράτους)οἱ λόγοι, τοὺς δὲ ἐν ἐκκλησίαις.. ἀγῶνας οὐχ ὑπομένουσι D.H.Isoc.2
: metaph.,ᾗ φέρειν πέφυκε Pl.Ti. 48a
.2 freq. with modal words,πήματα κόσμῳ φ. Pi.P.3.82
; ;ὀργῇ τὸν πόλεμον Th.1.31
;θυμῷ φ. Id.5.80
;χαρᾷ φ. τι J.AJ19.1.13
: esp. with an Adv., [ὕβριν] ῥηϊδίως φ. Hes.Op. 215
; δεινῶς, βαρέως, πικρῶς, χαλεπῶς φέρειν τι, bear a thing impatiently, take it ill or amiss, Hdt.2.121.γ, 5.19, E. Ion 610, Pl.R. 330a, etc.; δυσπετῶς, βαρυστόνως φ., A.Pr. 752, Eu. 794; προθύμως φέρειν τὸν πόλεμον to be zealous about the war, Hdt.9.18,40;προθύμως τὰ τοῦ πολέμου ἔφερον Th.8.36
;αἶσαν φέρειν ὡς ῥᾷστα A.Pr. 104
;συμφορὴν ὡς κουφότατα φ. Hdt.1.35
;ῥᾳδίως φ. Pl.Grg. 522d
, al.;εὐπετῶς φ. S.Fr. 585
, X.Mem.2.1.6; εὐπόρως ( εὐφόρως Brunck) ; εὐμενῶς, εὐχερῶς φ., D.Ep. 3.45, Pl.R. 474e; these phrases are used mostly c. acc. rei; also c. part.,βαρέως ἤνεικε ἰδών Hdt.3.155
, cf. Ar.Th. 385, etc.;φ. ἐλαφρῶς.. λαβόντα ζυγόν Pi.P.2.93
;ῥᾳδίως φέρεις ἡμᾶς ἀπολείπων Pl. Phd. 63a
: c. gen.,τοῦ ἐνδεοῦς χαλεπώτερον φ. Th.1.77
, cf. 2.62;ἐπί τινι, χαλεπῶς φ. ἐπὶ τῇ πολιορκίᾳ X.HG7.4.21
, cf. Isoc.12.232;πράως ἐπὶ τοῖς γιγνομένοις φ. D.58.55
: c. dat. only, βαρέως φέρειν τοῖς παροῦσι, τῇ ἀτιμίᾳ, X.An.1.3.3, HG3.4.9, cf. 5.1.29; later, χαλεπῶς φ. διά τι, πρός τι, D.S.17.111, Jul.Or.1.17c codd.IV bring, fetch,εἰ.. θεὸς αὐτὸν ἐνείκαι Od.21.196
;φ. ἄποινα Il.24.502
;ἄρνε 3
, 120, cf. Sapph.95; ὕδωρ, οἶνον, Anacr.62.1;ἔντεα Il.18.191
;τόξα Od.21.359
; ; , etc.;γῆν τε καὶ ὕδωρ Hdt.7.131
:—[voice] Med., carry or bring with one, or for one's own use,ποδάνιπτρα Od.19.504
;οἶνον Alc.35
, cf. Hdt.4.67, 7.50, X. Mem.3.14.1;φερνὰς δόμοις E.Andr. 1282
; fetch, Od.2.410;χοὰς ἐκ κρήνης S.OC 470
.2 bring, offer, present,δῶρα Od.8.428
, etc.;μέλος Pi.P.2.3
; ;φ. πέπλον δώρημά τινι S.Tr. 602
;πρός τινα δῶρα X.An.7.3.31
; χάριν τινὶ φ. grant any one a favour, do him a kindness, Il.5.211, Od.5.307, al.;ἐπὶ ἦρα φ. τινί Il.1.572
, Od.3.164, etc.; φ. τισὶ εὐνοίας, ὄνησιν ἀστοῖς, A.Supp. 489, S.OC 287; but after Hom., χάριν τινὶ φ. show gratitude to him, Pi.O.10(11).17; μῆνιν φ. τινί cherish wrath against.. A.Niob. in PSI11.1208.12.b = ἄγω iv. 1,ἄχρι νῦν καθ' ὥραν ἔτους λέγονται πένθος ἐπὶ Μελεάγρῳ φέρειν Ant.Lib.2.7
; Ἰάλεμος· ὁ ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀπολωλόσιν ἀνίαν φέρων, Suid.:—[voice] Med.,τοῦ γονέως ἐφ' ᾧ γε τὸ πένθος φέρεσθε Phalar.Ep.103.1
.3 bring, produce, cause, [ἀστὴρ] φέρει πυρετὸν βροτοῖσιν Il.22.31
;ὄσσαν.. ἥ τε φ. κλέος ἀνθρώποισι Od.1.283
, cf. 3.204; φ. κακόν, πῆμα, ἄλγεα, etc., work one woe, Il.8.541, Od.12.231, 427, etc.; δηϊοτῆτα φ. bring war, 6.203;ἐπ' ἀλλήλοισι φ. Ἄρηα Il.3.132
, cf. 8.516; ;θάνατον φ. B.5.134
;τοῦτο εὐδοξίαν σοι οἴσει Pl.Ep. 312c
; ;τέχναι.. φόβον φέρουσιν μαθεῖν A.Ag. 1135
(lyr.); ὥσπερ τὸ δίκαιον ἔφερε as justice brought with it, brought about, i.e. as was just, no more than just, Hdt.5.58;ἀν' ὄ κα φέρῃ ὁ λόγος ὁ ταμία Φιλοκλέος IG42(1).77.13
(Epid., ii B. C.); of a calculation, yield a result, Vett.Val.349.27; produce, adduce, bring forward,παραδείγματα Isoc.7.6
, etc.;πάσας αἰτίας D.58.22
;ἁρμόττουσαν εἰκόνα Id.61.10
:—[voice] Pass.,εἰς τὴν συνηγορίαν.. τοιαῦτά τινα φέρεται Sor.2.3
.4 μῦθον φ. τινί bring one word, Il.10.288, 15.202; ἀγγελίην φ. bring a message, ib. 175, Od.1.408;λόγον Pi.P.8.38
;ἐπιστολὰς φ. τινί S.Aj. 781
, cf. Tr. 493;ἐπιστολήν X.Ages.8.3
: hence, tell, announce, πευθώ, φάτιν, A.Th. 370, Ag.9;σαφές τι πρᾶγος Id.Pers. 248
(troch.), cf. Ag. 639, etc.; report, ἀγήν (breakages) PCair.Zen. 15r27 (iii B. C.); φ. κεχωνευκώς reports that he has.., ib.741.26, cf. 147.4, 268.24 (all iii B. C.); enter, book a payment made, PBaden47.12:—[voice] Med.,λόγους φ. E.Supp. 583
; but also ἀγγελίας ἔπος οἴσῃ thou shalt have it brought thee, receive, Id.Ph. 1546 (lyr.);μαντήϊα.. φέρονται Hes.Fr.134.9
:—[voice] Pass., θάνατον ἀνάγκη φέρεσθαι τοῦ διαθεμένου the death of the testator must be announced, Ep.Heb.9.16.5 pay something due or owing, φόρον τέσσαρα τάλαντα φ. pay as a tax or tribute, Th.4.57, cf. IG12.57.9, Pl.Plt. 298a, PCair.Zen.467.7 (iii B. C.);δασμόν X.An.5.5.10
; σύνοδον φ. subscribe to the expense of a meeting, IG22.1012.14, 1326.6;χρήματα πᾶσι τάξαντες φ. Th.1.19
;μισθὸν φ. X.Cyr.1.6.12
(but usu., receive, draw, pay,μισθὸν δύο δραχμὰς τῆς ἡμέρας Ar.Ach.66
; ;αἱ νῆες μισθὸν ἔφερον Th. 3.17
, cf. X.An.1.3.21, Oec.1.6);φ. ἐννέα ὀβολοὺς τῆς μνᾶς τόκους Lys.Fr.1.2
, cf. Lycurg.23; also of property, bring in, yield as rent,φ. μίσθωσιν τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ Is.5.35
.6 apply, refer, , Chrm. 163d, R. 478b, cf. Plb.3.36.7, al.; φ. τὰ πράγματα ἐπί τινα confer powers upon, Id.2.50.6.7 ψῆφον φ. give one's vote, A.Eu. 674, 680, And.1.2, Is.11.18; ψῆφος καθ' ἡμῶν οἴσεται ([voice] Pass.) E.Or. 440;περὶ ταύτης ἡ ψῆφος οἰσθήσεται D.44.45
;ὑπὲρ ἀγῶνος Lycurg.7
, cf. 11: hence φ. τινά appoint or nominate to an office,φ. χορηγόν D.20.130
, 39.7, cf. Pl.Lg. 753d, Arist.Pol. 1266a10:—[voice] Pass., ibid.; (ii B. C.);τῶν φερομένων ἐν Κλεοπάτρᾳ κληρούχων PRein.10.13
, al. (ii B. C.); φερομένου μου ἐν τῇ συνοχῇ since I am enrolled in prison, i.e. am in prison, BGU1821.21 (i B. C.):—[voice] Med., choose, adopt,ταύταν φ. βιοτάν E.Andr. 785
(lyr.).V bring forth, produce, whether of the earth or of trees,φ. ἄρουρα φάρμακα Od.4.229
;ἄμπελοι φ. οἶνον 9.110
; [νῆσος] φ. ὥρια πάντα ib. 131, cf. Hes.Op. 117; [οὐ] γῆ καρπὸν ἔφερε Hdt.6.139
;γύαι φ. βίοτον A.Fr.196.5
, cf. Pi.N.11.41, E.Hec. 593, etc.: abs., bear fruit, be fruitful,εὖτ' ἂν τάδε πάντα φέρῃσι h.Merc.91
; ἡ γῆ ἔφερε ( καρπόν add. codd. quidam) Hdt.5.82;αἱ ἄμπελοι φέρουσιν X.Oec.20.4
; also of living beings,τόπος ἄνδρας φ. Pl.Ti. 24c
;ἤνεγκεν αὐτὸν Λαοδίκεια Philostr. VS1.25.1
; one's country,Hld.
2.29, Lib.Or. 2.66, al., Chor.p.81 B., Lyd.Mag.3.26, dub. in Supp.Epigr.4.439 (Milet.) without Art. (alsoἡ ἐνεγκαμένη Jul.Ep. 202
); or Mother Earth, M.Ant.4.48: generally, create, form,Πηνειὸς Τέμπη φ. Philostr.Im.1.25
; [τὰ βρέφη] ἄρχεται φέρειν τοὺς ὀδόντας Aët.4.9
;φ. τοὺς κυνόδοντας Gp.16.1.14
.VI carry off or away,Κῆρες ἔβαν θανάτοιο φέρουσαι Il.2.302
;φ. τινὰ ἐκ πόνου 14.429
, 17.718, etc.; of winds, [ἔπος] φέροιεν ἀναρπάξασαι ἄελλαι may the winds sweep away the word, Od.8.409; of a river, Hdt.1.189:—[voice] Med., carry off with one, Od.15.19.2 carry away as booty or prize, ἔναρα, τεύχεα, Il.6.480, 17.70;αἶγα λέοντε φ. 13.199
; δεῖπνον φ., of Harpies, A.Eu.51;ἐνέχυρα βίᾳ φ. Antipho 6.11
; in the phrase φέρειν καὶ ἄγειν (cf.ἄγω 1.3
), IG12.69.19; φέροντα ἢ ἄγοντα Lex ap.D.23.60;αἴ κα.. ἄγῃ ἢ φέρῃ Leg.Gort.5.37
;ἥρπαζον καὶ ἔφερον Lys.20.17
;κείρων ἢ φέρων IG12(9).90.10
(Tamynae, iv B. C.);αἴ τίς κα.. φέρει τι τῶν ἐν τᾷ ἱαρᾷ γᾷ Tab.Heracl.1.128
; of a divorced wife,αἰ δέ τι ἄλλο φέροι τῶ ἀνδρός, πέντε στατῆρανς καταστασεῖ κὤτι κα φέρῃ αὐτόν Leg.Gort.3.2
; φέρειν alone, rob, plunder, ;ἀλλήλους Th.1.7
; abs., SIG38.23 (Teos, v B. C.):—[voice] Pass.,φερόμενοι Βακχῶν ὕπο E.Ba. 759
:—[voice] Med. in same sense,ἔναρα Il.22.245
;πελέκεας οἶκόνδε φ. 23.856
;ἀτερπέα δαῖτα Od.10.124
, cf. 15.378.3 carry off, gain, esp. by toil or trouble, win, achieve, both [voice] Act. and [voice] Med.,ἤ κε φέρῃσι μέγα κράτος ἦ κε φεροίμην Il.18.308
;φέρειν τρίποδα Hes.Op. 657
; ; ; τἀριστεῖα, τὰ νικητήρια, Pl.R. 468c, Lg. 657e;πέρα.. οὐδὲν φ. S.OC 651
;ἐκ σοῦ πάντ' ἄνευ φόβου φ. Id.OT 590
; τίς.. πλέον τᾶς εὐδαιμονίας φέρει ἤ .. ; ib. 1190 (lyr.), cf. El. 1088 (lyr.); in bad sense,μείζω τὴν αἰσχύνην φ. Pl.Lg. 671e
: also, receive one's due,φ. χάριν S.OT 764
; ; μισθὸν φέρειν (v. supr. iv.5); of a priest's perquisites,φέρει ὁ ἱαρεὺς γέρη σκέλη κτλ. BMus.Inscr.968
A 9 ([place name] Cos), cf. IG12.24.10, al., SIG56.35 (Argos, v B. C.):—[voice] Med. (v. ad init.), win for oneself,κῦδος οἴσεσθαι Il.22.217
; δέπας, τεύχεα, carry off as a prize, 23.663, 809, al.; ἀέθλια or ἄεθλον φ. carry off, win a prize, 9.127, 23.413; τὰ πρῶτα φέρεσθαι (sc. ἄεθλα) 23.275, 538; ; of perquisites, τὸ.. σκέλος τοὶ ἱαρομνάμονες φερόσθω (i. e. φερούσθω from Φερόνσθω) IG42(1).40.13 (Epid., v/iv B. C.): henceοὐ τὰ δεύτερα Hdt.8.104
; πλέον φέρεσθαι get more or a larger share for onself, gain the advantage over any one, τινος Hdt.7.211, cf. S.OT 500 (lyr.), E.Hec. 308; ταῦτα ἐπὶ σμικρόν τι ἐφέροντο τοῦ πολέμου this they received as a small help towards the war, Hdt.4.129; ; ;χάριν φέρεσθαι παρ' ὑμῶν And.2.9
;φ. τὴν ἀπέχθειαν αὐτῶν Antipho 3.4.2
; ;εὐσέβειαν ἐκ πατρὸς οἴσῃ S.El. 969
;δάκρυ πρὸς τῶν κλυόντων A.Pr. 638
;ἀπό τινος βοσκάν Id.Eu. 266
(lyr.);ἐξ ἀνανδρίας τοὔνομα Aeschin.1.131
: generally, get for one's own use and profit, take and carry away, esp. to one's own home,τοῦ.. πάμπρωτα παρ' ἀγλαὰ δῶρα φέροιο Il.4.97
: hence φέρειν or φέρεσθαι is often used pleon., v. infr. xi.VII abs., of roads or ways, lead to a place,ὁδὸν φέρουσαν ἐς ἱρόν Hdt.2.122
, cf. 138; τὴν φέρουσαν ἄνω (sc. ὁδόν) Id.9.69;τῆς μὲν ἐς ἀριστερὴν ἐπὶ Καρίης φ., τῆς δὲ ἐς δεξιὴν ἐς Σάρδις Id.7.31
;ἐπὶ Σοῦσα X.An.3.5.15
; ;ἡ ἐς Θήβας φέρουσα ὁδός Th.3.24
(but ἡ ἐπ' Ἀθηνῶν φέρουσα ibid.); also ἡ θύρα ἡ εἰς τὸν κῆπον φ. the door leading to the garden, D.47.53; αἱ εἰς τὴν πόλιν φ. πύλαι, αἱ ἐπὶ τὸ τεῖχος φ. κλίμακες, X.HG7.2.7, cf. PMich.Zen.38.27 (iii B. C.), Plb.10.12.3.2 of a district or tract of country, stretch, extend to or towards, φέρειν ἐπί orἐς θάλασσαν Hdt.4.99
; ἐς τὴν μεσόγαιαν ib. 100;πρὸς νότον Id.7.201
; ἡ ἀπὸ δυσμῶν αὐτῆς (sc. τῆς Κιμβρικῆς)καὶ ἐπὶ τὸν Ἄλβιν φέρουσα Ptol.Geog.2.11.2
, cf. 3.3 metaph., lead to or towards, be conducive to,ἐς αἰσχύνην φέρει Hdt.1.10
;τὰ ἐς ἄκεσιν φέροντα Id.4.90
; ἐς βλάβην, ἐς φόβον φέρον, S.OT 517, 991; : esp. in good sense, tend, conduce to one's interest, ἐπ' ἀμφότερά τοι φέρει (impers.)ταῦτα ποιέειν Hdt.3
. 134; soτὰ πρὸς τὸ ὑγιαίνειν φέροντα X.Mem.4.2.31
;τροφαὶ μέγα φ. εἰς ἀρετάν E.IA 562
(lyr.); μέγα τι οἰόμεθα φέρειν (sc. κοινωνίαν γυναικῶν τε καὶ παίδων)εἰς πολιτείαν Pl.R. 449d
; τὰ καλὰ ἐπιτηδεύματα εἰς ἀρετῆς κτῆσιν φ. ib. 444e, cf. X.Cyr.8.1.42; τοῦτο ἔφερεν αὐτῷ was for his good, M.Ant.5.8.b point to, refer to a thing,ἐς τί ὑμῖν ταῦτα φαίνεται φέρειν; Hdt.1.120
; φωνὴ φέρουσα πρός τινα addressed to him, Id.1.159; , cf. 6.19; [ὄψις] φέρει ἐπὶ πᾶσαν γῆν refers to.., extends over.., Id.7.19; τὰ ἴχνη τῆς ὑποψίας εἰς τοῦτον φ. point to him, Antipho 2.3.10;πρός τινας Pl.R. 538c
;ταύτῃ <ὁ> νόος ἔφερε Hdt.9.120
; ἡ τοῦ δήμου φέρει γνώμη, ὡς .., the people's opinion inclines to this, that.., Id.4.11;ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ αἱ γνῶμαι ἔφερον Th.1.79
: c. inf., τῶν ἡ γνώμη ἔφερε συμβάλλειν whose opinion inclined to giving battle, Hdt.6.110, cf. 5.118; πλέον ἔφερέ οἱ ἡ γνώμη κατεργάσεσθαι his opinion inclined rather to the view.., Hdt.8.100, cf. 3.77.VIII carry or have in the mouth, i. e. speak of,πολύν τινα ἐν ταῖς διαβολαῖς φέρειν Aeschin.3.223
; use a word,οὐκ οἶδα καθ' ὁποτέρου τούτων οἱ παλαιοὶ τὸ τῆς ζειᾶς ἔφερον ὄνομα Gal.Vict.Att.6
, cf. 7.644, 15.753, 876; record an event,οἱ δευτέρῳ μετὰ τὴν ἔξοδον.. ἔτει φέροντες αὐτήν D.H.1.63
: more freq. in [voice] Pass., πονηρῶς, εὖ, φέρεσθαι, to be ill or well spoken of, X.HG1.5.17, 2.1.6;ἀτίμως ὑπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων φ. Pl.Ep. 328e
; abs., φέρεται [the report] is carried about, i.e. it is said, c. acc. et inf.,τοιόνδε φέρεται πρῆγμα γίνεσθαι Hdt.8.104
(v.l.); ἐν χρόνοις φέρεται μνημονευομένοις is recorded as occurring within historical times, Str.1.3.15;ὅτε καὶ Δημόκριτος φέρεται τελευτήσας Sor.Vit.Hippocr.11
;κρίνομεν.. τὰ γραφέντα ὑφ' ἡμῶν προστάγματα ἐν τοῖς ἱεροῖς νόμοις φέρεσθαι παρ' ὑμῖν OGI331.60
(Pergam., ii B. C.); are in use,Ptol.
Geog.7.4.11; of literary works, to be in circulation,ἐπιστόλιον αὐτοῦ τοιοῦτον φέρεται Plu.2.808a
, cf. 209e, 832d, 833c, al., Jul.Or.6.189b, Gp.2.35.8, Eun.VSp.456 B.; πρόλογοι διττοὶ φέρονται Arg.E.Rh.; ὁ στίχος οὗτος ἔν τισιν οὐ φέρεται Sch.E. Ph. 377, cf. Sch.Il.8.557.2 of words, φέρεσθαι ἐπί τι to refer to something, A.D.Pron.61.5, Synt.21.14, al.1 before another imper.,φέρε γὰρ σήμαινε A.Pr. 296
(anap.);φέρ' εἰπὲ δή μοι S.Ant. 534
;φ. δή μοι τόδε εἰπέ Pl.Cra. 385b
; soφέρετε.. πειρᾶσθε Hdt.4.127
.2 before [ per.] 1sg. or pl. of subj. used imperatively, φέρε ἀκούσω, φέρε στήσωμεν, Hdt.1.11,97;φ. δὲ νῦν.. φράσω Id.2.14
;φέρ' ἴδω, τί δ' ἥσθην; Ar.Ach.4
;φέρε δὴ κατίδω Id. Pax 361
, cf. 959; φ. δὴ ἴδωμεν, φ. δὴ σκεψώμεθα, Pl.Grg. 455a, Prt. 330b, cf. E.Or. 1281 (lyr.), Ph. 276, etc.: less freq. before 2 pers.,φέρε.. μάθῃς S.Ph. 300
.3 before a rhetorical question,φέρε.. τροπαῖα πῶς ἀναστήσεις; E.Ph. 571
;φ. δὴ νῦν.. τί γαμεῖθ' ἡμᾶς; Ar.Th. 788
(anap.), cf. Ach. 541, Pl.R. 348c; φ. μῶν οὐκ ἀνάγκη .. ; Id.Lg. 805d; φ. πρὸς θεῶν πῶς .. ; Id.Grg. 514d; freq. in phraseφέρε γάρ, φέρε τίς γὰρ οὗτος; Ar.Nu. 218
;φ. γὰρ πρὸς τίνας χρὴ πολεμεῖν; Isoc.4.183
, cf. Antipho 5.36; alsoφ. δή Pl.Grg. 455a
, al.: usu. first in a sentence, butτὴν ἀνδρείαν δὲ φ. τί θῶμεν; Id.Lg. 633c
, etc.5 φέρε c. inf., suppose, grant that..φ. λέγειν τινά Plu.2.98b
; φ. εἰπεῖν let us say, D.Chr.31.93, 163, Porph.Abst.3.3;οἷον φ. εἰ. Iamb. in Nic.p.47
P., al. ( οἷον φέρε alone, Hierocl. in CA11p.439M.).X part. neut. τὸ φέρον, as Subst., destiny, fate, τὸ φ. ἐκ θεοῦ [καλῶς] φέρειν [χρή] ye must bear nobly what heaven bears to you, awards you, S.OC 1693 (lyr., codd., sed secl. καλῶς, χρή); εἰ τὸ φερον σε φέρει, φέρε καὶ φέρου AP 10.73
(Pall.).2 part. φέρων in all genders freq. joined with another Verb:a to express a subsidiary action, φέρων ἔδωκε he brought and gave, Od.22.146; δὸς τῷ ξείνῳ ταῦτα φέρων take this and give it him, 17.345; ἔγχος ἔστησε φέρων brought the spear and placed it, 1.127; σῖτον παρέθηκε φέρουσα ib. 139, al., cf. S.Tr. 622;τοῦτο ἐλθὼν οἴκαδε φέρων τῷ πατρὶ ἔδωκα Pl.Hp.Ma. 282e
, cf. R. 345b; soὁ μὲν Ἐπίχαρμον.. εἰς δέκα τόμους φέρων συνήγαγεν Porph.Plot. 24
; ἑκάστῃ ἐννεάδι τὰ οἰκεῖα φέρων συνεφόρησα ibid., etc.; sts. translatable by with,ᾤχοντο φέροντες τὰ γράμματα Th.7.8
.b intr., in pass. sense, to denote unrestrained action,νῦν σε μάλ' οἴω.. φέροντα.. φιλητεύσειν h.Merc. 159
; φέρουσα ἐνέβαλε νηΐ φιλίῃ she went and rammed, rammed full tilt, Hdt.8.87; ὅταν ἐπὶ θάτερ' ὥσπερ εἰς τρυτάνην ἀργύριον προσενέγκῃς, οἴχεται φέρον down it sinks, D.5.12;τὰ μὲν ἄλλα μέρη τοῦ πολέμου παρῆκαν, φέροντες δὲ παντὶ τῷ στρατεύματι πρὸς αὐτὸν Ἀκράγαντα προσήρεισαν
hurling themselves,Plb.
1.17.8;εἰς τοῦτο φέρων περιέστησε τὰ πράγματα Aeschin.3.82
; ὑπέβαλεν ἑαυτὸν φέρων Θηβαίοις ib.90, cf. 1.175, 3.143,146; in the foll. passages φέρων accompanies a Verb of throwing, giving, entrusting, or dedicating, and expresses wholehearted action, whether wise or unwise; there is always an accus., freq. of the reflex. Pron., governed by the principal Verb (or perh. by φέρων): ἐπεὶ ἐς τοὺς κρατῆρας ἐμαυτὸν φέρων ἐνέβαλον (sc. ὁ Ἐμπεδοκλῆς ) when I went (or took) and threw myself.., Luc.Icar.13, cf. Fug.1, Plu.Comp.Arist. Cat.1, Fab.6, Per.12, Paus.1.30.1, Ael.VH8.14, Frr.10,69, Philostr. VA3.4;τὴν κατασκευὴν.. φέρων ἐδωρήσατο τῇ μητρί D.S.31.27
, cf. Ach.Tat.1.7;σεαυτὸν.. φέρων ἀπημπόληκας Luc.Merc.Cond.24
;τί παθόντες.. τοῖς ἀτέκνοις τῶν γερόντων ἐσποιεῖτε φέροντες αὑτούς; Luc. DMort.6.3
, cf. Ind.19, Laps.22; ταύτῃ (sc. τῇ ὀργῇ)φέρων ὑπέθηκεν ἑαυτόν Plu.Them.24
, cf. Per.7; , cf. Luc.6, Pomp.27, Ael.VH6.1, Max.Tyr.1.2;προσέθετο φέρων ἑαυτὸν ἐκείνῳ Eun.VS p.456
B., cf.pp.461,465 B., Dam. ap. Suid. s.v. Σεβηριανός; ἀλλὰ σοὶ μὲν, ὦ θεῶν πάτερ, ἐμαυτὸν φέρων ἀναθήσω Jul.Or.7.231b.3 ἔκκρισις.. ἐκ μικρῶν φέρουσα διαστημάτων occurring at short intervals, Sor.2.45.XI φέρειν, φέρεσθαι are freq. added epexegetically to δίδωμι and similar Verbs,δῶκεν.. τρίποδα φέρειν Il.23.513
, cf. 16.665, 17.131;τεύχεα.. δότω φέρεσθαι 11.798
, cf. Od.21.349, E.Tr. 419, 454(troch.).B [voice] Pass. is used in most of the above senses:—special cases:I to be borne or carried involuntarily, esp. to be borne along by waves or winds, to be swept away, φέρεσθαι ἀνέμοισι, θυέλλῃ, Od.9.82, 10.54, cf. A.Pers. 276 (lyr.), etc.; πᾶν δ' ἦμαρ φερόμην, of Hephaestus falling from Olympus, Il.1.592; ἧκε φέρεσθαι he sent him flying, 21.120; ἧκα πόδας καὶ χεῖρε φέρεσθαι I let go my hands and feet, let them swing free [in the leap], Od.12.442, cf. 19.468; μέγα φέρεται πὰρ σέθεν, of a word uttered, comes with weight, Pi.P.1.87;βίᾳ φέρεται Pl.Phdr. 254a
;πνεῦμα φερόμενον Id.R. 496d
;τὸ πνεῦμα κατὰ τὰς ἀναπνοὰς εἴσω τε καὶ ἔξω φέρεται Gal.16.520
;ῥεῖν καὶ φέρεσθαι Pl.Cra. 411c
;φ. εἰς τὸν Τάρταρον Id.Phd. 114b
; simply, move, go,ποῖ γᾶς φέρομαι; S.OT 1309
(anap.); , cf. E.Hec. 1076 (anap.), etc.; of the excreta,τὰ φερόμενα.. εἰ μὲν αὐτομάτως φέροιτο Philum.
ap. Aët.9.12;πρὸς κοιλίαν φερομένην Aët.4.19
: metaph.,εἰς τὸ λοιδορεῖν φέρῃ E.Andr. 729
;πρὸς τὴν τοῦ κάλλους φύσιν Pl.Phdr. 254b
, cf. X.Mem.2.1.4; ἐπὶ ταὐτὸ φέρονται have the same tendency, Phld.Vit.p.42 J.;ἀπὸ δογμάτων καὶ ἀπὸ θεωρημάτων φ. Vett.Val.238.30
; of veins, to be conveyed, Gal.15.531; also ἡ φερομένη οὐσία (the doctrine of) universal motion, Pl.Tht. 177c; οἱ φερόμενοι θεοί the moving gods, i. e. the stars and planets, Plot.2.3.9.2 freq. in part. with another Verb of motion, φερόμενοι ἐσέπιπτον ἐς τοὺς Αἰγινήτας they fell into their hands with a rush, at full speed, Hdt.8.91;ἀπὸ.. ἐλπίδος ᾠχόμην φερόμενος Pl.Phd. 98b
;ἧκε φερόμενος εἰς τὴν ἑαυτοῦ φύσιν Aeschin.3.89
.3 of voluntary and impulsive motion,ἰθὺς φέρεται μένει Il.20.172
; ὁμόσε τινὶ φέρεσθαι come to blows with him, X.Cyn.10.21;δρόμῳ φ. πρός τινα Id.HG4.8.37
;φυγῇ εἰς ἑαυτοὺς φ. Id.Cyr.1.4.23
;ἥξει ἐπ' ἐκεῖνον τὸν λόγον φερόμενος Lycurg.59
;φερόμενος ὑπ' ὀργῆς D.H.Comp.18
.II metaph., καλῶς, κακῶς φέρεσθαι, of things, schemes, etc., turn out, prosper well or ill, succeed or fail,οὔτ' ἂν.. νόμοι καλῶς φέροιντ' ἄν S.Aj. 1074
;κακῶς φ. τὰ ἑαυτοῦ X.HG3.4.25
;εὖ φέρεται ἡ γεωργία Id.Oec.5.17
; ὀλιγώρως ἔχειν καὶ ἐᾶν ταῦτα φέρεσθαι to neglect things and let them take their course, D.8.67; less freq. of persons, fare well or ill, εὖ φερόμενος ἐν στρατηγίαις being generally successful.., Th.5.16, cf. 15;καλῶς φερόμενος τὸ καθ' ἑαυτόν Id.2.60
;φ. ἐν προτιμήσει παρά τινι D.S.33.5
;χεῖρον φερομένη παρὰ τἀδελφῷ J.AJ16.7.6
; of euphonious writing,σύνθεσις καλῶς φερομένη Phld.Po.5.26
.2 behave, ὑποκριτικῶς, ἀστάτως, etc., Vett.Val.38.20, 197.8, al.C [voice] Med.: for its chief usages, v. supr. A. VI. 3. -
3 χαρίζομαι
χαρίζομαι (χάρις; Hom.+) mid. dep.: fut. χαρίσομαι Ro 8:32 (also Lucian, Dial. Mort. 9, 1; Jos., Ant. 2, 28; for Att. χαριοῦμαι); 1 aor. ἐχαρισάμην; pf. κεχάρισμαι. Pass., w. pass. sense: 1 fut. χαρισθήσομαι Phlm 22; 1 aor. ἐχαρίσθην Ac 3:14; 1 Cor 2:12; Phil 1:29.① to give freely as a favor, give graciously (a common term in honorific documents lauding officials and civic-minded pers. for their beneficence, s. SIG index and indexes of other inscriptional corpora) of God (so Ael. Aristid. 39, 3 K.=18 p. 409 D.; Herm. Wr. 12, 12; 16, 5 and p. 462, 30; 490, 9; 35; 492, 11 Sc.; 3 Macc 5:11; EpArist 196; TestSim 4:6; Jos., Ant. 3, 87; 4, 317) θεὸν … τὰ ἐκεῖ θαυμάσια χαριζόμενον God, who graciously bestows wonderful things from the world beyond (as opposed to the finery of this world, which in contrast is ‘shit’; s. δεινός and σκύβαλον) AcPl Ha 2, 23f. τινί τι someth. to someone (Appian, Bell. Civ. 1, 79 §360 χαρίζεσθαί τινι τὴν σωτηρίαν; Paus. 6, 18, 4 χαρίσασθαί μοι τήνδε ὦ βασιλεῦ τὴν χάριν; TestAbr A 3 p. 79, 30 [Stone p. 6] τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν) Ro 8:32; Phil 2:9; 2 Cl 1:4; Hs 9, 28, 6; D 10:3. This is also the place for Gal 3:18 if τὴν κληρονομίαν is to be supplied fr. the context (but s. end of this sec.). τυφλοῖς ἐχαρίσατο βλέπειν to the blind he granted the power of sight Lk 7:21 (v.l. τὸ βλέπειν; cp. Plut., Mor. 609a; 2 Macc 3:31, 33). ὁ χαρισάμενος ὑμῖν τοιοῦτον ἐπίσκοπον κεκτῆσθαι the one who (by his favor) granted you to obtain such a bishop IEph 1:3. Pass. 1 Cor 2:12. ὑμῖν ἐχαρίσθη τὸ ὑπὲρ Χριστοῦ πάσχειν you have (graciously) been granted the privilege of suffering for Christ Phil 1:29.—χ. τινά τινι give or grant someone to someone (Semonides 7, 93f D.3: Zeus χαρίζεταί τινά τινι=Z. grants one [i.e., a good wife] to someone) κεχάρισταί σοι ὁ θεὸς πάντας τοὺς πλέοντας μετά σου God has given you all those who are sailing with you, i.e. at your request God has granted them safety fr. deadly danger Ac 27:24. The one who is ‘given’ escapes death or further imprisonment by being handed over to those who wish him freed ᾐτήσασθε ἄνδρα φονέα χαρισθῆναι ὑμῖν Ac 3:14. Cp. Phlm 22 (Diod S 13, 59, 3 ἐχαρίσατο αὐτῷ τοὺς συγγενεῖσ=he granted him his [captured] relatives [and set them free]; Plut., C. Gracch. 836 [4, 3] χ. τὸν Ὀκτάβιον τῇ μητρί; PFlor 61, 61 [I A.D.] cited s.v. ὄχλος 1a, end; Jos., Vi. 355.—On the ‘giving’ of Barabbas s. JMerkel, Die Begnadigung am Passahfeste: ZNW 6, 1905, 293–316). On the other hand, the giving of a man to those who wish him ill results in harm to him (cp. Jos., Vi. 53) οὐδείς με δύναται αὐτοῖς χαρίσασθαι Ac 25:11; cp. vs. 16 (without dat., which is easily supplied; the v.l. adds εἰς ἀπώλειαν to it). Ign. rejects every attempt of others to save his life, because he wishes to leave the world and be with God, and martyrdom opens the way for this: τὸν τοῦ θεοῦ θέλοντα εἶναι κόσμῳ μὴ χαρίσησθε do not give to the world the one who wishes to belong to God IRo 6:2.—W. only the dat. χ. τινι show oneself to be gracious to someone (Diod S 14, 11, 1; Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 112 §467; SIG 354, 4f βουλόμενος χαρίζεσθαι τῷ δήμῳ; ApcEsdr 25:7 τοὺς δικαίους τί χαρίζεις; Jos., Ant. 17, 222; Eunap. p. 77 Boiss.) Gal 3:18 (s. above; also Betz, Gal. ad loc.).② to cancel a sum of money that is owed, cancel (Ps.-Aeschin., Ep. 12, 14; Philo, Spec. Leg. 2, 39 τὰ δάνεια) Lk 7:42f. This forms a transition to③ to show oneself gracious by forgiving wrongdoing, forgive, pardon (Dionys. Hal. 5, 4, 3; Jos., Ant. 6, 144 ἁμαρτήματα χαρίζεσθαι) w. dat. of pers. and acc. of thing (TestJob 43:1 αὐτοῖς … τὴν ἁμαρτίαν αὐτῶν) χαρισάμενος ἡμῖν πάντα τὰ παραπτώματα Col 2:13; cp. 2 Cor 2:10a; 12:13. W. dat. of pers. alone Eph 4:32ab; Col 3:13ab (Plut., Mor. 488a χαίρειν τῷ χαρίζεσθαι μᾶλλον αὐτοῖς ἢ τῷ νικᾶν=to delight in doing them favors rather than getting the better of them). W. acc. of thing alone 2 Cor 2:10bc. Abs. (cp. EpArist 215) rather forgive 2 Cor 2:7.—B. 1174. DELG s.v. χάρις. M-M. EDNT. TW. -
4 δίδωμι
δίδωμι, Il.23.620, etc. (late [full] δίδω POxy. 121 (iii A. D.)); late forms, [ per.] 1pl. διδόαμεν v. l. in J.BJ3.8.5, etc., [ per.] 3pl. δίδωσι ([etym.] παρα-) Id.AJ10.4.1, etc.; but thematic forms are freq. used, esp. in [dialect] Ep. and [dialect] Ion., διδοῖς, διδοῖσθα, Il.9.164, 19.270,Aδιδοῖ Od.17.350
, Mimn.2.16, Hdt.2.48, Hp.Aër.12 ([etym.] ἀνα-), A.Supp. 1010, etc.,διδοῦσι Il.19.265
(always in Hom.), dub. in [dialect] Att., Antiph.156; imper.δίδου Thgn.1303
, Hdt.3.140, E.Or. 642,δίδοι Pi.O.1.85
, Epigr. in Class.Phil.4.78, [dialect] Ep.δίδωθι Od.3.380
; inf. διδόναι, alsoδιδοῦν Thgn.1329
, [dialect] Ep.διδοῦναι Il.24.425
, [dialect] Aeol.δίδων Theoc.29.9
; part. διδούς, [dialect] Aeol.δίδοις Alc.Supp.23.13
: [tense] impf. ἐδίδουν -ους -ου, Ar.Eq. 678, Od.19.367, 11.289 ([dialect] Ep.δίδου Il. 5.165
), etc.; [ per.] 3pl.ἐδίδοσαν Hdt.8.9
, etc., ἐδίδουν (v.l. ἐδίδων) Hes. Op. 139, D.H.5.6 codd. ([etym.] ἀπ-), also ἔδιδον prob. in h.Cer. 437, δίδον ib. 328; [dialect] Ep. iter.δόσκον Il.14.382
: [tense] fut.δώσω 14.268
, etc., [dialect] Ep.διδώσω Od.13.358
, 24.314; inf.δωσέμεναι Il.13.369
: [tense] aor. 1 ἔδωκα, used only in ind., Od.9.361, etc., [dialect] Ep.δῶκα Il.4.43
: [tense] aor. 2 ἔδων, used in pl. ind. ἔδομεν ἔδοτε ἔδοσαν ([dialect] Lacon.ἔδον IG5(1).1
B1), and in moods, δός, δῶ, δοίην, δοῦναι, δούς; [dialect] Ep. forms of [tense] aor., subj. [ per.] 3sg. δώῃ, δώῃσι, δῷσι, Il.16.725, 1.324, Od.2.144; [ per.] 3sg. δώη, [dialect] Boeot. (Delph.), IG7.3054 (Lebad.),δοῖ PPetr.2
.p.24; [ per.] 1pl.δώομεν Il.7.299
, Od.16.184, [ per.] 3pl.δώωσι Il.1.137
; [ per.] 3sg. opt. is written ,δοῖ IG14.1488
, etc.; inf.δόμεναι Il.1.116
,δόμεν 4.379
(also [dialect] Dor., Ar.Lys. 1163 ([etym.] ἀπο-), δόμειν SIG942
([place name] Dodona)); Cypr. inf.δοϝέναι Inscr.Cypr.135.5H.
(also opt. δυϝάνοι ib. 6); Arc. part.ἀπυ-δόας IG5(2).6.13
([place name] Tegea); inf. (Orchom., iii B. C.), also in later Greek, BGU38.13 (ii A. D.): [tense] pf.δέδωκα Pi.N.2.8
, etc.; [dialect] Boeot. [ per.] 3pl.ἀπο-δεδόανθι IG7.3171.35
(Orchom.): [tense] plpf.ἐδεδώκει X.Cyr.1.4.26
:—[voice] Med. only in compds.:— [voice] Pass., [tense] fut. , Is.3.39, etc.: [tense] aor.ἐδόθην Od.2.78
, etc.: [tense] pf.δέδομαι Il.5.428
, A.Supp. 1041, Th.1.26, etc.; [ per.] 3pl. : [tense] plpf.ἐδέδοτο Th.3.109
:—give freely,τινί τι Od.24.274
, etc.: in [tense] pres. and [tense] impf., to be ready to give, offer, Il.9.519, Hdt.5.94, 9.109, Ar.Fr. 100, X.An.6.3.9, etc.; things offered,D.
18.119.2 of the gods, grant, assign, κῦδος, νίκην, etc., Il.19.204, 11.397, etc.; of evils, δ. ἄλγεα, ἄτας, κήδεα, etc., 1.96, 19.270, Od.9.15, etc.; twice in Hom. in [voice] Pass., οὔ τοι δέδοται πολεμήϊα ἔργα not to thee have deeds of war been granted, Il.5.428, cf. Od.2.78; later εὖ διδόναι τινί give good fortune, provide well for.., S.OT 1081, OC 642, E.Andr. 750: abs., of the laws, grant permission,δόντων αὐτῷ τῶν νόμων Is.7.2
, cf. Pl.Lg. 813c.4 with inf. added, ξεῖνος γάρ οἱ ἔδωκεν.. ἐς πόλεμον φορέειν gave it him to wear in war, Il.15.532, cf. 23.183;δῶκε [τεύχεα] θεράποντι φορῆναι 7.149
: later freq. of giving to eat or drink,ἐκ χειρὸς διδοῖ πιεῖν Hdt.4.172
, cf. Cratin.124, Pherecr.69, etc.;ἐδίδου ῥοφεῖν Ar.Fr. 203
;δίδου μασᾶσθαι Eup. 253
;δὸς καταφαγεῖν Hegem.1
;τὴν κύλικα δὸς ἐμπιεῖν Pherecr.41
;δὸς τὴν μεγάλην σπάσαι Diph.17.7
; with inf. omitted,φιάλην ἔδωκε κεράσας Ephipp.10
;εὐζωρότερον δός Diph.58
; also of giving water to wash with, δίδου κατὰ χειρός (sc. νίψασθαι) Arched.2.3, cf. Alex.261.2.5 Prose phrases, δ. ὅρκον, opp. λαμβάνειν, tender an oath, , cf. D.39.3, Arist. Rh. 1377a8; δ. ψῆφον, γνώμην, put a proposal to the vote, propose a resolution, D.21.87, 24.13: δ. χάριν, = χαρίζεσθαι, S.Aj. 1354, Cratin. 317; ὀργῇ χάριν δούς having indulged.., S.OC 855; λόγον τινὶ δ. give one leave to speak, X.HG5.2.20;δ. λόγον σφίσι
deliberate,Hdt.
1.97;οὐκ, εἰ διδοίης.. σαυτῷ λόγον S.OT 583
; δοῦναι, λαβεῖν λόγον, Arist.SE 165a27 (but δ. λόγον, εὐθύνας, render accounts, IG12.91, al.): δ. δίκην or δίκας, v. δίκη: ἀκοὴν δ. λόγοις lend an ear to.., S. El.30, etc.; δ. ἐργασίαν give diligence, = Lat. dare operam, OGI441.109 (Lagina, i B. C.), POxy.742.11: c. inf., Ev.Luc.12.58: abs., sc.πληγήν, λίθῳ δ. τινί PLips. 13 iii 3
; ἐμβολὰς διδόναι, ram, of ships, D.S.13.10.II c. acc. pers., hand over, deliver up,ἀχέεσσί με δώσεις Od.19.167
;μιν.. ὀδύνῃσιν ἔδωκεν Il.5.397
;Ἕκτορα κυσίν 23.21
;πυρί τινα Od.24.65
;πληγαῖς τινά Pl.R. 574c
;ἔδωκε θῆρας φόβῳ Pi.P.5.60
.2 of parents, give their daughter to wife,θυγατέρα ἀνδρί Il.6.192
, Od.4.7; also of Telemachus,ἀνέρι μητέρα δώσω 2.223
; τὴν.. Σάμηνδε ἔδοσαν gave her in marriage to go to Samé, 15.367, cf. 17.442; with inf. added,δώσω σοι Χαρίτων μίαν ὀπυιέμεναι Il. 14.268
: in Prose and Trag.,θυγατέρα δ. τινὶ γυναῖκα Hdt.1.107
, cf. Th.6.59, X.HG4.1.4, etc.: abs.,ἐδίδοσαν καὶ ἤγοντο ἐξ ἀλλήλων Hdt. 5.92
.β, cf. E.Med. 288; alsoδ. κόρᾳ ἄνδρα Pi.P.9.117
.3 διδόναι τινά τινι grant another to one's entreaties, pardon him at one's request, X.An.6.6.31; διδόναι τινί τι forgive one a thing, condone it, E.Cyc. 296 (s. v. l.).4 δ. ἑαυτόν τινι give oneself up,δ. σφέας αὐτοὺς τοῖσι Ἀθηναίοισι Hdt.6.108
, cf. S.Ph.84, Th.2.68;τινὶ εἰς χεῖρας S.El. 1348
;δ. ἑαυτὸν τοῖς δεινοῖς D.18.97
;εἰς τοὺς κινδύνους Plb.3.17.8
;εἰς ἔντευξιν Id.3.15.4
; εἰς τρυφήν, εἰς λῃστείας, D.S.17.108, 18.47: c. inf., .5 appoint, establish, of a priest, LXXEx.31.6; δῶμεν ἀρχηγόν ib.Nu. 14.4; δ. τινὰ εἰς ἔθνος μέγα ib.Ge.17.20; place, τινὰ ὑπεράνω πάντα τὰ ἔθνη ib.De.28.1:—[voice] Pass., οἱ δεδομένοι, = Nethinim, ministers of the Temple, ib.Ne.5.3; ἐδόθη αὐτοῖς ἵνα .. orders were given them that.., Apoc.9.5.III in vows and prayers, c. acc. pers. et inf., grant, allow, bring about that.., esp. in prayers, δὸς ἀποφθίμενον δῦναι δόμον Ἄϊδος εἴσω grant that he may go.., Il.3.322;τὸν κασίγνητον δότε τυίδ' ἴκεσθαι Sapph.Supp.1.2
; δός με τείσασθαι give me to.., A.Ch.18, cf. Eu.31; also c. dat. pers.,τούτῳ.. εὐτυχεῖν δοῖεν θεοί Id.Th. 422
;θεοὶ δοῖέν ποτ' αὐτοῖς.. παθεῖν S.Ph. 316
, cf. OC 1101, 1287, Pl.Lg. 737b.2 grant, concede in argument,δ. καὶ συγχωρεῖν Id.Phd. 100b
, cf. Arist.Metaph. 990a12, al.: c. inf., Id.Ph. 239b29;δ. εἶναι θεούς Iamb.Myst.1.3
;ἑνὸς ἀτόπου δοθέντος τἆλλα συμβαίνει Arist.Ph. 186a9
; δεδομένα, τά, data, title of work by Euclid; ἡ δοθεῖσα γραμμή, γωνία, etc., Pl.Men. 87a, Euc.1.9, etc.;δεδόσθω κύκλος Archim.Sph.Cyl.1.6
, al.; also in Alchemy, δός take certain substances, Pleid.X.69.IV Gramm., describe, record, Sch.Pi. P.5.93, Sch.Il.16.207.V seemingly intr., give oneself up, devote oneself, c. dat., esp.ἡδονῇ E.Ph.21
, Plu.Publ.13;ἡδοναῖς Philostr. VS1.12
;ἐλπίδι J.AJ17.12.2
;εἰς δημοκοπίαν D.S.25.8
; at full speed,Alciphr.
3.47. -
5 ἄν
ἄν (A), [pron. full] [ᾰ], [dialect] Ep., Lyr., [dialect] Ion., Arc., [dialect] Att.; also κεν) [dialect] Ep., [dialect] Aeol., Thess., κᾱ [dialect] Dor., [dialect] Boeot., El.; the two combined in [dialect] Ep. (infr. D. 11.2) and Arc.,Aεἰκ ἄν IG5(2).6.2
, 15 (iv B. C.):—modal Particle used with Verbs to indicate that the action is limited by circumstances or defined by conditions. In Hom. κε is four times as common as ἄν, in Lyr. about equally common. No clear distinction can be traced, but κε as an enclitic is somewhat less emphatic; ἄν is preferred by Hom. in negative clauses, κε ([etym.] ν) with the relative.A In Simple Sentences, and in the Apodosis of Compound Sentences; here ἄν belongs to the Verb, and denotes that the assertion made by the Verb is dependent on a condition, expressed or implied: thus ἦλθεν he came, ἦλθεν ἄν he would have come (under conditions, which may or may not be defined), and so he might have come; ἔλθοι may he come, ἔλθοι ἄν he would come (under certain conditions), and so he might come.I WITH INDICATIVE:1 with historical tenses, generally [tense] impf. and [tense] aor., less freq. [tense] plpf., never [tense] pf., v. infr.,a most freq. in apodosis of conditional sentences, with protasis implying nonfulfilment of a past or present condition, and apod. expressing what would be or would have been the case if the condition were or had been fulfilled. The [tense] impf. with ἄν refers to continued action, in Hom. always in past time, exc. perh. . 178; later also in [tense] pres. time, first in Thgn.905; πολὺ ἂν θαυμαστότερον ἦν, εἰ ἐτιμῶντο it would be far more strange if they were honoured, Pl.R. 489a; οὐκ ἂν νήσων ἐκράτει, εἰ μή τι καὶ ναυτικὸν εἶχεν he would not have been master of islands if he had not had also some naval power, Th.1.9. The [tense] aor. strictly refers only to past time, Pi.N.11.24, etc.; εἰ τότε ταύτην ἔσχε τὴν γνώμην, οὐδὲν ἂν ὧν νυνὶ πεποίηκεν ἔπραξεν if he had then come to this opinion, he would have accomplished nothing of what he has now done, D.4.5, al., but is used idiomatically with Verbs of saying, answering, etc., as we say I should have said,εἰ μὴ πατὴρ ἦσθ', εἶπον ἄν σ' οὐκ εὖ φρονεῖν S.Ant. 755
, cf. Pl.Smp. 199d, Euthphr. 12d, etc.: the [tense] plpf. refers to completed actions, as ὃ εἰ ἀπεκρίνω, ἱκανῶς ἂν ἤδη παρὰ σοῦ τὴν ὁσιότητα ἐμεμαθήκη I should have already learnt.., ib. 14c;εἰ ὁ ἀνὴρ ἀπέθανεν, δικαίως ἂν ἐτεθνήκει Antipho 4.2.3
.b the protasis is freq. understood: ὑπό κεν ταλασίφρονά περ δέος εἷλεν fear would have seized even the stout-hearted (had he heard the sound), Il.4.421; τὸ γὰρ ἔρυμα τῷ στρατοπέδῳ οὐκ ἂν ἐτειχίσαντο they would not have built the wall (if they had not won a battle), Th.1.11; πολλοῦ γὰρ ἂν ἦν ἄξια for (if that were so) they would be worth much, Pl.R. 374d; οὐ γὰρ ἦν ὅ τι ἂν ἐποιεῖτε for there was nothing which you could have done, i. e. would have done (if you had tried), D.18.43.c with no definite protasis understood, to express what would have been likely to happen, or might have happened in past time: ἢ γάρ μιν ζωόν γε κιχήσεαι, ἤ κεν Ὀρέστης κτεῖνεν ὑποφθάμενος for either you will find him alive, or else Orestes may already have killed him before you, Od.4.546; ὃ θεασάμενος πᾶς ἄν τις ἀνὴρ ἠράσθη δάϊος εἶναι every man who saw this (the 'Seven against Thebes') would have longed to be a warrior, Ar. Ra. 1022; esp. with τάχα, q. v., ἀλλ' ἦλθε μὲν δὴ τοῦτο τοὔνειδος τάχ' ἂν ὀργῇ βιασθὲν μᾶλλον ἢ γνώμῃ φρενῶν, i. e. it might perhaps have come, S.OT 523; τάχα ἂν δὲ καὶ ἄλλως πως ἐσπλεύσαντες (sc. διέβησαν ) and they might also perhaps have crossed by sea (to Sicily) in some other way, Th.6.2, cf. Pl.Phdr. 265b.d ἄν is freq. omitted in apodosi with Verbs expressing obligation, propriety, or possibility, as ἔδει, ἐχρῆν, εἰκὸς ἦν, etc., and sts. for rhetorical effect, εἰ μὴ.. ᾖσμεν, φόβον παρέσχεν it had caused (for it would have caused) fear, E.Hec. 1113. This use becomes more common in later Gk.2 with [tense] fut. ind.:a frequently in [dialect] Ep., usu. with κεν, rarely ἄν, Il.9.167, 22.66, indicating a limitation or condition, ὁ δέ κεν κεχολώσεται ὅν κεν ἵκωμαι and he will likely be angry to whom- soever I shall come, ib.1.139; καί κέ τις ὧδ' ἐρέει and in that case men will say, 4.176;ἐγὼ δέ κέ τοι καταλέξω Od.3.80
; so in Lyr.,μαθὼν δέ τις ἂν ἐρεῖ Pi.N.7.68
, cf. I.6(5).59.b rarely in codd. of [dialect] Att. Prose writers,σαφὲς ἂν καταστήσετε Th.1.140
;οὐχ ἥκει, οὐδ' ἂν ἥξει δεῦρο Pl.R. 615d
, cf. Ap. 29c, X.An.2.5.13; dub. in Hp.Mul.2.174: in later Prose, Philostr. V A2.21, S E.M.9.225: also in Poetry, E.El. 484, Ar.Av. 1313;οὐκ ἂν προδώσω Herod.6.36
(corr. - δοίην):— for ἄν with [tense] fut. inf. and part. v. infr.II WITH SUBJUNCTIVE, only in [dialect] Ep., the meaning being the same as with the [tense] fut. ind. (1.2a), freq. with [ per.] 1st pers., as εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώῃσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι in that case I will take her myself, Il.1.324; πείθευ, ἐγὼ δέ κέ τοι εἰδέω χάριν obey and if so I will be grateful, 14.235 (the subj. is always introduced by δέ in this usage); also with other persons, giving emphasis to the future, , al.III WITH OPTATIVE (never [tense] fut., rarely [tense] pf. πῶς ἂν λελήθοι [με]; X.Smp.3.6):a in apodosis of conditional sentences, after protasis in opt. with εἰ or some other conditional or relative word, expressing a [tense] fut. condition:ἀλλ' εἴ μοί τι πίθοιο, τό κεν πολὺ κέρδιον εἴη Il.7.28
;οὐ πολλὴ ἂν ἀλογία εἴη, εἰ φοβοῖτο τὸν θάνατον; Pl.Phd. 68b
:—in Hom. [tense] pres. and [tense] aor. opt. with κε or ἄν are sts. used like [tense] impf. and [tense] aor. ind. with ἄν in Attic, with either regular ind. or another opt. in the protasis: καί νύ κεν ἔνθ' ἀπόλοιτο.. εἰ μὴ.. νόησε κτλ., i. e. he would have perished, had she not perceived, etc., Il.5.311, cf. 5.388, 17.70; εἰ νῦν ἐπὶ ἄλλῳ ἀεθλεύοιμεν, ἦ τ' ἂν ἐγὼ.. κλισίηνδε φεροίμην if we were now contending in another's honour, I should now carry.., ib.23.274: so rarely in Trag., οὐδ' ἂν σὺ φαίης, εἴ σε μὴ κνίζοι λέχος (for εἰ μὴ ἔκνιζε) E.Med. 568.b with protasis in [tense] pres. or [tense] fut., the opt. with ἄν in apodosi takes a simply future sense: φρούριον δ' εἰ ποιήσονται, τῆς μὲν γῆς βλάπτοιεν ἄν τι μέρος they might perhaps damage, Th.1.142, cf. 2.60, Pl.Ap. 25b, R. 333e;ἢν οὖν μάθῃς.. οὐκ ἂν ἀποδοίην Ar.Nu. 116
, cf. D.1.26, al.c with protasis understood:φεύγωμεν· ἔτι γάρ κεν ἀλύξαιμεν κακὸν ἦμαρ Od.10.269
; οὔτε ἐσθίουσι πλείω ἢ δύνανται φέρειν· διαρραγεῖεν γὰρ ἄν for (if they should do so) they would burst, X. Cyr.8.2.21; τὸν δ' οὔ κε δύ' ἀνέρε.. ἀπ' οὔδεος ὀχλίσσειαν two men could not heave the stone from the ground, i. e. would not, if they should try, Il.12.447; , cf. D.2.8: in Hom. sts. with ref. to past time, .d with no definite protasis implied, in potential sense: ἡδέως δ' ἂν ἐροίμην Λεπτίνην but I would gladly ask Leptines, D.20.129; βουλοίμην ἄν I should like , Lat. velim (but ἐβουλόμην ἄν I should wish, if it were of any avail, vellem); ποῖ οὖν τραποίμεθ' ἄν; which way then can we turn? Pl.Euthd. 290a; οὐκ ἂν μεθείμην τοῦ θρόνου I will not give up the throne, Ar.Ra. 830; idiomatically, referring to the past, αὗται δὲ οὐκ ἂν πολλαὶ εἶεν but these would not (on investigation) prove to be many, Th.1.9; εἴησαν δ' ἂν οὗτοι Κρῆτες these would be (i. e. would have been) Cretans, Hdt.1.2: used in order to soften assertions by giving them a less positive form, as οὐκ ἂν οὖν πάνυ γέ τι σπουδαῖον εἴη ἡ δικαιοσύνη, i.e. it would not prove to be, etc. (for, it is not, etc.), Pl.R. 333e.e in questions, expressing a wish:τίς ἂν θεῶν.. δοίη; S.OC 1100
, cf.A.Ag. 1448;πῶς ἂν θάνοιμι; S.Aj. 389
: hence (with no question) as a mild command, exhortation, or entreaty, ; σὺ μὲν κομίζοις ἂν σεαυτὸν ᾗ θέλεις you may take yourself off (milder than κόμιζε σεαυτόν), S.Ant. 444; χωροῖς ἂν εἴσω you may go in, El. 1491; κλύοις ἂν ἤδη, Φοῖβε hear me now, Phoebus, ib. 637; φράζοις ἄν, λέγοις ἄν, Pl.Phlb. 23c, 48b.f in a protasis which is also an apodosis: εἴπερ ἄλλῳ τῳ ἀνθρώπων πειθοίμην ἄν, καὶ σοὶ πείθομαι if I would trust any (other) man (if he gave me his word), I trust you, Id.Prt. 329b; εἰ μὴ ποιήσαιτ' ἂν τοῦτο if you would not do this (if you could), D.4.18, cf. X.Mem.1.5.3, Plot.6.4.16.g rarely omitted with opt. in apodosis: , cf. 14.123, Il.5.303; also in Trag.,θᾶσσον ἢ λέγοι τις E.Hipp. 1186
;τεὰν δύνασιν τίς.. κατάσχοι; S.Ant. 605
.h ἄν c. [tense] fut. opt. is prob. always corrupt (cf. 1.2b), as τὸν αὐτὸν ἂν ἐπαινέσοι ( ἐπαινέσαι Bekk.) Pl.Lg. 719e; εἰδὼς ὅτι οὐδέν' ἂν καταλήψοιτο ( οὐδένα Bekk.) Lys.1.22.IV WITH INF. and PART. (sts. ADJ. equivalent to part.,τῶν δυνατῶν ἂν κρῖναι Pl.R. 577b
) representing ind. or opt.:1 [tense] pres. inf. or part.:a representing [tense] impf. ind., οἴεσθε τὸν πατέρα.. οὐκ ἂν φυλάττειν; do you think he would not have kept them safe? ([etym.] οὐκ ἂν ἐφύλαττεν), D.49.35; ἀδυνάτων ἂν ὄντων [ὑμῶν] ἐπιβοηθεῖν when you would have been unable, Th.1.73, cf. 4.40.b representing [tense] pres. opt., πόλλ' ἂν ἔχων (representing ἔχοιμ' ἄν)ἕτερ' εἰπεῖν παραλείπω D. 18.258
, cf. X.An.2.3.18: with Art., .2 [tense] aor. inf. or part.:a representing [tense] aor. ind., οὐκ ἂν ἡγεῖσθ' αὐτὸν κἂν ἐπιδραμεῖν; do you not think he would even have run thither? ([etym.] καὶ ἐπέδραμεν ἄν), D.27.56; ἴσμεν ὑμᾶς ἀναγκασθέντας ἄν we know you would have been compelled, Th.1.76, cf. 3.89; ῥᾳδίως ἂν ἀφεθείς when he might easily have been acquitted, X.Mem.4.4.4.b representing [tense] aor. opt., οὐδ' ἂν κρατῆσαι αὐτοὺς τῆς γῆς ἡγοῦμαι I think they would not even be masters of the land ([etym.] οὐδ' ἂν κρατήσειαν), Th.6.37, cf. 2.20; ὁρῶν ῥᾳδίως ἂν αὐτὸ ληφθέν ([etym.] ληφθείη ἄν) Id.7.42; οὔτε ὄντα οὔτε ἂν γενόμενα, i.e. things which are not and never could happen ([etym.] ἃ οὔτε ἂν γένοιτο), Id.6.38.3 [tense] pf. inf. or part. representing:a [tense] plpf. ind., πάντα ταῦθ' ὑπὸ τῶν βαρβάρων ἂν ἑαλωκέναι ([etym.] φήσειεν ἄν ) he would say that all these would have been destroyed by the barbarians ([etym.] ἑαλώκη ἄν), D.19.312.b [tense] pf. opt., οὐκ ἂν ἡγοῦμαι αὐτοὺς δίκην ἀξίαν δεδωκέναι, εἰ.. καταψηφίσαισθε I do not believe they would (then) have suffered ([etym.] δεδωκότες ἂν εἶεν) punishment enough, etc., Lys.27.9.4 [tense] fut. inf.or part., never in [dialect] Ep., and prob. always corrupt in [dialect] Att., νομίζων μέγιστον ἂν σφᾶς ὠφελήσειν (leg. - ῆσαι) Th.5.82, cf. 6.66, 8.25,71; part. is still more exceptional, (codd.), cf. D.19.342 (v. l.); both are found in later Gk.,νομίσαντες ἂν οἰκήσειν οὕτως ἄριστα Plb.8.30.8
, cf. Plu.Marc.15, Arr.An.2.2.3; with part., Epicur. Nat.14.1, Luc.Asin.26, Lib.Or.62.21, dub. l. in Arr.An.6.6.5.I In the protasis of conditional sentences with εἰ, regularly with the subjunctive. In Attic εἰ ἄν is contracted into ἐάν, ἤν, or ἄν ([etym.] ᾱ) (q. v.): Hom. has generally εἴ κε (or αἴ κε), sts. ἤν, onceεἰ δ' ἄν Il.3.288
, twiceεἴπερ ἄν 5.224
, 232. The protasis expresses either future condition (with apod. of [tense] fut. time) or general condition (with apod. of repeated action): εἰ δέ κεν ὣς ἔρξῃς καί τοι πείθωνται Ἀχαιοί, γνώσῃ ἔπειθ' ὅς .. if thus thou shalt do.., ib.2.364; ἢν ἐγγὺς ἔλθῃ θάνατος, οὐδεὶς βούλεται θνῄσκειν if death (ever) come near.., E.Alc. 671.2 in relative or temporal clauses with a conditional force; here ἄν coalesces with ὅτε, ὁπότε, ἐπεί, ἐπειδή, cf. ὅταν, ὁπόταν, ἐπήν or ἐπάν ([dialect] Ion. ἐπεάν) , ἐπειδάν: Hom. has ὅτε κε (sts. ὅτ' ἄν) , ὁππότε κε (sts. ὁπότ' ἄν or ὁππότ' ἄν) , ἐπεί κε (ἐπεὶ ἄν Il.6.412
), ἐπήν, εὖτ' ἄν; v. also εἰσόκε ([etym.] εἰς ὅ κε):—τάων ἥν κ' ἐθέλωμι φίλην ποιήσομ' ἄκοιτιν whomsoever of these I may wish.., Il.9.397; ὅταν δὴ μὴ σθένω, πεπαύσομαι when I shall have no strength.., S.Ant.91; ἐχθρὸς γάρ μοι κεῖνος.. ὅς χ' ἕτερον μὲν κεύθῃ ἐνὶ φρεσίν, ἄλλο δὲ εἴπῃ who ever conceals one thing in his mind and speaks another, Il.9.312, cf. D.4.6, Th.1.21. —Hom. uses subj. in both the above constructions (1 and 2 ) without ἄν; also Trag. and Com., S.Aj. 496, Ar.Eq. 805; μέχρι and πρίν occasionally take subj. without ἄν in prose, e.g. Th.1.137,4.16 ([etym.] μέχρι οὗ), Pl.Phd. 62c, Aeschin.3.60.3 in final clauses introduced by relative Advbs., as ὡς, ὅπως (of Manner), ἵνα (of Place), ὄφρα, ἕως, etc. (of Time), freq. in [dialect] Ep.,σαώτερος ὥς κε νέηαι Il.1.32
;ὄφρα κεν εὕδῃ Od.3.359
;ὅπως ἂν εἰδῇ.. φράσω A.Pr. 824
;ὅπως ἂν φαίνηται κάλλιστος Pl.Smp. 198e
; (where ὅπως with [tense] fut. ind. is the regular constr.); also after ὡς in Hdt., Trag., X.An.2.5.16, al., once in Th.6.91 (but [tense] fut. ind. is regular in [dialect] Att.); ἵνα final does not take ἄν or κε exc.ἵνα εἰδότες ἤ κε θάνωμεν ἤ κεν.. φύγοιμεν Od.12.156
( ἵνα = where in S.OC 405). μή, = lest, takes ἄν only with opt. in apodosis, as S.Tr. 631, Th.2.93.II in [dialect] Ep. sts. with OPTATIVE as with subj. (always κε ([etym.] ν), exc.εἴ περ ἂν αὐταὶ Μοῦσαι ἀείδοιεν Il.2.597
),εἴ κεν Ἄρης οἴχοιτο Od.8.353
; ὥς κε.. δοίη ᾧ κ' ἐθέλοι that he might give her to whomsoever he might please, ib.2.54: so in Hdt. in final clauses, 1.75,99:—in Od.23.135 ὥς κέν τις φαίη, κέν belongs to Verb in apod., as inὡς δ' ἂν ἥδιστα ταῦτα φαίνοιτο X.Cyr.7.5.81
.2 rarely in oratio obliqua, where a relat. or temp. word retains an ἄν which it would have with subj. in direct form, S.Tr. 687, X.Mem.1.2.6, Isoc.17.15;ἐπειδὰν δοκιμασθείην D.30.6
:—similarly after a preceding opt.,οὐκ ἀποκρίναιο ἕως ἂν.. σκέψαιο Pl.Phd. 101d
.III rarely with εἰ and INDICATIVE in protasis, only in [dialect] Ep.:1 with [tense] fut. ind. as with subj.:αἴ κεν Ἰλίου πεφιδήσεται Il.15.213
:—so with relat.,οἵ κέ με τιμήσουσι 1.175
.2 with εἰ and a past tense of ind., once in Hom.,εἰ δέ κ' ἔτι προτέρω γένετο δρόμος Il.23.526
; so Ζεὺς γάρ κ' ἔθηκε νῆσον εἴ κ' ἐβούλετο Orac. ap. Hdt.1.174, cf. Ar.Lys. 1099 (cod. R), A.R.1.197.IV in later Greek, ἄν with relative words is used with INDICATIVE in all tenses, asὅπου ἂν εἰσεπορεύετο Ev.Marc.6.56
;ὅσ' ἂν πάσχετε PFay. 136
(iv A. D.);ἔνθ' ἂν πέφυκεν ἡ ὁλότης εἶναι Phlp. in Ph.436.19
; cf. ἐάν, ὅταν.C with [tense] impf. and more rarely [tense] aor. ind. in ITERATIVE construction, to express elliptically a condilion fulfilled whenever an opportumty offered; freq. in Hdt. (not in Pi. or A.), κλαίεσκε ἂν καὶ ὀδυρέσκετο she would (i. e. used to) weep and lament, 3.119;εἶτα πῦρ ἂν οὐ παρῆν S.Ph. 295
; εἴ τινες ἴδοιεν.., ἀνεθάρσησαν ἄν whenever they saw it, on each occasion, Th.7.71;διηρώτων ἂν αὐτοὺς τί λέγοιεν Pl.Ap. 22b
: inf. representing [tense] impf. of this constr., ἀκούω Λακεδαιμονίους τότε ἐμβαλόντας ἂν.. ἀναχωρεῖν, i. e. I hear they used to retire ([etym.] ἀνεχώρουν ἄν), D.9.48.D GENERAL REMARKS:I POSITION OF ἄν.1 in A, when ἄν does not coalesce with the relat. word (as in ἐάν, ὅταν), it follows directly or is separated only by other particles, as μέν, δέ, τε, ga/r, kai/, νυ, περ, etc.; asεἰ μέν κεν.. εἰ δέ κε Il.3.281
-4; rarely by τις, asὅποι τις ἄν, οἶμαι, προσθῇ D.2.14
:—in Hom. and Hes. two such Particles may precede κε, asεἴ περ γάρ κεν Od.8.355
, cf. Il.2.123; εἰ γάρ τίς κε, ὃς μὲν γάρ κε, Hes.Op. 280, 357; rarely in Prose,ὅποι μὲν γὰρ ἄν D.4.45
;ὁπότερος οὖν ἄν Ar.Ra. 1420
: alsoὁπόσῳ πλέον ἄν Pl.Lg. 647e
, cf. 850a; .2 in apodosis, ἄν may stand either next to its Verb (before or after it), or after some other emphatic word, esp. an interrog., a negative (e. g. οὐδ' ἂν εἷς, οὐκ ἂν ἔτι, etc.), or an important Adjective or Adverb; also after a participle which represents the protasis, λέγοντος ἄν τινος πιστεῦσαι οἴεσθε; do you think they would have believed it if any one had told them? ([etym.] εἴ τις ἔλεγεν, ἐπίστευσαν ἄν), D.6.20.3 ἄν is freq. separated from its inf. by such Verbs as οἴομαι, δοκέω, φημί, οἶδα, etc., οὐκ ἂν οἴει .. ; freq. in Pl., Grg. 486d, al.; καὶ νῦν ἡδέως ἄν μοι δοκῶ κοινωνῆσαι I think that I should, X.Cyr.8.7.25;οὕτω γὰρ ἄν μοι δοκεῖ ἥ τε πόλις ἄριστα διοικεῖσθαι Aeschin.3.2
; ἃ μήτε προῄδει μηδεὶς μήτ' ἂν ᾠήθη τήμερον ῥηθῆναι (where ἄν belongs to ῥηθῆναι) D. 18.225:—in the phrase οὐκ οἶδ' ἂν εἰ, or οὐκ ἂν οἶδ' εἰ, ἄν belongs not to οἶδα, but to the Verb which follows, οὐκ οἶδ' ἂν εἰ πείσαιμι, for οὐκ οἶδα εἰ πείσαιμι ἄν, E.Med. 941, cf. Alc.48;οὐκ ἂν οἶδ' εἰ δυναίμην Pl. Ti. 26b
;οὐκ οἶδ' ἂν εἰ ἐκτησάμην X.Cyr.5.4.12
.4 ἄν never begins a sentence, or even a clause after a comma, but may stand first after a parenthetic clause,ἀλλ', ὦ μέλ', ἄν μοι σιτίων διπλῶν ἔδει Ar. Pax
<*>37.II REPETITION OF ἄν:—in apodosis ἄν may be used twice or even three times with the same Verb, either to make the condition felt throughout a long sentence, or to emphasize certain words,ὥστ' ἄν, εἰ σθένος λάβοιμι, δηλώσαιμ' ἄν S.El. 333
, cf. Ant.69, A.Ag. 340, Th.1.76 (fin.), 2.41, Pl.Ap. 31a, Lys.20.15; , cf. S.Fr. 739; attached to a parenthetical phrase, ἔδρασ' ἄν, εὖ τοῦτ' ἴσθ' ἄν, εἰ .. Id.OT 1438.2 ἄν is coupled with κε ([etym.] ν ) a few times in Hom., as Il.11.187, 202, Od.5.361, al.; cf. ἤν περ γάρ κ' ἐθέλωσιν v.l. ib.18.318.III ELLIPSIS OF VERB:—sts. the Verb to which ἄν belongs must be supplied, in Hom. only εἰμί, as τάτ' ἔλδεται ὅς κ' ἐπιδευής (sc. ᾖ) Il.5.481; ἀλλ' οὐκ ἂν πρὸ τοῦ (sc. ἔρρεγκον) Ar.Nu.5; τί δ' ἂν δοκεῖ σοι Πρίαμος (sc. πρᾶξαι), εἰ τάδ' ἤνυσεν; A.Ag. 935
:—so in phrases like πῶς γὰρ ἄν; and πῶς οὐκ ἄν (sc. εἴη); also in ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ (or ὡσπερανεί), as φοβούμενος ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ παῖς (i. e. ὥσπερ ἂν ἐφοβήθη εἰ παῖς ἦν) Pl.Grg. 479a; so τοσοῦτον ἐφρόνησαν, ὅσον περ ἂν (sc. ἐφρόνησαν)εἰ.. Isoc.10.48
:—so also when κἂν εἰ ( = καὶ ἂν εἰ) has either no Verb in the apod. or one to which ἄν cannot belong, Pl.R. 477a, Men. 72c; cf. κἄν:—so the Verb of a protasis containing ἄν may be understood, ὅποι τις ἂν προσθῇ, κἂν μικρὰν δύναμιν (i. e. καὶ ἐὰν προσθῇ) D.2.14; ὡς ἐμοῦ οὖν ἰόντος ὅπῃ ἂν καὶ ὑμεῖς (sc. ἴητε) X.An.1.3.6.IV ELLIPSIS OF ἄν:—when an apodosis consists of several co-ordinate clauses, ἄν is generally used only in the first and understood in the others:πείθοι' ἂν εἰ πείθοι'· ἀπειθοίης δ' ἴσως A.Ag. 1049
: even when the construction is continued in a new sentence, Pl.R. 352e, cf. 439b codd.: but ἄν is repeated for the sake of clearness or emphasis, ib. 398a, cf. D.19.156 (where an opt. is implied with the third ὡς): rarely expressed with the second of two co-ordinate Verbs and understood with the first, τοῦτον ἂν.. θαρσοίην ἐγὼ καλῶς μὲν ἄρχειν, εὖ δ' ἂν ἄρχεσθαι θέλειν (i. e. καλῶς μὲν ἂν ἄρχοι, εὖ δ' ἂν θέλοι ἄρχεσθαι) S.Ant. 669.------------------------------------ἄν (B), [pron. full] [ᾱ], [dialect] Att.,A = ἐάν, ἤν, Th.4.46 codd., al.; freq. in Pl.,ἂν σωφρονῇ Phd. 61b
; ἂν θεὸς θέλῃ ib. 80d, cf. D.4.50;ἄν τ'.. ἄν τε Arist. Ath.48.4
: not common in earlier [dialect] Att. Inscrr., IG1.2a5, 2.179b49, al.: but freq. later, SIG1044.27 (iv/iii B. C.), PPetr.2p.47 (iii B. C.), PPar.32.19 (ii B. C.), PTeb.110.8 (i B. C.), Ev.Jo.20.23, etc.------------------------------------ἄν (C) or [full] ἀν, Epic form of ἀνά, q. v.------------------------------------ -
6 λέγω
λέγω (Hom.+; on the mng. of the word ADebrunner, TW IV 71–73) impf. ἔλεγον (3 pl. ἔλεγαν s. B-D-F §82 app.; Mlt-H. 194; KBuresch, RhM 46, 1891, 224). Only pres. and impf. are in use; the other tenses are supplied by εἶπον (q.v., also B-D-F §101 p. 46; Mlt-H. 247), but the foll. pass. forms occur: fut. 3 sg. λεχθήσεται; aor. ptc. fem. sg. λεχθεῖσα (SyrBar 14:1), neut. pl. τὰ λεχθέντα (Jos. 24, 27; Esth 1:18; Papias, Just.), 3 sg. ἐλέχθη and pl. ἐλέχθησαν; pf. 3 sg. λέλεκται; plupf. ἐλέλεκτο; pf. ptc. λελεγμένος (all Just.; B-D-F §101) ‘say’ (beginning w. Hes. [Hom. uses the word in the senses ‘gather, collect’, as Il. 11, 755 al., and mid. ‘select’, as Il. 21, 27, and esp. of stories that one elects to ‘tell over’ or ‘recount’, as Od. 14, 197] and more freq. in Pind.; the usual word since the Attic writers; ins, pap, LXX, pseudepigr., Philo, Joseph., apolog.).① to express oneself orally or in written form, utter in words, say, tell, give expression to, the gener. sense (not in Hom., for this εἶπον, ἐν[ν]έπω, et al.)ⓐ w. an indication of what is saidα. in the acc. ταύτην τ. παραβολήν Lk 13:6. (τὴν) ἀλήθειαν (Teles p. 4, 14; TestAbr A 16 p. 97, 27 [Stone p. 42]) J 8:45f; Ro 9:1; 1 Ti 2:7. ἀληθῆ (cp. Herodian 4, 14, 4) J 19:35. παροιμίαν οὐδεμίαν 16:29. τὶ καινότερον Ac 17:21 (w. ἀκούω as Pla., Prot. 310a; Dio Chrys. 3, 28; 4, 37). τί λέγουσιν what they say Mt 21:16; cp. Lk 18:6; 1 Cor 14:16. τί λέγω; what shall I say? Hb 11:32. ὸ̔ λέγει Lk 9:33; cp. 2 Ti 2:7; Phlm 21. ἃ λέγουσιν 1 Ti 1:7; AcPlCor 1:9. ταῦτα (τοῦτο) λ. (Jos., Vi. 291) Lk 9:34; 11:45b; 13:17; J 2:22; τοιαῦτα λ. Hb 11:14. τὸ αὐτὸ λέγειν be in agreement (not only in words: Thu. 4, 20, 4; 5, 31, 6; Polyb. 2, 62, 4; 5, 104, 1; Jos., Ant. 18, 375; 378) 1 Cor 1:10.—Also τινί τι tell someone someth. παραβολὴν αὐτοῖς Lk 18:1. μυστήριον ὑμῖν 1 Cor 15:51. τ. ἀλήθειαν ὑμῖν J 16:7. ὸ̔ λέγω ὑμῖν Mt 10:27. μηδενὶ λ. τοῦτο Lk 9:21. οὐδὲν αὐτῷ λέγουσιν they say nothing to him J 7:26. ταῦτα ἔλεγον ὑμῖν 2 Th 2:5.—τὶ πρός τινα (Pla, Gorg. 465a) παραβολὴν πρὸς αὐτούς Lk 5:36; cp. 14:7; 20:9.—24:10; 11:53 v.l. W. double acc. ἀδύνατα ταῦτα εἴρηκας Hm 11:19.β. by direct discourse or direct question foll., mostly abs. (extremely freq.) Mt 9:34; 12:44; Mk 3:30; Lk 5:39; J 1:29, 36; 1 Cor l2:3; Js 4:13. Also oft. introduced by recitative ὅτι Mt 9:18; Mk 1:15; 2:12; 3:21f; 5:28; 6:14f (on the textual problem s. FNeirynck, ETL 65, ’89, 110–18), 35; 7:20; Lk 1:24; 4:41; 17:10; 21:8 v.l.; J 6:14; 7:12; 8:33; Ac 2:13; 11:3 and oft.—καὶ ἔλεγεν Mk 4:21, 24, 26, 30 may = he used to say (so that they might memorize): WEssame, ET 77, ’66, 121.γ. by indirect discourse or indirect question foll.; abs. Mt 21:27; Mk 11:33c; Lk 20:8.—Introduced by ὅτι (Diod S 11, 4, 3; 11, 6, 2; 14, 4, 3; Petosiris, Fgm. 14c; Jos., Bell. 4, 543) Lk 22:70; Ac 20:23.—In acc. w. inf. τίνα λέγουσιν οἱ ἄνθρωποι εἶναι τ. υἱὸν τ. ἀνθρώπου; Mt 16:13; cp. vs. 15; Lk 9:20; 11:18; 23:2b; 24:23b; J 12:29a; Ac 4:32; 8:9; 17:7.—W. the inf. only Lk 24:23a; Js 2:14; 1J 2:6, 9.ⓑ w. indication of the pers. or thing about which someth. is said, or that is meant by someth.α. by a prep. περί τινος (Soph., Thu. et al.) οἱ Φαρισαῖοι ἔγνωσαν ὅτι περὶ αὐτῶν λέγει the Pharisees perceived that he was talking about them Mt 21:45. λέγει περὶ αὐτοῦ he said concerning him J 1:47; cp. 2:21; 11:13; 13:18, 22. εἴς τινα (Eur., Med. 453; X., Mem. 1, 5, 1) Ac 2:25; Eph 5:32. ἐπί τινα Hb 7:13. πρός τινα Lk 12:41; Hb 1:7.β. by the acc. alone mean someone or someth. (Demosth. 18, 88; Diod S 15, 23, 5; Phalaris, Ep. 142, 1 ἣν λέγω; Ael. Aristid. 48, 35 K.=24 p. 474 D.: τὸν Φιλάδελφον λέγων; Aelian, NA 8, 3 ὸ̔ δὲ λέγω, τοιοῦτόν ἐστιν, VH 3, 36; Lucian, Dial. Deor. 3; 10, 2; 2 Macc 14:7; Jos., Ant. 6, 86; TestSol 4:6 D τὸν δύστηνον λέγω γέροντα; Just., D. 130, 2 μετὰ τοῦ λαοῦ αὐτοῦ, λέγω Ἀβραὰμ καὶ Ἰσαὰκ …) τ. ἄνθρωπον τοῦτον ὸ̔ν λέγετε this man whom you mean Mk 14:71. ἔλεγεν τὸν Ἰούδαν J 6:71. συνείδησιν λέγω οὐχὶ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ I mean not your own conscience 1 Cor 10:29. τοῦτο δὲ λέγω but this is what I mean Gal 3:17; cp. 1 Cor 1:12a (Ptolem., Apotel. 2, 3, 12; 2, 11, 1 λέγω δέ … but I mean).—Mt 26:70; Mk 14:68; Lk 22:60. Cp. 4 end.γ. w. an indication of the one to whom someth. is said (on the synoptics and Ac s. WLarfeld, Die ntl. Ev. 1925, 237f); mostly in dat. (Aeschyl., Ag. 103; Herodas 4, 42 σοί; POxy 413, 99; s. also 1aα above) Mt 8:7; Mk 2:8, 17f; Lk 3:7; 5:24; J 1:39, 41, 43 and oft.—πρός τινα (Epict. 2, 17, 34 πρὸς ἄλλους ἐρεῖς; TestSol 1:6 D λέγει Νάθαν πρὸς τὸν ἄγγελον; ApcEsdr 6:16; s. also 1aα above) Mk 4:41; 16:3; Lk 4:21; 8:25 (λ. πρὸς ἀλλήλους as Jos., Ant. 2, 108; 9, 239); 9:23; 12:1; 16:1; J 2:3; 3:4; Ac 2:12; 28:4. μετά τινος: ἔλεγον μετʼ ἀλλήλων they said to each other J 11:56.δ. in other (s. 1aα, 1bα, 1bγ) prep. uses ἀφʼ ἑαυτοῦ (=ἀπὸ σεαυτοῦ v.l.) σὺ τοῦτο λέγεις; do you say this of your own accord? J 18:34 (TestAbr A 15 p. 95, 26 [Stone p. 38] al.). εἴς τινα against someone Lk 22:65. τὶ περί τινος say someth. about or concerning someone J 1:22; Ac 8:34; Tit 2:8. λ. περὶ τοῦ ἱεροῦ, ὅτι say, with reference to the temple, that Lk 21:5. τί σὺ λέγεις περὶ αὐτοῦ, ὅτι; what have you to say about him, since? J 9:17b (λ. τι περί τινος, ὅτι as Jos., Bell. 7, 215). τινὶ περί τινος say to someone about someone w. direct discourse foll. Mt 11:7. Also πρός τινα περί τινος (Jos., C. Ap. 1, 279 πρὸς αὐτὸν περὶ Μωϋσέως) Lk 7:24. πρός τινα ἐπί τινος bring charges against someone before someone Ac 23:30 (λ. ἐπί τινος as Jos., Vi. 258). λ. περί (v.l. ὑπέρ) τινος say (someth.), speak in someone’s defense 26:1.ε. in connection w. adverbs and adv. exprs.: Λυκαονιστὶ λ. say in (the) Lycaonian (language) Ac 14:11. καλῶς correctly (X., Mem. 2, 7, 11; 3, 3, 4; TestJob 7:8; EpArist 125; 196) J 8:48; 13:13. ὡσαύτως in the same way Mk 14:31. ἀληθῶς λέγω ὑμῖν truly, I tell you Lk 12:44; 21:3. κατὰ ἄνθρωπον (s. ἄνθρωπος 2b) Ro 3:5; Gal 3:15. κατὰ συγγνώμην, οὐ κατʼ ἐπιταγήν (s. ἐπιταγή) 1 Cor 7:6; cp. 2 Cor 8:8. καθʼ ὑστέρησιν Phil 4:11.ζ. w. emphasis on a certain kind of saying: φωνῇ μεγάλῃ in a loud voice Rv 5:12; 8:13 (cp. TestSol 16:1). Also ἐν φωνῇ μεγάλῃ 14:7; 9. ἄγγελος ἐν φωνῇ λέγων GJs 20:4 (pap, s. deStrycker p. 387f). Opp. ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ (cp. Ps 13:1) 18:7. Also ἐν ἑαυτῷ (TestAbr B 3 p. 107, 11 [Stone p. 62]; TestJob 23:8) Mt 3:9; 9:21; Lk 3:8; 7:39, 49; GJs 1:1,4; 3:1; 5:1; cp. 1:3 (codd.); 2:1 v.l.; 14:1 v.l.η. in quotations fr. scripture (but s. also Epict. 1, 28, 4 ὡς λέγει Πλάτων with a quotation) Ἠσαί̈ας λέγει Isaiah says Ro 10:16, 20; 15:12. Μωϋσῆς λέγει 10:19. Δαυὶδ λέγει 11:9. ἡ γραφὴ λέγει (Just., D. 56, 17; cp. Paus. 2, 16, 4 τὰ ἔπη λέγει=the epic poets say) 4:3; 10:11; Gal 4:30; 1 Ti 5:18; Js 4:5; cp. 2:23; J 19:24; 2 Cl 14:2. In the case of the quot. formula λέγει without the subj. expressed, ἡ γραφή or ὁ θεός is easily understood (B-D-F §130, 3; Rob. 392.—On the omission of the subj. [Just., D. 101, 1 al.] cp. Epict. 1, 24, 12 λέγει σοι ‘θὲς κτλ.’=someone says to you ‘lay aside [this and that sign of prestige]’). It could prob. be translated indefinitely it says: Ro 15:10; 2 Cor 6:2; Gal 3:16; Eph 4:8; 5:14. ὁ θεός is obviously the subj. (Clearch., Fgm. 69c; Epict. 1, 1, 10 λέγει ὁ Ζεύς, followed by a divine revelation to Epictetus) Hb 5:6. λέγει ὁ κύριος 2 Cl 13:2; cp. Hb 8:8–10 (λέγει κύριος Am 5:27; Is 1:18; Jer 9:24; ParJer 6:16 al.). W. the passage more definitely indicated (schol. on Pind., O. 7, 66 ἐν τοῖς Μουσαίου λέγεται; schol. on Apollon. Rhod. 3, 1179 Wendel v.l. ἐν τῇ γ´ τῆς Μουσαίου Τιτανογραφίας λέγεται ὡς) ἐν Ἠλίᾳ τί λέγει ἡ γραφή Ro 11:2 (Epict. 2, 17, 34 τί λέγει Χρύσιππος ἐν τοῖς περὶ τοῦ ψευδομένου). Δαυὶδ λέγει ἐν βίβλῳ ψαλμῶν Lk 20:42 (Epict. 2, 19, 14 Ἑλλάνικος λέγει ἐν τοῖς Αἰγυπτιακοῖς with quot.). ἐν τ. Ὡσηὲ λέγει Ro 9:25. λέγει ἐν τῷ Ἠσαί̈ᾳ 2 Cl 3:5 (Just., D. 123, 8); cp. ἐν Δαυίδ Hb 4:7. ὁ νόμος λέγει (cp. Pla., Crito 12, 50c; Epict. 3, 24, 43 τί γὰρ λέγει; [i.e. ὁ νόμος θεῖος]) 1 Cor 14:34. λέγει τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἅγιον Hb 3:7 (Just., D. 124, 1). Of words of Jesus: λέγει ὁ κύριος ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ 2 Cl 8:5. λέγει ὁ κύριος 5:2; 6:1. λέγει αὐτός (i.e. ὁ Χριστός 2:7) 3:2. λέγει 4:2.θ. Hebraistic, though by no means limited to the OT (s. EKieckers, IndogF 35, 1915, 34ff; B-D-F §420; Mlt-H. 454), is the freq. use of λ. to introduceא. direct discourse (like לֵאמֹר), even though it is preceded by a verb of saying, or one that includes the idea of saying. Esp. λέγων is so used, as in the LXX, e.g. after ἀναβοᾶν, ἀνακράζειν Mk 1:23 (cp. Phlegon: 257 Fgm. 36, 3, 9 Jac. ἀνεκεκράγει λέγων), ἀπαγγέλλειν, ἀποκρίνεσθαι, ἀρνεῖσθαι, βοᾶν, γογγύζειν, διαγογγύζειν, διαλογίζεσθαι, διαμαρτύρεσθαι, διαστέλλεσθαι, διδάσκειν, δοξάζειν, εἰπεῖν Mt 22:1; Lk 12:16; 20:2 (s. B-D-F §101, p. 46; s. Rob. 882f; Kieckers, loc. cit. 36f), ἐμβριμᾶσθαι, ἐντέλλεσθαι, ἐπερωτᾶν, ἐπιτιμᾶν, ἐπιφωνεῖν, ἐρωτᾶν, κατηγορεῖν, κηρύσσειν, κράζειν, κραυγάζειν, λαλεῖν, μαρτυρεῖν, μεριμνᾶν, παραινεῖν, παρακαλεῖν, παρατιθέναι παραβολήν, προσεύχεσθαι, προσφωνεῖν, προφητεύειν, συζητεῖν, συλλαλεῖν, φωνεῖν, ψευδομαρτυρεῖν; s. these entries. Also after such verbs as denote an action accompanied by a statement of some kind: ἄγγελος κυρίου … ἐφάνη αὐτῷ λέγων appeared to him and said Mt 1:20; cp. 2:13; προσεκύνει αὐτῷ λ. fell before him and said 8:2; 9:18; cp. 14:33. ἅπτεσθαι 8:3; 9:29. ἔρχεσθαι Mk 5:35; Lk 18:3; 19:18 al.; cp. Lk 1:66; 5:8; 8:38; 15:9; Ac 8:10, 19; 12:7; 27:23f; 1 Cor 11:25 al.ב. the content of a written document (2 Km 11:15; 4 Km 10:6.—1 Macc 8:31; 11:57; Jos., Ant. 11, 26) ἔγραψεν λέγων (=יִכְתֹּב לֵאמֹר) he wrote as follows Lk 1:63.ג. orders or instructions to be carried out by other persons: ἔπεμψεν λέγων he sent and had them say Lk 7:19. ἀπέστειλεν λ. (Judg 11:14f; Jdth 3:1; JosAs 3:2; ParJer 3:21 al.) Mt 22:16; 27:19; Lk 7:20; 19:14; J 11:3. If the persons carrying out the orders are named, the ptc. can refer to them Mt 22:16 v.l.ד. When it is used w. the ptc. λ. appears in its finite forms ἐμπαίζοντες ἔλεγον they mocked and said Mt 27:41. προσελθὼν αὐτῷ λέγει he approached him and said Mk 14:45. διαρρήξας … λέγει he tore his clothes as he said vs. 63; cp. vs. 67; 15:35; Lk 6:20; J 1:36; Hb 8:8a al.—Also pleonastically (TestSol 2:2; TestJob 23:4; cp. Homeric ἀμειβόμενος προσέειπε Il. 3, 437 al., προσηύδα 14, 270 al.) ἀποκριθεὶς λέγει he answered Mk 8:29b; 9:5, 19; 10:24; 11:22; Lk 3:11; 11:45; 13:8. κράξας λέγει he cried out Mk 5:7; 9:24 (cp. TestAbr B 6 p. 109, 29 [Stone p. 66] κράζων καὶ λέγων; ApcEsdr 1:2 κράξας λέγων).ι. Now and then short exprs. with λ. are inserted as parentheses (B-D-F §465, 2; Rob. 434): πολλοί, λέγω ὑμῖν, ζητήσουσιν many, I tell you, will seek Lk 13:24. ἐν ἀφροσύνῃ λέγω 2 Cor 11:21b. ὡς τέκνοις λέγω 6:13.κ. ptc. w. the article τὰ λεγόμενα what was said (EpArist 215, 298; TestSol 15:13; ApcEsdr 2:15; Jos., Ant. 3, 85; 207; Just., D. 46, 4; 115, 1) Lk 18:34. προσεῖχον τ. λεγομένοις ὑπὸ τ. Φιλίππου (προσέχω 2b) Ac 8:6 (προσέχ. τοῖς λεγ. as Jos., Ant. 13, 303; τὰ λ. ὑπό τινος as Bell. 7, 56; 423; Esth 3:3, also Nicol. Dam.: 90 Fgm. 24, p. 408, 19 ὑπὸ τῶν μάντεων; Fgm. 30 p. 417, 23 Jac.; Epict. 1, 18, 1; SIG 679, 87). τὰ ἢ λεχθέντα ἢ πραχθέντα (Ps.-Libanius, Charact. Ep. p. 48, 18; 64, 18; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 55) Papias (2:15) in Eus., HE 3, 39, 15 (=Geb., Harn., Zahn 15, p. 72, 17).② to express oneself in a specific way, sayⓐ ask w. direct question foll: Mt 9:14; 15:1; 18:1; Mk 5:30f. ὁ διδάσκαλος λέγει the Master asks 14:14. W. dat. of pers. and a direct question foll.: Mt 9:28a; 15:34; 16:15; 20:6.ⓑ answer (Lucian, Syr. Dea 18; TestSol 5:8 al.; ApcMos 5) Mt 17:25; Mk 8:24; J 1:21; 18:17b. W. dat. of pers. and direct discourse: Mt 4:10; 8:26; 9:28b; 14:17; 15:33; 18:22; 19:7, 20 al. W. dat of pers. and direct discourse introduced by ὅτι Mt 19:8.ⓒ order, command, direct, enjoin, recommend more or less emphatically (Syntipas p. 9, 4; Num 32:27; TestSol 4:7 D; TestAbr A 17 p. 98, 21 [Stone p. 44]) τὶ someth. 2 Cl 6:4. ἃ λέγω Lk 6:46. τί τινι command someone (to do) someth. ὅ τι ἂν λέγῃ ὑμῖν J 2:5b (TestAbr A 4 p. 81, 8 [Stone p. 10]); cp. Ac 21:23 (s. Num 32:31). ὅ ὑμῖν λέγω, πᾶσιν λέγω, γρηγορεῖτε the order I give to you I give to everyone: be on your guard! Mk 13:37 (for the formal nuance cp. reff. at end of this parag.). Gener. w. dat. of pers. and direct discourse foll.: Mt 5:44; 6:25; 8:4, 9; 26:52; Mk 3:3, 5; 5:8; 6:10; Lk 6:27; 7:8; J 2:7f. W. dat. of pers. and inf. foll.: Rv 10:9; 13:14; w. an inf. and a negative forbid (X., An. 7, 1, 40) Mt 5:34, 39.—Here belongs χαίρειν τινὶ λέγειν (Epict. 3, 22, 64) extend a greeting to someone, since the greeting consists in saying χαῖρε=‘may you prosper’ 2J 10f. W. ἵνα foll. recommend that, tell to τῷ λαῷ λέγων … ἵνα πιστεύσωσιν Ac 19:4. οὐ περὶ ἐκείνης λέγω ἵνα ἐρωτήσῃ I do not recommend that anyone should pray about that (sin) 1J 5:16. W. inf. foll.: Ro 2:22.—τάδε λέγει is the formal style of one who is giving an order (introductory formula for the edicts of the Persian kings [IMagnMai 115, 4]; in the OT a favorite method of introducing a prophetic statement [Thackeray p. 11]) Ac 21:11, 8, 12, 18; 3:1, 7, 14 (s. Gerhard, Philol. 64, 1905, 27ff; Thieme 23; GRudberg, Eranos 11, 1911, 177f; LLafoscade, De epistulis imperatorum 1902, 63 and 77. Roman edicts gener. use the simple λέγει as in the praescriptio of SEG IX, 8 I, 1–3 αὐτοκράτωρ Καίσαρ Σεβαστὸς … λέγει; also by Augustus: Jos., Ant., 16, 162; s. MBenner, The Emperor Says ’75).ⓓ assure, assert; w. direct discourse foll. Esp. in the formulas λέγω σοι, λ. ὑμῖν, ἀμὴν (ἀμὴν) λ. ὑμῖν (TestAbr A 8 p. 85, 19f [Stone p. 18]) Mt 11:22; 12:31; 19:24; 23:39; Mk 11:24; Lk 4:25; 7:9, 28; 9:27.—Mt 5:26; 6:2, 5; 8:10; Mk 3:28; 9:41; 10:15; Lk 4:24; 18:17, 29; 23:43; J 1:51; 3:3, 5, 11; 5:19, 24f; 6:26, 32 al.ⓔ maintain, declare, proclaim as teaching, w. direct discourse foll.: Gal 4:1; 1J 2:4. Foll. by acc. and inf. (X., Symp. 5, 5) Mt 22:23; Mk 12:18; Lk 20:41; 23:2b; Ro 15:8; 2 Ti 2:18. Foll. by ὅτι and direct discourse Mk 12:35b; 1 Cor 15:12. W. dat. of pers. and direct discourse after ὅτι Mt 5:20, 22, 28, 32; 8:11 al. Someth. like interpret εἰς w. ref. to Eph 5:32.—σὺ λέγεις (that is what) you maintain Mt 27:11; Mk 15:2; Lk 23:3 (cp. σὺ εἶπας Mt 26:25 and s. εἶπον 1a). Cp. also Lk 22:70; J 18:37 (s. OMerlier, RevÉtGr 46, ’33, 204–19; Goodsp., Probs. 64–68 [strong affirmative, yes]; MSmith, JBL 64, ’45, 506–10 [intentionally ambiguous, so you say, Tannaitic Parallels to the Gospels, ’51, 27–30]; DCatchpole, NTS 17, ’70/71, 213–26). τί λέγει ἡ γνῶσις; what does Gnosis teach about this? With the answer in direct discourse B 6:9 (cp. Epict. 3, 13, 11 καὶ τί λέγει [i.e., ὁ λόγος ὁ τῶν φιλοσόφων=philosophy]; direct discourse follows).ⓕ of written communications (Hdt. 3, 40; 122; 8, 140; UPZ 68, 5 [152 B.C.]; Jos., Ant. 13, 80) 1 Cor 6:5; 7:6; 15:51; 2 Cor 6:13; 8:8; Gal 5:2; Phil 4:11; Col 2:4; Phlm 21, al. in Paul.③ to inform about / tell of someth., speak, report (Diog. L. 1, 31) τινί to someone Mk 7:36. τὶ about someth. (X., Cyr. 1, 2, 16 νῦν λέξομεν τὰς Κύρου πράξεις) τὴν ἔξοδον αὐτοῦ of his death (lit., departure) Lk 9:31. τὰ περὶ τ. βασιλείας Ac 1:3. τὰ γινόμενα ὑπʼ αὐτῶν αἰσχρόν ἐστιν καὶ λέγειν it is a disgrace even to speak of the things they do Eph 5:12 (Demosth. 10, 27 ὸ̔ … οὔτε λέγειν ἄξιον). τινὶ περί τινος bring a report about someone to someone Mk 1:30; 8:30. Likew. τινί τινα Phil 3:18.④ to identify in a specific manner, call, name (Aeschyl. et al.) w. double acc. (Epict. 2, 19, 19 τί Στωικὸν ἔλεγες σεαυτόν; Diog. L. 8, 88 τὴν ἡδονὴν λέγειν τὸ ἀγαθόν=call pleasure the [real] good; 2 Macc 4:2; Just., D. 61, 1 ἀρχηστρατηγὸν ἑαυτὸν λέγει) τινά τι describe someone as someth. τί με λέγεις ἀγαθόν; why do you call me good? Mk 10:18; Lk 18:19. Δαυὶδ λέγει αὐτὸν κύριον David calls him Lord Mk 12:37. πατέρα ἴδιον ἔλεγεν τὸν θεόν he called God his Father J 5:18. οὐκέτι λέγω ὑμᾶς δούλους I no longer call you slaves 15:15; cp. Ac 10:28; Rv 2:20. Pass. be called, named Mt 13:55; Hb 11:24. ὁ λεγόμενος the so-called (Epict. 4, 1, 51 οἱ βασιλεῖς λεγόμενοι; Socrat., Ep. 14, 7 ὁ λ. θάνατος) λεγόμενοι θεοί so-called gods 1 Cor 8:5 (Herm. Wr. 2, 14 the λεγόμενοι θεοί in contrast to μόνος ὁ θεός. Somewhat differently Jos., Ant. 12, 125 Ἀντίοχος ὁ παρὰ τοῖς Ἕλλησιν θεὸς λεγόμενος). οἱ λεγόμενοι ἀκροβυστία ὑπὸ τῆς λ. περιτομῆς those who are called ‘the uncircumcised’ (i.e. gentiles) by the so-called circumcision (i.e. Jews) Eph 2:11. ὁ λεγόμενος (B-D-F §412, 2; Rob. 1107; cp. BGU 1117, 9 [13 B.C.]; PRyl 133, 11; 137, 19; 2 Macc 12:17; 14:6; 3 Macc 1:3; TestAbr B 13 p. 118, 14 [Stone p. 84]; TestJob 46:5; 47:1; Just., A I, 22, 1, D. 32, 1) who is called … Mt 1:16; 27:17; whose surname is (Appian, Liby. 49 §213 Ἄννων ὁ μέγας λεγόμενος; Jos., Ant. 13, 370, Vi. 4) 10:2; Col 4:11; by name Mt 9:9; 26:3, 14; 27:16; Mk 15:7; Lk 22:47; J 9:11.—Of things: of the name of a star Rv 8:11. Of place-names (BGU 326, 19 [II A.D.]; 2 Macc 9:2; 12:21) Mt 2:23; 26:36; J 4:5; 11:54; 19:13; Ac 3:2; 6:9; Hb 9:3. Of the local, vernacular name λ. Ἑβραϊστί J 5:2 v.l.; 19:17b.—In the transl. of foreign words (which) means: ὅ ἐστιν κρανίου τόπος λεγόμενος which means ‘Place of a Skull’ Mt 27:33b. Cp. also J 4:25; 11:16; 20:24; 21:2. Also ὸ̔ λέγεται 20:16. ὸ̔ λ. μεθερμηνευόμενον which, when translated, means 1:38. ἣ διερμηνευομένη λέγεται Ac 9:36.—Other exx. of the significance mean (Aeschyl. et al.) are Gal 4:1; 2 Cl 6:4; 8:6 Cp. 1bβ.—B. 1253f; 1257; 1277. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv. S. λόγος, ῥῆμα, λαλέω. -
7 παρά
πᾰρά [pron. full] [ρᾰ], [dialect] Ep. and Lyr. also [full] παραί: shortd. [full] πάρ, in Hom., Lyr. (but rarely in Trag., in lyr. passages, A.Supp. 553, S.Tr. 636), and in all dial ects exc. [dialect] Att., GDI5434.8 ([place name] Paros), IG5(2).3.14 (Tegea, iv B. C.), Inscr.Magn.26.28 (Thess.), etc.:—Prep. c. gen., dat., and acc., prop.A beside: hence,A WITH GEN. prop. denoting motion from the side of, from beside, from:I of Place,πὰρ νηῶν ἔλθωμεν Il.13.744
;παρὰ ναῦφιν ἐλευσόμεθ' 12.225
, etc.;παρ' Ὠκεανοῖο ῥοάων.. ἐπερχομένη Od.22.197
;πὰρ νηῶν ἀπώσεται Il.8.533
, etc.;δῶρα π. νηὸς ἐνεικέμεν 19.194
;φάσγανον ὀξὺ ἐρυσσάμενος π. μηροῦ 1.190
, cf. 21.173;σπασσάμενος.. ἄορ παχέος π. μηροῦ 16.473
; πλευρὰ παρ' ἀσπίδος ἐξεφαάνθη was exposed beside the shield, 4.468, cf. A.Th. 624.II commonly of Persons,1 with Verbs of going or coming, bringing, etc.,ἦλθε.. πὰρ Διός Il.2.787
;παρ' Αἰήταο πλέουσα Od.12.70
, etc.;ἀγγελίη ἥκει π. βασιλέος Hdt.8.140
.ά; αὐτομολήσαντες π. βασιλέως X.An.1.7.13
;ἐξεληλυθὼς παρ' Ἀριστάρχου D.21.117
; ὁ π. τινὸς ἥκων his messenger, X.Cyr.4.5.53; soοἱ π. τινός Th.7.10
, Ev.Marc.3.21, etc.;ὅστις ἀφικνεῖτο τῶν π. βασιλέως πρὸς αὐτόν X.An.1.1.5
, etc.; τεύχεα καλὰ φέρουσα παρ' Ἡφαίστοιο from his workshop, Il.18.137, cf. 617, etc.;ἀπαγγέλλειν τι π. τινός X.An.2.1.20
;σὺ δὲ οἰμώζειν αὐτοῖς παρ' ἐμοῦ λέγε Luc.DMort.1.2
.2 issuing from a person, γίγνεσθαι π. τινός to be born from, Pl.Smp. 179b; λόγος (sc. ἐστί) π. Ἀθηναίων c. acc. et inf., Hdt.8.55: freq. following a Noun, δόξα ἡ π. τῶν ἀνθρώπων glory from (given by) men, Pl.Phdr. 232a; ἡ π. τινὸς εὔνοια the favour from, i. e. of, any one, X.Mem.2.2.12; τὸ παρ' ἐμοῦ ἀδίκημα done by me, Id.Cyr.5.5.13; τὰ π. τινός all that issues from any one, as commands, commissions, Id.An.2.3.4, etc.; or promises, gifts, presents, Id.Mem.3.11.13; τὰ παρ' ἐμοῦ my opinions, Pl.Smp. 219a; παρ' ἑωυτοῦ διδούς giving from oneself, i. e. from one's own means, Hdt. 2.129, 8.5;παρ' ἑαυτοῦ προσετίθει X.HG6.1.3
; νόμον θὲς παρ' ἐμοῦ by my advice, Pl.Prt. 322d; αὐτοὶ παρ' αὑτῶν of themselves, Id.Tht. 150d, cf. Phdr. 235c.3 with Verbs of receiving, obtaining, and the like ,τυχεῖν τινος π. τινός Od.6.290
, 15.158;πὰρ δ' ἄρα μιν Ταφίων πρίατο 14.452
;ἀρέομαι πὰρ μὲν Σαλαμῖνος Ἀθαναίων χάριν Pi.P.1.76
;εὑρέσθαι τι π. τῶν θεῶν Isoc.9.14
, cf. IG12.40.10; δέχεσθαι, λαμβάνειν, ἁρπάζειν π. τινός, Th.1.20, X.Oec.9.11, Hes.Th. 914; ἀντιάσαι, αἰτήσασθαι π. τινός, S.El. 870 (lyr.), X.HG3.1.4;ἀξιοῖ π. τοῦ ἰατροῦ φάρμακον πιὼν ἐξεμέσαι τὸ νόσημα Pl.R. 406d
;κόσμος τοῖς πράξασι γίγνεται π. τῶν ἀκουσάντων Id.Mx. 236e
: without Verb,ὁ καρπὸς ὁ π. τῶν δημάρχων IG12.76.27
: with Verbs of learning, etc.,μεμαθηκέναι π. τινῶν Hdt.2.104
, etc.4 with [voice] Pass. Verbs,πὰρ Διὸς.. μῆνις ἐτύχθη Il.15.122
;π. θεῶν ἡ τοιαύτη μανία δίδοται Pl.Phdr. 245c
, etc.; τὰ π. τῶν θεῶν σημαινόμενα, συμβουλευόμενα, X.Cyr.1.6.2; τὰ π. τινὸς λεγόμενα ib.6.1.42; τὰ π. τῆς τύχης δωρηθέντα the presents of.., Isoc.4.26;με π. σοῦ σοφίας πληρωθήσεσθαι Pl.Smp. 175e
.III rarely for παρά c. dat., by, near,πὰρ ποδός Pi.P.10.62
, 3.60; παρὰ δὲ κυανέων πελαγέων dub. l. in S.Ant. 966 (lyr.);τὸν Ῥειτὸν τὸν παρὰ τοῦ ἄστεως IG12.81.5
; πολλοὶ παρ' ἀμφοτέρων ἔπιπτον, = ἀμφοτέρωθεν, D.S.19.42.B WITH DAT. denoting rest by the side of any person or thing, answering the question where?I of Places, κατ' ἂρ ἕζετ'.. πὰρ πυρί, ἔκειτο π. σηκῷ, Od.7.154, 9.319;νέμονται π. πέτρῃ 13.408
;ἑσταότες παρ ὄχεσφιν Il.8.565
; πὰρ ποσὶ μαρναμένων ἐκυλίνδετο at their feet, 14.411, etc.; π. θύρῃσι at the door, 7.346;π. ῥηγμῖνι θαλάσσης 2.773
;δεῖπνον.. εἵλοντο παρ' ὄχθῃσιν ποταμοῖο Od.6.97
, cf. Il.4.475, 20.53, etc.;κεῖσθαι παρ' Ἅιδῃ S.OT 972
; παρ' οἴνῳ over wine, ib. 780, etc.II of persons, beside,πὰρ δὲ οἷ αὐτῷ εἷσε Θεοκλύμενον Od.15.285
;κεῖτο παρὰ μνηστῇ ἀλόχῳ Il.9.556
, cf. 6.246, etc.;παρ' ἀνδράσιν εὐνάζεσθαι Od.5.119
;δαίνυσθαι π. τινί 8.243
; πὰρ δέ οἱ ἑστήκει stood by him, Il.4.367.2 at one's house or place, with one,μένειν π. τισί 9.427
;θητευέμεν ἄλλῳ, ἀνδρὶ παρ' ἀκλήρῳ Od.11.490
;φιλέεσθαι π. τινί Il.13.627
; παρ' ἑωυτοῖσι at their own house, Hdt.1.105, cf. 86;παιδευθῆναι π. τινί X.Cyr.1.2.15
;καταλύειν π. τινί D.18.82
(butπαρά τινα καταλῦσαι Th.1.136
), etc.: hence οἱ παρ' ἐμοί those of my household, X.Mem.2.7.4, etc.; τὰ παρ' ἐμοί life with me, Id.An. 1.7.4; οἱ παρ' ἡμῖν ἄνθρωποι our people, Pl.Phd. 64b; ἡ παρ' ἡμῖν πολιτεία, ὁ παρ' ὑμῖν δῆμος, D.15.19; ὁ παρ' αὑτῷ βίοτος one's own life, S.OT 612;τὸ παρ' ἡμῖν πῦρ Pl.Phlb. 29f
; ;τὸ παρ' ἡμῖν σῶμα Pl.Phlb. 29f
; also, in one's hands,τὰ π. τοῖς Ἑλληνοταμίαις ὄντα IG12.91.6
;ἔχειν παρ' ἑωυτῷ Hdt. 1.130
, etc.; οὔπω παρ' ἐμοὶ τότ' ἦν λέγειν I had no right to speak then, Men.Epit.98.3 before, in the presence of,ἤειδε π. μνηστῆρσιν Od. 1.154
; before a judge,δίκας γίγνεσθαι π. τῷ πολεμάρχῳ IG12.16.9
;π. Δαρείῳ κριτῇ Hdt.3.160
;π. τῷ βασιλέϊ Id.4.65
;παρὰ δικασταῖς Th. 1.73
;εἰς κρίσιν καθιστάναι τινὰ π. τισί D.18.13
: hence παρ' ἐμοί in my judgement, Hdt.1.32, cf. S.Tr. 589, E.Heracl. 881, 1 Ep.Cor.3.19; π. τούτῳ μέγα δυνήσεται with him, Pl.Grg. 510e.4 in quoting authors, παρ' Ἐφόρῳ, παρ' Αἰσχίνῃ, π. Θουκυδίδῃ, in Ephorus, etc., Plb. 9.2.4, D.H.Comp.9,18.III Arc., = π. c. gen., from,καθὰ εἶχον τὰς ἰντολὰς π. τᾷ ἰδίᾳ πόλι SIG559.9
(Megalop., iii B. C.), cf. 558.10 (Ithaca, iii B. C.).C WITH ACCUS. in three main senses,I beside, near, by,II along,III past, beyond.I beside, near, by:1 with Verbs of coming, going, etc., to the side of, to,ἴτην π. νῆας Il.1.347
, cf. 8.220, etc.;βῆ.. π. θῖνα 1.34
, cf. 327, etc.; τρέψας πὰρ ποταμόν to the side of.., 21.603, cf. 3.187: more freq. of persons, εἶμι παρ' Ἥφαιστον to the chamber of H., 18.143, cf. Od.1.285, etc.;ἐσιόντες π. τοὺς φίλους Th.2.51
, etc.;φοιτᾶν π. τὸν Σωκράτη Pl.Phd. 59d
; πέμπειν ἀγγέλους, πρέσβεις π. τινά, Hdt. 1.141, Th.1.58, etc.;ἄγειν π. τινά Hdt.1.86
;καταφυγὴ π. φίλων τινάς Th.2.17
.2 with Verbs of rest, beside, near, by, sts. with ref. to past motion (expressed in such phrases asἧσο παρ' αὐτὸν ἰοῦσα Il.3.406
, cf. 11.577), , cf. 13.372; κεῖται ποταμοῖο παρ' ὄχθας lies stretched beside.., Il.4.487, cf. 12.381; παρ' ἔμ' ἵστασο come and stand by me, 11.314, cf. 592, 20.49, etc.;π. πυθμέν' ἐλαίης θῆκαν Od.13.122
;καταθέτω π. τὰ ἴκρια IG12.94.28
; κοιμήσαντο π. πρυμνήσια they lay down by.., Od.12.32, cf. 3.460;ὁ παρ' ἐμὲ καθήμενος Pl.Euthd. 271b
, cf. Phd. 89b; ἐκάθητο π. τὴν πύλην, π. τὴν ὁδόν, LXX Ge.19.1, Ev.Marc. 10.46;παρ' αὐτὸν τὸν καλέσαντα κατακείμενος δειπνῆσαι Thphr.Char. 21.2
, cf. Pl.Smp. 175c;ἐκαθέζετο π. τὸν Λύσιν Id.Ly. 211a
, cf. R. 328c;στὰς παρ' αὐτόν Id.Phd. 116c
;τέμενος νεμόμεσθα.. παρ' ὄχθας Il.12.313
, cf. 6.34, IG12.943.45;τοῦ Εὐρίπου, παρ' ὃν ᾤκει Aeschin.3.90
;κατελείφθη π. τὸν νηόν Hdt.4.87
;τὴν παρ' ἐμὲ ἐοῦσαν δύναμιν Id.8.140
.ά (v.l. ἐμοί); εἶπεν αὐτῷ μένειν παρ' ἑαυτόν X.Cyr.1.4.18
, cf. An.1.9.31, Ar.Fr. 451, Is.8.16, Alex.248, Demetr.Com. Nov.1.5, IG22.654.23 (iii B. C.), Plb.3.26.1, 11.14.3, 28.14.3;ἡ π. θάλασσαν Μακεδονία Th.2.99
, cf. S.El. 184 (lyr.), Tr. 636 (lyr.);Καρβασυανδῆς π. Καῦνον IG12.204.52
;τὸ κουρεῖον τὸ π. τοὺς Ἑρμᾶς Lys.23.3
, cf. And.1.62, Is.6.20, 8.35, Aeschin. 1.182, 3.88, Lycurg.112; (1).109 iii 146 (Epid.); παρ' ὄμμα before one's eyes, E.Supp. 484; π. πόδας on the spot, Phld.Ir.p.78 W., Rh.2.2 S.; immediately thereafter, Plb.1.7.5, 1.8.2, al.b [dialect] Dor., [dialect] Boeot., and Thess., = supr. B. 11.2, at the house of.., with a person, IG7.3171.7 (Orchom. [dialect] Boeot.), GDI 1717 (Delph.); παρ' ἁμὲ πολυτίματος [ὁ σῖτος] Ar.Ach. 759 (Megar.);τοῖς κατοικέντεσσι πὰρ ἀμμέ IG9(2).517.18
(Larissa, iii B. C.); τοῖ πὰρ ἀμμὲ πολιτεύματος ib.13;πεπολιτευκὼρ πὰρ ἁμέ Schwyzer 425.5
(Elis, iii/ii B. C.): so in [dialect] Att., θέμενος π. γυναῖκας depositing with.., Pl. R. 465c.3 with Verbs of striking, wounding, etc.,βάλε στῆθος π. μαζόν Il.4.480
, etc.;τὸν δ' ἕτερον.. κληῗδα παρ' ὦμον πλῆξε 5.146
;τύψε κατὰ κληῗδα παρ' αὐχένα 21.117
, cf. 4.525, 8.325, etc.; , cf. 17.310; δησάμενος τελαμῶνι π. σφυρόν ib. 290.4 with Verbs of placing, examining, etc., side by side with..,ὁ ἔλεγχος π. τὸν ἔλεγχον παραβαλλόμενος Pl.Grg. 475e
, cf. Hp.Mi. 369c, Smp. 214c, R. 348a; ;ἄλλα παρ' ἄλλατιθέμενα.. τῶν χρωμάτων Arist.Mete. 375a24
.b Geom., παραβάλλειν π. apply an area to (i. e. along) a finite straight line, Euc.1.44, Archim.Aequil.2.1;π. τὴν δοθεῖσαν αὐτοῦ γραμμὴν παρατείναντα Pl. Men. 87a
; ἡ [εὐθεῖα] παρ' ἣν δύνανται αἱ καταγόμεναι τεταγμένως the line to which are applied the squares of the or dinates, etc., Apollon. Perg.Con.1.11: hence,c Arith., παραβάλλειν τι π. τι divide by.. (v.παραβάλλω A.
VII. 2);μερίζω τι π. τι Dioph.4.33
; ἐπὶ γ π. ί multiply by 3 and divide by 10, PLond.5.1718.2 (vi A. D.).5 Geom., parallel to.., Democr.155, Arist. Top. 158b31, Archim.Sph. Cyl.1.12, al.6 metaph. in Gramm., like, as a parody of.., π. τὸ Σοφόκλειον, π. τὰ ἐν Τεύκρῳ Σοφοκλέους, Sch.Ar.Av. 1240, Nu. 584.b Gramm., of words which differ as compared with other words, π. τὸ τοῦ ἔρωτος ὄνομα σμικρὸν παρηγμένον ἐστίν.. [τὸ ἥρως] Pl.Cra. 398d, cf. 399a, Lg. 654a: hence, derived from.., π. τὸ ἔδαφος, δάπεδον, A.D. Pron.31.16; π. τὸ δρῶ δρᾶμα Sch.A.R.2.624;σύγκειται [τὸ αὐθέντης] π. τὸ εἷναι.. καὶ π. τὸ αὐτός Phryn.PSp.24
B.7 generally, of Comparison, alongside of, compared with, usu. implying superiority,δοκέοντες π. ταῦτα οὐδ' ἂν τοὺς σοφωτάτους ἀνθρώπων Αἰγυπτίους οὐδὲν ἐπεξευρεῖν Hdt.2.160
, cf. 7.20, 103;ἡλίου ἐκλείψεις αἳ πυκνότεραι π. τὰ ἐκ τοῦ πρὶν χρόνου μνημονευόμενα ξυνέβησαν Th.1.23
, cf. 4.6;τῶν ἁπάντων ἀπερίοπτοί εἰσι π. τὸ νικᾶν Id.1.41
;π. τὰ ἄλλα ζῷα ὥσπερ θεοὶ ἄνθρωποι βιοτεύουσι X.Mem.1.4.14
;φαίνεται π. τὸ ἀλγεινὸν ἡδὺ καὶ π. τὸ ἡδὺ ἀλγεινὸν ἡ ἡσυχία Pl.R. 584a
, cf. Phdr. 236d, La. 183c, al.;εὐδαίμων μᾶλλον π. πάντας BCH26.332
([place name] Halae);προετέρει π. πάντας PSI 4.422.34
(iii B. C.): sts. implying inferiority or defect, ἠλάττωσας αὐτὸν βραχύ τι παρ' ἀγγέλους a little lower than the angels, LXX Ps. 8.6; μιᾷ ἡμέρᾳ ὑστεροῦσι π. τὸν ἥλιον lag one day behind the sun, Gem.8.19; so perh. παρ' αὐτόν, ὑπὲρ αὐτόν (has passed the ball?) short of him, beyond him, Antiph.234; μέγα τοι ἡμέρα παρ' ἡμέραν γιγνομένη γνώμην ἐξ ὀργῆς μεταστῆσαι one day compared with another is important.., a day's delay makes a difference, Antipho 5.72; τί γὰρ παρ' ἦμαρ ἡμέρα τέρπειν ἔχει προσθεῖσα κἀναθεῖσα τοῦ γε κατθανεῖν; what joy has one day compared with another to offer, since it only brings us nearer to, or farther from, death (which is neither good nor evil)? S.Aj. 475; ὃς μὲν κρίνει (prefers) ἡμέραν παρ' ἡμέραν, ὃς δὲ κρίνει (approves)πᾶσαν ἡμέραν Ep.Rom.14.5
.8 with Verbs of estimating, to set at so and so much, hence π. = equivalent to.., ταρβῶ μὴ.. θῆται παρ' οὐδὲν τὰς ἐμὰς ἐπιστολάς set at nought, E.IT 732, cf. A. Ag. 229 (lyr.);παρ' οὐδὲν ἄγειν S.Ant.35
; π. μικρὸν ἡγεῖσθαι or ποιεῖσθαί τι hold of small account, Isoc.5.79, D.61.51;παρ' ὀλίγον ποιεῖσθαί τινα X.An.6.6.11
; so with εἶναι, etc., παρ' οὐδέν ἐστι are as nothing, S.OT 983, cf. Ant. 466; ;οὐ π. μέγα ἔσεσθαι τὸ πταῖσμα Arr.An.1.18.6
; so perh. π. σμικρὰ κεχώρηκε have turned out of little account, have amounted to little, Hdt.1.120.b in Accountancy, without a verb, π. τὴν καταλλαγήν on account of κ., PHib.1.100.4 (iii B. C.).9 of correspondence, ὀφείλειν στατῆρα π. στατῆρα stater for stater (one to each of two creditors), BCH50.214 (Thasos, v B. C.);πληγὴν π. πληγὴν ἑκάτερον Ar.Ra. 643
; συνεῖναι ἑκατέρῳ ἡμέραν παρ' ἡμέραν stayed day for day with each, D.59.46; hence of alternation, ποιεῖσθαι ἁγνείας καὶ θυσίας δύο π. δύο, of four priests acting two and two alternately, BGU1198.12 (i B. C.); τοῦ καθημερινοῦ ἢ μίαν π. μίαν (sc. ἡμέραν) [πυρετοῦ] quotidian or tertian fever, ib.956.3 (iii A. D.): sts. without doubling of the Noun, παρ' ἡμέρην, opp. καθ' ἡμέρην, tertian, opp. quotidian, Hp.Aph.1.12; καθ' ἡμέραν, παρ' ἡμέραν, π. δύο, π. τρεῖς every day, every second day, every third (fourth) day, Arr.Epict.2.18.13; π. μίαν every second day, Plb.3.110.4; παρ' ἐνιαυτόν every second year, Plu.Cleom.15; παρ' ἔτος year and year about, Arist.GA 757a7; every second year, Paus.8.15.2; π. μέρος by turns (v. μέρος II. 2);ὁ ἀνὰ μέρος παρ' ἓξ μῆνας ὑπὲρ γῆν τε καὶ ὑπὸ γῆν γινόμενος Ἄδωνις Corn. ND28
; π. μῆνα τρίτον every third month, Arist.HA 582b4, cf. Plu.2.942e; but π. τρία [ἔτεα] prob. every fourth year, IG5(2).422 ([place name] Phigalea), cf. Arr.Epict. l.c.; ἕνα παρ' ἕνα παραλειπτέον every second one, Nicom.Ar.1.18; ἕνα π. δύο ([etym.] τρεῖς) every third (fourth) one, ibid.; παρὰ δ' ἄλλαν ἄλλα μοῖρα διώκει now one now another, E.Heracl. 611.10 precisely at the moment of, παρ' αὐτὰ τἀδικήματα flagrante delicto, D.18.13, 21.26;ἀποδώσω π. τὸν εὔθυνον τὸ καθῆκον IG12.188.31
; π. τοιοῦτον καιρόν, π. τὰς χρείας, D.20.41,46; π. τὰ δεινά in the midst of danger, Plu.Ant.63;π. τὴν πρώτην γένεσιν Jul.Or.1.10b
; π. τὴν πρώτην (sc. ἐπίθεσιν) at the first attack, Hld.9.2;π. γε τὴν πρώτην ὁρμήν Ael.NA14.10
.b distributively, whether of Time, π. τὰ ἑβδομήκοντα ἔτεα in each complete period of seventy years, Hdt.1.32;ἐν ταῖς ὁδοιπορίαις π. στάδια διακόσια.. τοῖς ἑκατὸν σταδίοις διήνεγκαν ἀλλήλων X.Oec.20.18
; πὰρ Ϝέτος each year, every year, Tab.Heracl. 1.101;π. τὸν ἐνιαυτὸν ἕκαστον IG12(7).5.14
([place name] Amorgos); παρ' ἆμάρ τε καὶ νύκτα day and night, B.Fr.7; or more generally, πὰρ τὰν ἐλαίαν in respect of each olive plant, Tab.Heracl.1.122; παρ' ἡμέραν αἱ ἀμίαι πολὺ ἐπιδήλως αὐξάνονται from day to day, per day, Arist.HA 571a21;τὸ παρ' ἑκάστην βάσιν γινόμενον μικρὸν πολὺ γίνεται π. πολλάς Id.Pr. 881b26
;ἡ παρ' ἡμέραν χάρις D.8.70
;τὸ παρ' ἑκάστην ἡμέραν ἡδύ Pl. Lg. 705a
.c παρ' ἆμαρ on (this) day, to-day, τὸ μὲν πὰρ ἆμαρ, τὸ δέ .. to-day and to-morrow, Pi.P.11.63; but παρ' ἦμαρ to-morrow, S. OC 1455 (lyr.).d throughout a period of time,π. τὴν ζόην Hdt. 7.46
;π. τὸν βίον ἅπαντα Pl.Lg. 733a
;π. πάντα τὸν χρόνον D.18.10
; also more loosely, during, π. τὴν πόσιν while they were drinking, Hdt.2.121.δ; π. τὸν πότον Aeschin.2.156
;π. τὴν κύλικα Plu.Ant.24
; π. δεῖπνον or π. τὸ δεῖπνον, Id.2.737a,674f.II along,ὄνος παρ' ἄρουραν ἰών Il.11.558
;βῆ δὲ θέειν π. τεῖχος 12.352
;π. ῥόον Ὠκεανοῖο ᾔομεν Od. 11.21
;ἔπλεον π. τὴν ἤπειρον Hdt.7.193
;π. πᾶσαν τὴν ὁδόν Isoc.4.148
; ὀρθὴν παρ' οἶμον.. τύμβον κατόψει straight along the road, E.Alc. 835;παρ' ὅλην τὴν φάραγγα Plb.10.30.3
; παρ' αὐτὴν τὴν χαράδραν παραπορευομένων ib.9; for παραβάλλειν π., v. supr. c. 1.4b.2 strictly according to, without deviating from,εἶμι π. στάθμην ὀρθὴν ὁδόν Thgn. 945
, cf. S.Fr.474.5; ὠμοί τε δούλοις πάντα καὶ π. στάθμην, i.e. too strict, A.Ag. 1045; π. τὸν λόγον ὃν ἀποφέρουσιν.. ἐπιδείξω I will prove to you strictly according to the accounts which they themselves submit, D.27.34.III past, beyond,παρὰ σκοπιὴν καὶ ἐρινεὸν ἠνεμόεντα.. ἐσσεύοντο Il.22.145
, cf. Od.3.172, 24.12;βῆ δὲ π. Κρουνούς h.Ap. 425
; π. τὴν Βαβυλῶνα παριέναι pass by Babylon, X.Cyr.5.2.29; παρ' αὐτὴν τὴν χύτραν ἄκραν ὁρῶντες looking over the edge of.., Ar.Av. 390.2 metaph., over and above, in addition to,οὐκ ἔστι π. ταῦτ' ἄλλα Id.Nu. 698
;π. ταῦτα πάντα ἕτερόν τι Pl.Phd. 74a
, cf.R. 337d, D.18.139, X.HG 1.5.5; ἑκὼν ἐπόνει π. τοὺς ἄλλους more than the others, Id.Ages.5.3, cf. Mem.4.4.1, Oec.20.16;ἃ τῷ ῥαψῳδῷ προσήκει καὶ σκοπεῖσθαι καὶ διακρίνειν π. τοὺς ἄλλους ἀνθρώπους Pl. Ion 539e
.3 metaph., in excess over, πὰρ δύναμιν beyond one's strength, Il.13.787, cf. Th.1.70, Hyp.Lyc.16, Arist.Rh.Al. 1423b29;π. τὴν δ. Id.Po. 1451b38
.4 metaph., in transgression or violation of,π. μοῖραν Od.14.509
;π. μοῖραν Δίος Alc.Supp. 14.10
; παρ' αἶσαν, παρὰ δίκαν, Pi.P.8.13, O.2.16, etc.;π. τὸ δίκαιον Th.5.90
, etc.; π. τὰς σπονδάς, τὸν νόμον, Id.1.67, X.HG1.7.14;π. φύσιν Th.6.17
, cf. Pl.Lg. 747b; π. τὴν στήλην prob. in IG12.45.20; π. καιρόν out of season, Pi.O.8.24, etc.; π. γνώμαν ib.12.10, cf. A.Supp. 454; π. δόξαν, π. τὸ δοκοῦν ἡμῖν, π. λόγον, Th.3.93, 1.84, Plb.2.38.5; παρ' ἐλπίδα or ἐλπίδας, A.Ag. 899, S.Ant. 392, etc.; πὰρ μέλος out of tune, Pi.N.7.69;π. τὴν ἀξίαν Th.7.77
, etc.; π. τὸ εἰωθός, τὸ καθεστηκός, Id.4.17, 1.98.5 π. τοσοῦτον ἦλθε κινδύνου, = παρῆλθε τοσοῦτον κινδύνου, passed over so much ground within the sphere of danger, i.e. incurred such imminent peril, Id.3.49, cf. 7.2; in such phrases the tmesis was forgotten, and the acc. came to be governed by παρά, which thus came to mean 'by such and such a margin', ' with so much to spare', ἐνίκησαν π. πολύ, ἡσσηθέντες π. πολύ, Id.1.29, 2.89, cf. Pl. Ap. 36a; παρὰ δ' ὀλίγον ἀπέφυγες only just, E.IT 870 (lyr.); ; δεινότατον π. πολύ by far, Ar.Pl. 445; παρ' ὅσον quatenus, Luc.Nec.17, etc.; π. δύο ψήφους ἀπέφυγε by two votes, Hyp.Eux.28, cf. D.23.205;π. τέτταρας ψήφους μετέσχε τῆς πόλεως Is.3.37
; π. τοσοῦτον ἐγένετο αὐτῷ μὴ περιπεσεῖν by so much (= little) he missed falling in with.., Th.8.33; π. πέντε ναῦς πλέον ἀνδρὶ ἑκάστῳ ἢ τρεῖς ὀβολοὶ ὡμολογήθησαν ib.29; οὐ π. μικρὸν ἐποίησαν they made no little difference, Isoc.4.59.b in phrases like π. τοσοῦτον ἦλθε κινδύνου, τοσοῦτον was sts. understood of the interval from danger, etc., and παρά came to mean 'by so much short of' (τὸ π. μικρὸν ὥσπερ οὐδὲν ἀπέχειν δοκεῖ Arist.Ph. 197a29
), within such and such a distance of, so near to, τὴν Ἠϊόνα π. νύκτα ἐγένετο (sc. αὐτῷ) λαβεῖν he was within one night of taking E., Th.4.106; π. μικρὸν ἦλθον ἀποθανεῖν I came within a little of.., Isoc. 19.22, cf. Plb.1.43.7, Plu. Caes. 39; παρ' ἐλάχιστον ἦλθε.. ἀφελέσθαι was within an ace of taking away, Th.8.76; παρ' οὐδὲν μὲν ἦλθον ἀποκτεῖναι (were within a mere nothing, within an ace of killing him),ἐξεκήρυξαν δ' ἐκ πόλεως Aeschin. 3.258
, cf. Plu.Pyrrh. 14, Alex.62; π. τοσοῦτον ἦλθε διαφυγεῖν so near he came to escaping, Luc.Cat.4; ;παρ' οὐδὲν ἐλθόντες τοῦ ἀποβαλεῖν Plb.1.45.14
, cf. 2.55.4, D.S.17.42: hence without ἐγένετο or ἐλθεῖν, π. μίαν μονάδα (less) by one, i.e. less one, Nicom.Ar.1.8; τεσσαράκοντα π. μίαν, = 39, 2 Ep.Cor.11.24; παρ' ἕνα τοσοῦτοι the same number less one, Plu. Publ.9; σύ μοι παρ' ἕνα ἥκεις ἄγων you have brought me one too few, Luc.Cat.4;δύναται π. δύο συλλαβὰς εἶναι τὸ καταληκτόν Heph.4.2
; τὰ ὁλοκόττινα ηὑρέθησαν π. ἑπτὰ κεράτια seven carats short, PMasp.70.2 (vi A. D.); πάντες παρ' ἕνα, πάντες παρ' ὀλίγους, all save one (a few), Plu.Cat.Mi.20, Ant.5;ἔτη δύο π. ἡμέρας δύο IG5(1).801
([place name] Laconia); of one Μάρκος, θηρίον εἶ π. γράμμα you are a bear ([etym.] ἄρκος) all but a letter, AP11.231 (Ammian.); ὡς π. τι καὶ τὰς ὄψεις ἀφανίσαι so that he all but (lit. less something) lost his sight, Vett.Val.228.6; π. τι βυθίζεσθαι v.l. in Ev.Luc.5.7; τὸ π. τοῦτο the figure less that, i.e. the remainder or difference, PTeb.99.10 (ii B. C.), cf. POxy.264.4 (i A. D.), PAmh.2.148.5 (v A. D.); hence of any difference whether of excess or defect, οὐδὲν π. τοῦτο ποιούμενοι τοὺς.. Λευκανούς τε καὶ τοὺς.. Σαυνίτας making no difference between.., Str.6.1.3, cf. 14.5.11, Plu.2.24c.6 hence of the margin by which anything increases or decreases, and so of the cause according to which anything comes into existence or varies,τὸ εὖ π. μικρὸν διὰ πολλῶν ἀριθμῶν γίνεται Polyclit.2
(cf. μικρός III. 5 c); διαφέρει π. τὰς τῶν παθημάτων ἐναντιώσεις according to.., Arist.HA 486b5;μεταπίπτει π. τὰ κλίματα Gem. 5.29
, cf. 11.5, al.; π. τὰ πράγματα cj. in Apollod.Car.11.7 more generally of the margin by which an event occurs, i.e. of the necessary and sufficient cause or motive (τὸ μὴ π. τοῦτο γίνεσθαι τότε λέγομεν, ὅταν ἀναιρεθέντος τούτου μηδὲν ἧττον περαίνηται ὁ συλλογισμός Arist.APr. 65b6
, cf. 48a24, al.), κεινὰν π. δίαιταν just for the sake of unsatisfying food, Pi.O.2.65; ἕκαστος οὐ π. τὴν ἑαυτοῦ ἀμέλειαν οἴεται βλάψειν each thinks that his own negligence will not suffice to cause injury, Th.1.141, cf. Isoc.3.48; π. τὴν αὑτοῦ ἁμαρτίαν all through his own fault, Antipho 3.4.5, cf. Isoc.6.52, D.4.11, 18.232; πολλὰ.. ἐστιν αἴτια τούτων, καὶ οὐ παρ' ἓν οὐδὲ δύ' εἰς τοῦτο τὰ πράγματ' ἀφῖκται not from one or two causes only, Id.9.2; οὐ π. τοῦτο οὐκ ἔστι it does not follow that it is not.., 1 Ep.Cor.12.15; π. τὸ τὴν ἀρίθμησιν ποιήσασθαι ἐξ ἑτοίμου τοὺς ἐργώνας οὐκ ὀλίγα χρήματα περιεποίησε τῇ πόλει by the simple fact of prompt payment, IPE12.32B35 (Olbia, iii B. C.); , cf. Plb.3.103.2, 18.28.6, al.; οὐδεὶς παρ' ἑαυτόν ἐστι βασιλεύς thanks to himself alone, Aristeas 224;παρ' αὑτὸν ἀτυχεῖ Arr.Epict.3.24.2
, cf. Phld.Rh.2.16 S.;παρ' ἡμᾶς ἡ τῶν ἀγαθῶν ἀπόστασις Hierocl. in CA25p.477M.
; εἶναι π. τοῦτο σωτηρίαν τε πόλει καὶ τοὐναντίον, i.e. on this depends.., Pl.Lg. 715d, cf. X.Eq.Mag.1.5, D.C.Fr.36.5;π. μίαν ἡμέραν καὶ ἓν πρᾶγμα καὶ ἀπόλλυται προκοπὴ καὶ σῴζεται Epict.Ench.51.2
; π. τὸ Ἕλληνά με εἶναι just because I am a Greek, UPZ7.13 (ii B. C.);π. τὸ ἀγαπᾶν αὐτὸν αὐτήν LXX Ge.29.20
, cf. Ex.14.11; later more loosely, because of.., Phld.Rh.1.158 S., Gem.6.24, etc.; οὐδὲν π. σὲ γέγονε it is no fault of yours, PRyl.243.6 (ii A. D.), cf. POxy.1420.7 (ii A. D.).8 of a limit of possibility,εἴπερ ἐνεδέχετο π. τοὺς παρόντας καιρούς D.18.239
; πεῖσαι τό γε παρ' αὑτόν to persuade (the judges) so far as in you lies, Arr.Epict.2.2.20; οἴμωζε παρ' ἐμέ as far as I am concerned, for all I care, Ar.Av. 846.D POSITION: παρά may follow its Subst. in all three cases, but then becomes by anastrophe πάρα: when the ult. is elided, the practice varies,τῇσι παρ' Il.18.400
; but Ἡφαίστοιο πάρ' ib. 191.F πάρα (with anastrophe) stands for πάρεστι and πάρεισι, Il.1.174, Hes.Op. 454, A.Pers. 167, Hdt.1.42, al., S.El. 285, Ar.Ach. 862, etc.G IN COMPOS.,I alongside of, beside, of rest, παράκειμαι, παράλληλοι, παρέζομαι, πάρειμι (εἰμί), παρίστημι; of motion, παραπλέω, πάρειμι ([etym.] εἶμι).II to the side of, to, παραδίδωμι, παρέχω.IV metaph.,2 of comparison, as in παραβάλλω, παρατίθημι.3 of alteration or change, as in παραλλάσσω, παραπείθω, παραπλάσσω, παρατεκταίνω, παραυδάω, παράφημι.4 of a side-issue, παραπόλλυμι. (Cogn. with Goth. faúr 'along', Lat. por-.) -
8 ὑπολύω
A loosen beneath or below, ὑπέλυσε δὲ γυῖα made his limbs give way under him (by giving him a deadly wound), Il.15.581;πολλῶν ἀνδρῶν ὑπὸ γούνατ' ἔλυσε Od.14.236
; ὑπέλυσε μένος καὶ φαίδιμα γυῖα made courage and strength fail, Il.6.27; of wrestlers,ὑπέλυσε δὲ γυῖα 23.726
:—[voice] Pass.,ὑπέλυντο δὲ γυῖα 16.341
; λύθεν δ' ὑπὸ φαίδιμα γυῖα ib. 805;ὑπολύεταί μου τὰ γόνατα Ar.Lys. 216
.II loose from under the yoke,ὁ δ' ἔλυεν ὑφ' ἵππους Il.23.513
, cf. Od.4.39;ὑ. ζεύγη βοεικά Th.4.128
; loose from under the sheep,ἑταίρους Od.9.463
:—[voice] Med., σὺ τόν γ'.. ὑπελύσαο δεσμῶν thou didst set him free from bonds, Il.1.401.2 untie a person's sandals from under his feet, take off his shoes,ὑπαί τις ἀρβύλας λύοι A.Ag. 944
;τὰς Περσικάς Ar.Nu. 152
, cf. Th. 1183:—[voice] Med., take off one's own sandals or shoes, or have them taken off,τὰς ἐμβάδας Id.V. 1157
(prob. cj. for ὑποδύου): abs., ὑπολύεσθαι, opp. ὑποδεῖσθαι, Id.Lys. 950, Pl. 927, cf. X.An.4.5.13:—alsob c. acc. pers., ὑ. τινά unshoe him, take off his shoes,οὐχ ὑπολύσεις αὐτόν; Pherecr.153.6
(hex.);ὑπολύετε, παῖδες, Ἀλκιβιάδην Pl.Smp. 213b
.3 [voice] Med., disarm oneself, Ael.VH14.48 (v.l. ἀπελύσατο). -
9 ἀκούω
ἀκούω fut. ἀκούσω SibOr 4, 175; Mt 12:19; 13:14 (Is 6:9); J 5:25, 28; 10:16, ἀκούσομαι EpArist 5; Ac 3:22 (Dt 18:15); 28:28 (freq. w. vv.ll.); 1 aor. ἤκουσα; pf. ἀκήκοα; ptc. ἠκουκώς Hs 5, 4, 2. Pass.: fut. ἀκουσθήσομαι; 1 aor. ἠκούσθην; pf. 3 sg. ἤκουσται Dt 4:32 (Hom.+) ‘hear’, as a passive respondent to λέγω.① lit. to have or exercise the faculty of hearing, hearⓐ abs. τὰ ὦτα ἀκούουσιν Mt 13:16; κωφοὶ ἀ. 11:5; cp. Mk 7:37; Lk 7:22; τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἀ. be hard of hearing Mt 13:15 (Is 6:10); ἀκοῇ ἀ. Mt 13:14; Ac 28:26 (both Is 6:9). ἀκούοντες οὐκ ἀκούουσιν they hear and yet do not hear Mt 13:13 (s. Aeschyl., Prom. 448 κλύοντες οὐκ ἤκουον; Demosth. 25 [Against Aristogeiton 1], 89, citing the maxim ὁρῶντας μὴ ὁρᾶν καὶ ἀκούοντας μὴ ἀκούειν), cp. Mk 8:18 (Ezk 12:2) and s. 7 below. In the protasis of a challenge to hearers, by which their attention is drawn to a special difficulty: ὁ ἔχων ὦτα (οὖς) ἀκούειν ἀκουέτω, w. variations (Arrian, Ind. 5, 1 ὅστις ἐθέλει φράζειν …, φραζέτω) Mt 11:15 v.l.; 13:9 v.l., 43 v.l.; Mk 4:9, 23; 7:15 [16] v.l.; Lk 8:8; 14:35 (EBishop, BT 7, ’56, 38–40); Rv 2:7, 11, 17, 29; 3:6, 13, 22; 13:9. Cp. Ox 1081 verso, 6–8; s. 7 below for the restored text. For the sense of the impv. in these challenges also s. 7. S. οὖς 2.ⓑ w. obj. (on the syntax B-D-F §173; 416, 1; Rob. 506f; on the LXX s. Johannessohn, Kasus, 36; Helbing, Kasussyntax 150ff).α. foll. by a thing as obj. in acc. (Diod S 8, 32, 1 τὶ something) Mt 11:4; 13:17ff; Lk 7:22; 1J 1:1, 3. τὴν φωνήν (UPZ 77 I, 25) Mt 12:19; J 3:8; Ac 22:9 (but see 7 below); 1 Cl 39:3 (Job 4:16); (pass. Mt 2:18 [Jer 38:15]; Rv 18:22). τὸν λόγον Mt 13:20ff; J 5:24. τοὺς λόγους, τὰ ῥήματα Mt 10:14; J 8:47 s. 4 below; Ac 2:22. πολέμους καὶ ἀκοὰς πολέμων Mt 24:6. τὴν βλασφημίαν 26:65. τὸν ἀσπασμόν Lk 1:41. ἄρρητα ῥήματα 2 Cor 12:4. τὸν ἀριθμόν Rv 9:16. τὴν ἀποκάλυψιν Hv 3, 12, 2. Pass. τὰ ἀκουσθέντα what has been heard i.e. the message Hb 2:1. ἠκούσθη ὁ λόγος εἰς τὰ ὦτα τῆς ἐκκλησίας … ἐν Ἰερουσαλήμ the report reached the ears of the church in Jerusalem Ac 11:22. Oft. the obj. is to be supplied fr. context Mt 13:17; Mk 4:15; J 6:60a; Ac 2:37; 8:30; 9:21; Ro 10:14. καθὼς ἀκούω = ἃ ἀ. J 5:30.β. τί τινος hear someth. fr. someone τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν, ἣν ἠκούσατέ μου the promise which you heard from me Ac 1:4. Still other constrs. occur, which are also poss. when the hearing is not directly fr. the mouth of the informant, but involves a report which one has received fr. the pers. in any way at all (s. below 3d). τὶ ἔκ τινος (Od. 15, 374; Hdt. 3, 62 ἐκ τοῦ κήρυκος) 2 Cor 12:6. τὶ παρά τινος (Soph., Oed. R. 7 παρʼ ἀγγέλων; Pla., Rep. 6, 506d; Demosth. 6, 26; Jer 30:8; Jos., Bell. 1, 529) J 8:26, 40 (τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἀ. as Diod S 16, 50, 2); 15:15; Ac 10:22; 28:22; 2 Ti 2:2; w. attraction of the relative λόγων ὧν παρʼ ἐμοῦ ἤκουσας teachings which you have heard from me 1:13; τὶ ἀπό τινος (Thu. 1, 125, 1) 1J 1:5. Hebraistically ἀπὸ τ. στόματός τινος Lk 22:71 (cp. ἐκ τ. στόμ. τ. Ex 23:13; Ezk 3:17; 33:7).γ. foll. by a thing as obj. in gen. (Hdt. 8, 135; X., Cyr. 3, 1, 8; Demosth. 18, 3; B-D-F §173, 2; Rob. 507) hear someth. τῆς βλασφημίας (= τὴν βλ. Mt 26:65) Mk 14:64. συμφωνίας καὶ χορῶν Lk 15:25; τῆς φωνῆς (BGU 1007, 11 [III B.C.] ἀκούσαντες φωνῆς) J 5:25, 28; Ac 9:7 (on the experience of Paul and his companions cp. Maximus Tyr. 9, 7d–f: some see a divine figure, others see nothing but hear a voice, still others both see and hear); 11:7; 22:7 (HMoehring, NovT 3, ’59, 80–99; s. Rob. 506). τῶν λόγων Lk 6:47. τῶν ῥημάτων J 12:47.ⓒ hear, listen to w. gen. of the pers. and a ptc. (Pla., Prot. 320b; X., Symp. 3, 13; Herm. Wr. 12, 8; Jos., Ant. 10, 105 ἤκουσε τοῦ προφήτου ταῦτα λέγοντος): ἠκούσαμεν αὐτοῦ λέγοντος we have heard him say Mk 14:58; ἀκοῦσαι προσευχομένου Παύλου AcPl Ha 2, 12. ἤκουον εἷς ἕκαστος … λαλούντων αὐτῶν each one heard them speaking Ac 2:6, 11; Rv 16:5, 7 (in vs. 7 the altar speaks); Hv 1, 3, 3. W. acc. instead of gen. πᾶν κτίσμα … καὶ τὰ ἐν αὐτοῖς πάντα ἤκουσα λέγοντας (v.l. λέγοντα) Rv 5:13. Used without ptc. w. pronoun only: μου (Dio Chrys. 79 [28], 14) Mk 7:14; Ac 26:3. αὐτῶν Lk 2:46. αὐτοῦ vs. 47; 15:1; 19:48; 21:38; J 3:29 etc. ἡμῶν Ac 24:4.—ἀ. τινὸς περί τινος (since Hdt. 7, 209; IG II, 168 [338 B.C.]) hear someone (speak) about someth. Ac 17:32. ἤκουσεν αὐτοῦ περὶ τῆς … πίστεως he heard him speak about faith Ac 24:24, cp. Hm 11:7.—W. ὅτι foll. (X., Cyr. 3, 3, 18) J 14:28; Ac 22:2.—Abs. οἱ ἀκούοντες the hearers (Diod S 4, 7, 4) Lk 6:27; MPol 7:3. Esp. impv. ἄκουε listen! Mk 12:29 (Dt 6:4); Hs 5, 1, 3; pl. Mk 4:3. ἀκούσατε Ac 7:2; 13:16; AcPl Ha 8, 10. W. συνίετε listen and try to understand Mt 15:10.② legal t.t. to hear a legal case, grant a hearing to someone (X., Hell. 1, 7, 9 al.; PAmh 135, 14; PIand 9, 10; 15; BGU 511 II, 2; POxy 1032, 59) w. παρά τινος: ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ πρῶτον παρʼ αὐτοῦ without first giving him a hearing J 7:51 (SPancaro, Biblica 53, ’72, 340–61).—Ac 25:22.③ to receive news or information about someth., learn about someth.ⓐ abs. ἀκούσας δὲ ὁ Ἰησοῦς when Jesus learned about it (the death of J. Bapt.) Mt 14:13.—Mk 3:21; 6:14 (s. HLjungvik, ZNW 33, ’34, 90–92); Ro 10:18. W. ἀναγγέλλειν 15:21 (Is 52:15).ⓑ w. gen. of person οὗ οὐκ ἤκουσαν of whom they have not heard Ro 10:14a.—W. acc. of thing (X., Cyr. 1, 1, 4; Diod S 19, 8, 4; Chion, Ep. 12 ἀκ. τὴν τυραννίδα; Herodian 4, 4, 8) learn of τὴν ἀγάπην Phlm 5. τὴν ἀναστροφήν Gal 1:13. τὰ ἔργα τοῦ Χριστοῦ Mt 11:2. τὴν ἐνέδραν the ambush Ac 23:16: Χριστιανισμὸν ἀ. hear Christianity IPhld 6:1; τὴν οἰκονομίαν Eph 3:2. τὴν πίστιν 1:15; Col 1:4. τὴν ὑπομονήν Js 5:11.—Pass. ἀκούεται ἐν ὑμῖν πορνεία it is reported that there is immorality among you 1 Cor 5:1 (schol. on Nicander, Ther. 139 τοῦτο ἐξακούεται=this report is heard). ἐὰν ἀκουσθῇ τοῦτο ἐπὶ τοῦ ἡγεμόνος if this should come to the prefect’s ears Mt 28:14.ⓒ ἀ. τι περί τινος (since Hdt. 2, 43) learn someth. about someone Lk 9:9; 16:2.—ἀ. περί τινος (Jos., Vi. 246) Lk 7:3.ⓓ w. prep., to denote the author or source of the information (s. 1bβ) ἀ. τι παρά τινος: τῶν ἀκουσάντων παρὰ Ἰωάννου who had learned fr. John (who Jesus was) J 1:40, cp. 6:45 (Simplicius in Epict. p. 110, 35 τὸ ἀκοῦσαι παρὰ θεοῦ, ὅτι ἀθάνατός ἐστιν ἡ ψυχή); ἀ. τι ἔκ τινος: ἠκούσαμεν ἐκ τοῦ νόμου we have heard from the law (when it was read in the synagogue) J 12:34, where ἀ. approaches the technical sense learn (a body of authoritative teaching), as 1J 1:5 (s. above); 2:7, 24 et al. (OPiper, JBL 66, ’47, 437 n. 1). ἀ. ἀπό τινος περί τινος Ac 9:13.ⓔ w. ὅτι foll. (SIG 370, 21; PTebt 416, 8; BGU 246, 19; Josh l0:1; Da 5:14 Theod.; 1 Macc 6:55; 4 Macc 4:22; cp. the constr. ἀ. τινὰ ὅτι Od. 3, 193; X., Mem. 4, 2, 33) Mt 2:22; 4:12 al.—Pass. ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν it became known that he was in the house Mk 2:1 (s. B-D-F §405, 2). οὐκ ἠκούσθη ὅτι it is unheard of that J 9:32.ⓕ w. acc. and inf. foll. (Hom. et al.; Jos., Ant. 11, 165; 13, 292) J 12:18; 1 Cor 11:18. W. acc. and ptc. (X., Cyr. 2, 4, 12; Herodian 2, 12, 4) Ac 7:12; 3J 4.④ to give careful attention to, listen to, heed ἀ. τινός someone (Hom. et al.) ἀκούετε αὐτοῦ Mt 17:5; Lk 9:35; Ac 3:22 (all three Dt 18:15); cp. Mt 18:15; Lk 16:29, 31; J 10:8; Ac 4:19. W. acc. of thing J 8:47 (s. 1bα); PEg2 53f (restored).—Abs. (PsSol 2:8) obey, listen αὐτοὶ καὶ ἀκούσονται Ac 28:28; cp. Mt 18:16; J 5:25b; agree 9:27a.⑤ to pay attention to by listening, listen to ἀ. τινός someone/someth. (Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 14 I, 18; 461, 6) Mk 6:11; J 6:60b. Of God (Hom.+) Ac 7:34 (Ex 3:7); J 9:31; 11:41f; 1J 5:14f; AcPt Ox 849, 27.—Abs. καθὼς ἠδύναντο ἀ. as they were able to listen Mk 4:33 (EMolland, SymbOsl 8, 1929, 83–91; s. also 7 below).⑥ to be given a nickname or other identifying label, be called (Demosth. 18, 46 κόλακες ἀκούουσι; Diog. L. 2, 111 a derisive nickname; 2, 140) ἤκουσαν προδόται γονέων they were called betrayers of their parents Hv 2, 2, 2.⑦ to hear and understand a message, understand (Teles p. 47, 12; Galen: CMG Suppl. I p. 12, 29; Aelian, VH 13, 46; Apollon. Dysc., Syntax p. 295, 25 [Gramm. Gr. II/2 p. 424, 5 U.] ἀκούειν= συνιέναι τῶν ἠκουσμένων; Sext. Emp., Math. 1, 37 τὸ μὴ πάντας πάντων ἀκούειν; Julian, Orat. 4 p. 147a; PGM 3, 453 ἀκούσεις τὰ ὄρνεα λαλοῦντα; Philo, Leg. All. 2, 35) abs. (Is 36:11) 1 Cor 14:2. Perh. also Mk 4:33 (s. 5 above, and cp. Epict. 1, 29, 66 τ. δυναμένοις αὐτὰ ἀκοῦσαι). On the form of Lk 6:27a cp. Cleopatra 16, 57 ὑμῖν δὲ λέγω τοῖς εὖ φρονοῦσιν. W. acc. τὸν νόμον understand the law Gal 4:21; perh. Ac 22:9; 26:14 (s. 1bα above) belong here. Cp. also the play on words (1a above) ἀκούοντες οὐκ ἀκούουσιν Mt 13:13; cp. Mk 8:18. Here belong also the imperatives in Mt 11:15; 13:9, 43; Mk 4:9, 23; 7:15 [16] v.l.; Lk 8:8; 14:35; Rv 2:7, 11, 17, 29; 3:6, 13, 22; 13:9; also ὁ ἔχων ὦ[τ]α τ[ῶν ἀ]|περάντων [ἀ]κο[ύει?]ν ἀ|κουέτω one who has ears to hear the things that are without limits let him hear Ox 1081, 6–8, rev. on the basis of the Coptic, s. SJCh 89, 5f; cp. Borger, GGA 122.—ἀκούω is occasionally used as a perfective present: I hear= I have heard (so as early as Il. 24, 543; Aristoph., Frogs 426; X., An. 2, 5, 13, Mem. 2, 4, 1; 3, 5, 26; Pla., Rep. 583d; Theocr. 15, 23) Lk 9:9; 1 Cor 11:18; 2 Th 3:11. B-D-F §322.—B. 1037; 1339. DELG. M-M. TW. Sv. -
10 κατά
κατά [(A)][ κᾰτᾰ], poet. καταί acc. to A.D.Synt.309.28, found in Compds., as καταιβάτης: Prep. with gen. or acc.:—A downwards.A WITH GEN.,I denoting motion from above, down from, βῆ δὲ κατ' Οὐλύμποιο καρήνων, κατ' Ἰδαίων ὀρέων, βαλέειν κ. πέτρης, Il. 22.187, 16.677, Od.14.399;κατ' οὐρανοῦ εἰλήλουθας Il.6.128
; καθ' ἵππων ἀΐξαντε ib. 232;δάκρυα.. κ. βλεφάρων Χαμάδις ῥέε 17.438
;ἵεις σαυτὸν κ. τοῦ τείχους Ar.V. 355
;ἁλόμενοι κ. τῆς πέτρας X.An.4.2.17
;κ. τῶν πετρῶν ὦσαι Pl.Phdr. 229c
;κ. κρημνῶν ῥιφέντες Id.Lg. 944a
:— for κατ' ἄκρης v. ἄκρα:Μοῖσα κ. στόματος Χέε νέκταρ Theoc.7.82
(but perh. in sense 11.1).1 down upon or over,κ. Χθονὸς ὄμματα πήξας Il.3.217
; of the dying, κατὰ.. ὀφθαλμῶν κέχυτ' ἀχλύς a cloud settled upon the eyes, 5.696, cf. 20.321;τὸν δὲ κατ' ὀφθαλμῶν.. νὺξ ἐκάλυψεν 13.580
; φᾶρος κὰκ κεφαλῆς εἴρυσσε down over.., Od.8.85; [ κόπρος]κ. σπείους κέχυτο.. πολλή 9.330
; ὕδωρ κ. Χειρός, v. Χείρ; μύρον κ. τῆς κεφαλῆς καταχέαντες Pl.R. 398a;νάρκη μου κ. τῆς Χειρὸς καταχεῖται Ar.V. 713
;κ. τῆς τραπέζης καταπάσας τέφραν Id.Nu. 177
; ξαίνειν κ. τοῦ νώτου πολλὰς [ πληγάς] D.19.197;ἐσκεδασμένοι κ. τῆς Χώρας Plb.1.17.10
;οἱ κ. νώτου πονοῦντες Id.3.19.7
;ῥόπαλον ἤλασα κὰκ κεφαλῆς Theoc.25.256
; κ. κόρρης παίειν, = ἐπὶ κόρρης, Luc.Cat.12, al.b Geom., along, upon, πίπτειν κατ' [ εὐθείας] Archim.Sph.Cyl.1 Def.2; αἱ γωνίαι κ. κύκλων περιφερειῶν ἐνεχθήσονται will move on.., ib.1.23, al., cf. Aristarch.Sam.1.2 down into,νέκταρ στάξε κ. ῥινῶν Il.19.39
; of a dart,κ. γαίης ᾤχετο 13.504
, etc.; ;ψυχὴ κ. Χθονὸς ᾤχετο 23.100
; κ. γᾶς underground, Pi.O.2.59; κατ' ὕδατος under water, Hdt.2.149; [ ποταμὸς]δὺς κ. τῆς γῆς Pl.Phd.
113c, cf. Ti. 25d;κ. γῆς σύμεναι A.Eu. 1007
(anap.); κ. Χθονὸς κρύψαι to bury. S.Ant.24; ὁ κ. γῆς one dead and buried, X.Cyr.4.6.5;οἱ κ. Χθονὸς θεοί A.Pers. 689
, etc.;θεοὶ<οἱ> κ. γᾶς Id.Ch. 475
(lyr.), etc.; so κ. θαλάσσης ἀφανίζεσθαι, καταδεδυκέναι, Hdt.7.6, 235; also βᾶτε κατ' ἀντιθύρων go down by or through.., S.El. 1433.3 later, towards a point, τοξεύειν κ. σκοποῦ to shoot at, Hdn.6.7.8;κατ' ἰχνῶν τινος ὁδεύειν Luc.Rh.Pr.9
.4 of vows or oaths, by,καθ' ἡμῶν ὀμνύναι D.29.26
, cf. 54.38;ἐπιορκήσασα κ. τῶν παίδων Lys.32.13
; esp. of the victims, etc., over which the oath is taken, ὀμνυόντων τὸν ἐπιχώριον ὅρκον καθ' ἱερῶν τελείων Foed. ap. Th.5.47, cf. Arist.Ath.29.5, Foed.Delph.Pell.1A9, etc.;κ. τῶν νικητηρίων εὐξάμενοι D.Ep.1.16
; also κατ' ἐξωλείας ὀμνύναι to imprecate destruction on oneself, Id.21.119;κατ' ἐξ. ἐπιορκεῖν Id.57.22
.b to make a vow towards, i.e. make a vow of offering..,κ. Χιλίων εὐχὴν ποιήσασθαι Χιμάρων Ar. Eq. 660
.5 in hostile sense, against, A.Ch. 221, S.Aj. 304, etc.;κ. πάντων φύεσθαι D.18.19
; esp. of judges giving sentence against a person, A.Th. 198, S.Aj. 449, etc.;ψεύδεσθαι κατά τινος Lys.22.7
;λέγειν κατά τινος κακά S.Ph.65
, cf. X.HG1.5.2, etc.; of speeches, [ λόγος] κ. Μειδίου, etc. (opp. πρὸς Λεπτίνην, in reply to L.);δῶρα εἰληφέναι κατά τινος Din.3.6
, cf. 18.6 of Time, for,μισθοῦν κ. εἴκοσι ἐτῶν IG12.94.37
; κ. βίου for life, Tab.Heracl.1.50;κὰπ παντὸς Χρόνοι IG9(2).517.20
([place name] Larissa ) (butκ. παντὸς τοῦ Χρόνου σκέψασθε D. 22.72
falls under 7);κ. παντὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος ἀείμνηστον Lycurg.7
.7 in respect of, concerning,μὴ κατ' ἀνθρώπων σκόπει μόνον τοῦτο Pl. Phd. 70d
;κ. τῶν ἄλλων τεχνῶν τοιαῦτα εὑρήσομεν Id.Sph. 253b
; οἱ κ. Δημοσθένους ἔπαινοι praises bestowed on D., Aeschin.3.50; ἐρεῖν or λέγειν κατά τινος to say of one, Pl.Ap. 37b, Prt. 323b, etc.;εἰ κ. θηλείας φαίης A.D.Synt.198.10
;εἴπερ ἕν γέ τι ζητεῖς κ. πάντων Pl.Men. 73d
, cf. 74b;ὅπερ εἴρηται καθόλου κ. πασῶν τῶν πολιτειῶν Arist.Pol. 1307b2
; freq. in the Logic of Arist., κατά τινος λέγεσθαι or κατηγορεῖσθαι to be predicated of.., Int.16b10, Cat. 1b10, etc.; καταφῆσαί (or ἀποφῆσαί) τι κατά τινος to affirm (or deny) of.., Metaph. 1007b21; soκ. τινὸς ὑπάρχειν Int. 16b13
: and in Adv. καθόλου (q.v.).B WITH Acc.,I of motion downwards, κ. ῥόον down stream, Od.14.254, Il.12.33; opp. ἀνὰ τὸν ποταμόν, Hdt.2.96; κ. τὸν ποταμόν, κ. τὸ ὑδάτιον, Id.1.194, Pl.Phdr. 229a; κατ' οὖρον ἰέναι, ῥεῖν, down (i.e. with) the wind, A.Th. 690, S.Tr. 468; κ. πνεῦμα, κατ' ἄνεμον ἵστασθαι to leeward, Arist.HA 535a19, 560b13, Dsc.4.153.2 with or without signf. of motion, on, over, throughout a space, freq. in Hom.,καθ' Ἑλλάδα καὶ μέσον Ἄργος Od.1.344
; κατ' Ἀχαΐδα, κ. Τροίην, Il.11.770, 9.329;κατ' ἠερόεντα κέλευθα Od.20.64
; κ. πόντον, κῦμα, ὕλην, Il.4.276, 6.136, 3.151;κ. πτόλιν Od.2.383
; κ. ἄστυ, οἶκον, Il.18.286, 6.56; κ. ὅμιλον, στρατόν, 3.36, 1.229; κ. κλισίας τε νέας τε ib. 487;πόλεμον κάτα δακρυόεντα 17.512
; κ. ὑσμίνην, μόθον, κλόνον, 5.84, 18.159, 16.331;τὸ ὕδωρ κ. τοὺς ταφροὺς ἐχώρει X.Cyr.7.5.16
, etc. (in later Gr.of motion to a place,κ. τὴν Ἰταλίαν Zos.3.1
);καθ' Ἑλλάδα A.Ag. 578
;κ. πτόλιν Id.Th.6
;αἱ σκηναὶ αἱ κ. τὴν ἀγοράν D.18.169
;τὰ κατ' ἀγροὺς Διονύσια Aeschin.1.157
, etc.;κ. τὸ προάστιον Hdt.3.54
;τύμβον κατ' αὐτόν A. Th. 528
, cf. Supp. 869 (lyr.): Geom., at a point, Euc.1.1,al.; τέμνειν [ σφαῖραν] κ. κύκλον in a circle, Archim.Aren.1.17; also, in the region of,οἱ κ. τὸν ἥλιον γινόμενοι ἀστέρες Gem.12.7
: freq. in Hom. in describing the place of a wound, βαλεῖν κ. στῆθος, γαστέρα, etc., Il.11.108, 16.465, al.;νύξε κ. δεξιὸν ὦμον 5.46
;οὔτασε κατ' ἰσχίον 11.339
; so βαλεῖν κατ' ἀσπίδα, κ. ζωστῆρα, 5.537, 615; βέλος κ. καίριον ἦλθεν struck upon a vital part, v.l. in 11.439: metaph.,ἄχος κ. φρένα τύψε 19.125
: generally, κ. φρένα καὶ κατὰ θυμόν in heart and soul, 4.163, al.3 opposite, over against,κ. Σινώπην πόλιν Hdt.1.76
, cf. 2.148, Th.2.30, etc.;ἀνὴρ κατ' ἄνδρα A.Th. 505
;μολὼν.. μοι κ. στόμα Id.Ch. 573
;κατ' ὀφθαλμούς τινος LXX 2 Ki.12.11
;οἱ μὲν Ἀθηναῖοι κ. Λακεδαιμονίους ἐγένοντο X.HG4.2.18
; κατ' Ἀχαιοὺς ἀντετάχθησαν ibid.;ἐν συμποσίῳ.., περίμενε, μέχρις ἂν γένηται κατὰ σέ Epict.Ench. 15
, cf. D.L.7.108.II distributively, of a whole divided into parts, κρῖν' ἄνδρας κ. φῦλα, κ. φρήτρας by tribes, by clans, Il.2.362; κ. σφέας μαχέονται by themselves, separately, ib. 366, cf. Th.4.64;ἐσκήνουν κ. τάξεις X.Cyr.2.1.25
;αὐτὴ καθ' αὑτήν A.Pr. 1013
; κ. κώμας κατοικημένοι in separate villages, Hdt.1.96; κατ' ἑωυτοὺς ἕκαστοι ἐτράποντο each to his own home, Id.5.15; κ. πόλεις ἀποπλεῦσαι, διαλυθῆναι, Th.1.89, 3.1:στρατιὰ κ. ἕνδεκα μέρη κεκοσμημένη Pl.Phdr. 247a
; laterοἱ κατ' ἄνδρα λόγοι PLond.2.259.72
(i A. D.), cf. D.Chr.32.6, etc.;ἡ κατ' οἰκίαν ἀπογραφή PLond.3.904.20
(ii A.D.), etc.; κατ' ἔπος word by word, Ar.Ra. 802; κατ' ὄνομα individually, 3 Ep.Jo.15, etc.; παῖδα κ. κρήνην at each fount a boy, Lyr.Alex.Adesp.37.13, cf. POxy 2108.9 (iii A.D.).2 of Time, καθ' ἡμέραν, κατ' ἦμαρ, day by day, daily, v. ἡμέρα 111; καθ' ἑνιαυτόν, κατ' ἔτος, Test.Epict.6.24, Ev.Luc.2.41, etc.;κ. μῆνα POxy.275.18
(i A.D.).3 of Numbers, by so many at a time, καθ' ἕνα one at a time, individually, Hdt.7.104 (later detailed list,PTeb.
47.34 (ii B.C.), etc.); κ. μίαν τε καὶ δύο by ones and twos, Hdt.4.113; ; ; κ. τὰς πέντε καὶ εἴκοσι μνᾶς πεντακοσίας δραχμὰς εἰσφέρειν to pay 500 drachmae on every 25 minae, D.27.7;κ. διακοσίας καὶ τριακοσίας ὁμοῦ τι τάλαντον διακεχρημένον
in separate sums of and 300 drachmae, Id.27.11; of ships, κ. μίαν (sc. ναῦν) in column, Th.2.90;κ. μίαν ναῦν ἐπιτάττειν Plb.1.26.12
, cf. Th.2.84: Geom., μετρεῖν, μετρεισθαι κατά.. , measure, be measured a certain number of times, Euc.7 Def.8,9,al.; μετρεῖν κ. τὰς ἐν τῷ Β μονάδας as many times as there are units in B, Id.7.16.III of direction towards an object or purpose, πλεῖν κ. πρῆξιν on a business, for or after a matter, Od. 3.72, 9.253; πλάζεσθαι κ. ληΐδα to rove in search of booty, 3.106; κ.ληΐην ἐκπλῶσαι Hdt.2.152
;ἔβη κ. δαῖτα Il.1.424
;ἐπιδημεῖν κατ' ἐμπορίαν IG22.141.32
, cf. Arist.Ath.11.1; κ. Χρέος τινὸς ἐλθεῖν come to seek his help, consult him, Od.11.479, etc.;ἵεται κ. τὴν φωνήν Hdt.2.70
; κ. θέαν ἥκειν to have come for the purpose of seeing, Th.6.31;κ. πλοῦν ἤδη ὤν Id.7.31
;καθ' ἁρπαγὴν ἐσκεδασμένοι X.An.3.5.2
; κ. τί; for what purpose? why? Ar.Nu. 239.2 of pursuit,κ. πόδας τινὸς ἐλαύνειν Hdt.9.89
; simply κ. τινά after him, Id.1.84;ἰέναι κ. τοὺς ἄλλους Id.9.53
; κατ' ἴχνος on the track, S.Aj.32, A.Ag. 695 (lyr.);ὥσπερ κατ' ἴχνη κ. τὰ νῦν εἰρημένα ζῆν Pl.Phd. 115b
.3 Geom., in adverbial phrases, κ. κάθετον in the same vertical line, Archim. Quadr.6; κατ' εὐθεῖάν τινι in the same straight line with.., Papp. 58.7.IV of fitness or conformity, in accordance with,κ. θυμόν Il.1.136
; καθ' ἡμέτερον νόον after our liking, 9.108;κ. νόον πρήξωμεν Hdt.4.97
; κ. μοῖραν as is meet and right, Il.1.286; κατ' αἶσαν, κ. κόσμον, 10.445, 472;κ. νόμον Hes.Th. 417
;κὰν νόμον Pi.O.8.78
;κ. τοὺς νόμους IG22.1227.15
; αἰτίαν καθ' ἥντινα for what cause, A.Pr. 228; κατ' ἔχθραν, κ. φθόνον, for (i.e. because of) hatred, envy, Id.Supp. 336, Eu. 686; καθ' ἡδονήν τι δρᾶν, ποιεῖν, do as one pleases, Th. 2.37,53;κ. τὸ ἔχθος τὸ Θεσσαλῶν Hdt.8.30
, cf. 9.38; κ. φιλίαν, κατ' ἔχθος, Th.1.60, 103, etc.; κατ' ἄλλο μὲν οὐδέν, ὅτι δέ.. for no other reason but that.., Pl.Phdr. 229d; κ. δύναμιν to the best of one's power, Hdt.3.142, etc. ( κὰδ δ. Hes.Op. 336); κ. τρόπον διοικεῖν arrange suitably, Isoc.2.6,al.; κατ' εὐνοίην with goodwill, Hdt.6.108;κ. τὰ παρηγγελμένα X.An.2.2.8
, etc.; in quotations, according to,κατ' Αἰσχύλον Ar.Th. 134
;κ. Πίνδαρον Pl.Phdr. 227b
, etc.2 in relation to, concerning, τὰ κατ' ἀνθρώπους = τὰ ἀνθρώπινα, A.Eu. 930, 310;τὰ κ. τὸν Τέλλον Hdt.1.31
; τὰ κ. τὴν Κύρου τελευτήν ib. 214; τὰ κ. πόλεμον military matters, Aeschin.1.181; αἱ κ. τὴν πόλιν οἰκονομίαι (opp. αἱ πολεμικαὶ πράξεις ) the management of public affairs, Din. 1.97;τὰ κ. τὰς θυσίας SIG506.7
(Delph., iii B.C.); so τὸ κατ' ὑμέας as far as concerns you, Hdt.7.158; τὸ κατ' ἐμέ as far as I am concerned, D.18.247; κ. τοῦτο in this respect, Hdt.5.3, etc.; κ. ταὐτά in the same way, Id.2.20; καθ' ὅτι so far as, Th.1.82, etc.3 in Comparisons, corresponding with, after the fashion of, κρομύοιο λοπὸν κ. like the coat of an onion, dub. in Od.19.233;μέλος κ. Φοίνισσαν ἐμπολὰν πέμπεται Pi.P.2.67
; κ. Μιθραδάτην answering to the description of him, Hdt.1.121; τὴν ἰδέαν κ. πνιγέα like an oven in appearance, Ar.Av. 1001; κηδεῦσαι καθ' ἑαυτόν to marry in one's own rank of life, A.Pr. 890;οὐ κατ' ἄνθρωπον φρονεῖν Id.Th. 425
;λέγω κατ' ἄνδρα, μὴ θεόν, σέβειν ἐμέ Id.Ag. 925
; οὐ κατὰ σέ none of your sort, Chionid.1 (but ἵνα προσείπω σε κατὰ σέ to address you in your own style, Pl.Grg. 467c);τὸ κατ' ἐμὲ καὶ οὐ κατ' ἐμέ Arr.Epict.1.28.5
;οὐ κ. τὰς Μειδίου λῃτουργίας D.21.169
;ἡ βασιλεία κ. τὴν ἀριστοκρατίαν ἐστί Arist.Pol. 1310b3
: freq. after a [comp] Comp.,μέζων ἢ κατ' ἀνθρώπων φύσιν Hdt.8.38
, cf. Pl.Ap. 20e, etc.; μείζω ἢ κ. δάκρυα too great for tears, Th.7.75; ἤθεα βαθύτερα ἢ κ. Θρήϊκας morerefined than was common among the Thracians, Hdt.4.95.V by the favour of a god, etc.,κ. δαίμονα Pi.O.9.28
, cf. P.8.68;κ. θεῖον Ar.Eq. 147
codd. (κ. θεὸν Cobet);κ. τύχην τινά D.48.24
.VI of round numbers (v. infr. v11.2), nearly, about,κ. Χίλια ἑξακόσια ἔτεα 1600
years more or less, Hdt.2.145, cf. 6.44, al.; κατ' οὐδέν next to nothing, Pl.Plt. 302b.VII of Time, during or in the course of a period,κ. τὸν πόλεμον Hdt.7.137
; καθ' ἡμέραν, κατ' ἦμαρ, by day, A. Ch. 818, Ag. 668;κατ' εὐφρόνην Id.Pers. 221
; κ. Χειμῶνα, κ. θερείαν, PLille 1r14 (iii B.C.), PTeb.27.60 (ii B.C.).2 about,κ. τὸν αὐτὸν τοῦτον Χρόνον Hdt.3.131
, etc.;κ. τοὺς θανάτους τῶν βασιλέων Id.6.58
; esp. with names of persons, κ. Ἄμασιν βασιλεύοντα about the time of Amasis, Id.2.134;κ. τὸν κ. Κροῖσον Χρόνον Id.1.67
; οἱ κατ' ἐκεῖνον (sc. τὸν Ἀλκιβιάδην)ὑμέτεροι πρόγονοι D.21.146
(v.l. κατ' ἐκ. τὸν Χρόνον); κ. τοὺς Ἡρακλείδας X.Lac.10.8
; οἱ καθ' ἑαυτοὺς ἄνθρωποι their contemporaries, Id.Mem.3.5.10.3 καθ' ἕτος this year, SIG 284.24 (Erythrae, iv B.C.), OGI458.64 (i B.C./iA.D.), CIG3641b5,38 ([place name] Lampsacus).VIII periphrastically with abstract Subst., κατ' ἡσυχίην, κ. τάχος, = ἡσύχως, ταχέως, Hdt.1.9,7.178; κ. κράτος by force, X.HG2.1.19, etc.; κ. μέρος partially, Arist.Po. 1456a16; individually, severally, Pl.Tht. 157b, Lg. 835a; κ. φύσιν naturally, Hdt. 2.38, Pl.R. 428e; κ. τὴν τέχνην skilfully, Luc.DDeor.20.7; οὔτ' ἐμοὶ λέγειν καθ' ἡδονήν [ ἐστι] it is not pleasant for me to tell you, A.Pr. 263.C Position: κατά may follow both its cases, and is then written with anastr. κάτα, as Il.20.221, etc.; so also in tmesi, when it follows its Verb, 17.91.D abs. as ADV. in all the above senses, esp. like κάτω, downwards, from above, down, freq. in Hom.I downwards, down, as inκαταβαίνω, καταβάλλω, κατάκειμαι, καταπέμπω, καταπίπτω, καταπλέω 1
.III against, in hostile sense (cf. A.11.5), as in καταγιγνώσκω, κατακρίνω, καταψηφίζομαι: more rarely with a Subst., as καταδίκη.IV back, back again, as inκάτειμι, καταπορεύομαι, καταπλέω 11
.V freq. only to strengthen the notion of the simple word, as in κατακόπτω, κατακτείνω, καταφαγεῖν, etc.; also with Substs. and Adjs., as in κατάδηλος, κάτοξος.VI sts. to give a trans. force to an intr. Verb, our be-, as in καταθρηνέω bewail.VII implying waste or consumption, as in καταλειτουργέω, καθιπποτροφέω, καταζευγοτροφέω: and generally in a disparaging sense, as in .F κατά as a Prep. was shortd. in some dialects, esp. in [dialect] Ep., into κάγ, κάδ, κάκ, κάμ, κάν, κάπ, κάρ, κάτ, before γ, δ, κ, μ, ν, π (or φ) , ῥ, τ (or θ), respectively; see these forms in their own places. Mss. and the older Edd. join the Prep. with the following word, as καγγόνυ, καδδέ, κακκεφαλῆς, καππεδίον, καπφάλαρα, καρρόον, καττάδε, καττόν, etc. In compd. Verbs, κατά sts. changes into καβ, καλ, καρ, κατ, before β, λ, ρ, θ, respectively, as κάββαλε, κάλλιπε, καρρέζουσα, κάτθανε; and before στ, σχ, the second syll. sts. disappears, as in καστορνῦσα, κάσχεθε, as also in the [dialect] Dor. forms καβαίνων, κάπετον.------------------------------------κατά [(B)], -
11 χαρίζω
Aχαριῶ Phld.Rh.1.381
S., Gloss.: [tense] aor. imper.χάρισον PMag.Lond.122.17
:—usu. [voice] Med. [full] χαρίζομαι, [tense] fut.- ιοῦμαι Th.3.40
, 8.65; χαριῇ (v.l. -εῖ ) also in Hdt.1.90; Cret.χαριξίομαι GDI5176.16
(found at Teos); also χαρίξομαι ib.5178.17 (ibid.); χαρίηνται is a false [dialect] Aeol. form in Milet.3 No.152.56; laterχαρίσομαι Ep.Rom. 8.32
, Luc.DDeor.22.4: [tense] aor.ἐχαρισάμην Hdt.1.91
, etc.; opt.χαρίσαιτο Il.6.49
; [dialect] Aeol. imper.χάρισσαι Sapph.Supp.16.4
; Cret. inf.χαρίξασθαι GDI5163b8
([place name] Mylasa):—[voice] Pass. forms, [tense] fut. χαρισθήσομαι in pass. sense, Ep.Philem.22: [tense] aor. ἐχαρίσθην in pass. sense, Act.Ap. 3.14, 1 Ep.Cor.2.12: [tense] pf. κεχάρισμαι in act. sense, ,- ισται Id.Eq.54
; also in pass. sense, imper. : [tense] plpf.ἐκεχάριστο Hdt.8.5
, [dialect] Ep.κεχάριστο Od.6.23
:— say or do something agreeable to a person, show him favour or kindness, oblige, gratify, c. dat. pers., freq. in part.,χαριζομένη πόσεϊ ᾧ Il.5.71
, cf. 11.23, 15.449, Od.8.538,13.265; once in Hes.,ποίησε.. χαριζόμενος Διί Th. 580
;πᾶσι χαριζοίμην ἄν Hdt.6.130
, cf. Th.3.40;τοῖς θεοῖς X.Mem.4.3.16
; Καλλίᾳ χαριζόμενος to oblige, humour him, Pl.Prt. 362a, cf. Men. 75b, Ar.Eq. 1368; of a judge, give a partial verdict,χ. οἷς ἂν δοκῇ αὐτῷ Pl.Ap. 35c
; alsoχ. τῷ ἵππῳ X. Eq.10.12
: abs., make oneself agreeable, comply, opp. ἀντία φάσθαι, once in A., Pers. 700 (lyr.);οἱ ὑπὲρ καιρὸν χαριζόμενοι And.4.7
: c. acc. cogn.,χάριτας χ. E.Fr.360.1
, Isoc.1.31, D.18.239;χ. τι καὶ αὐτός Th.3.42
; with part. added,χαρίζετο ἱερὰ ῥέζων Od. 1.61
, cf. Hdt.1.90, Ar.Ec. 1045, Pl.R. 338a, 426c, etc.: more freq. c. dat. modi, μήτε τί μοι ψεύδεσσι χαρίζεο do not court favour by lies, Od.14.387;χαριζόμενος φιλότητι 10.43
, etc.;λόγῳ θωπεῦσαι καὶ ἔργῳ χ. Pl.Tht. 173a
codd.; opp. τὰ βέλτιστα λέγειν, D.9.2, cf. Plu.2.66a.2 gratify or indulge a humour or passion, once in S., , cf. Antipho 4.3.2, X.An. 7.1.25;ὀργῇ E.Fr.31
; (troch.); ;τῇ ἐπιθυμίᾳ Pl.R. 561c
:τῷ σώματι X.Mem.1.2.23
; τῇ γαστρί ib.2.1.2, Cyr.4.2.39; τῇ ἡδονῇ ib.4.3.2.3 in erotic sense, grant favours to a man, Ar.Ec. 629 (anap.), Pl.Smp. 182a, Phdr. 231c, 256a, X.Mem.3.11.12, etc.: hence of Comedy,ὀλίγοις χαρίσασθαι Ar.Eq. 517
(anap.): c. acc. cogn.,χ. θήλειαν ἀπόλαυσιν Luc.Am. 27
.II c. acc. rei, give graciously or cheerfully,δῶρα Od.24.283
;ἄποινα Il.6.49
, 10.380;χαρίζεσθαί τινί τι Hdt.1.91
, Ar.Ach. 437, Eq.54, X.Cyr.1.4.9, etc.;πωλεῖν καὶ χ. καὶ τέκνοις μεταδιδόναι PGrenf.1.60.45
(vi A. D.); so c. acc. pers.,χαρίζομαί σε τοῖς ὄχλοις PFlor.61.61
(i A.D.): with a strong oxymoron,ξείνια δυσμενέσιν λυγρὰ χ. Archil.7
: c. inf. with Art.,χ. τὸ ποθεῖν Plu.2.609a
; ; without the Art., πολλοῖς ἐχαρίσατο βλέπειν (v.l. τὸ β.) Ev.Luc.7.21; χάρισαι [αὐτοῖς] μένειν allow them to remain, Luc.Am.19, cf. AP5.236 (Agath.); so ἆρ' ἄν τί μοι χαρίσαιο τοιόνδε—μή μου καταγελᾶν; Pl.Hp.Mi. 364c.b χ. τὴν δέησιν grant the request, Luc.Bis Acc.14.c [voice] Pass., c. acc., to be favoured with,ἀνάγκᾳ πνεῦμα χαριζόμενος Epigr.Gr.204.18
([place name] Cnidus).2 c. gen. partit., give freely of a thing,ἀλλοτρίων χ. Od.17.452
; ταμίη.. χαριζομένη παρεόντων giving freely of such things as were ready, 1.140, etc.;παντοίων ἀγαθῶν γαστρὶ χαριζόμενοι Thgn.1000
;γλώσσης μαφιδίοιο χ. παρεοῦσι Theoc.25.188
; προικὸς χαρίζεσθαι, of his bounty, Od.13.15.3 c. acc. pers., give up as a favour, τῇ μητρὶ χ. Ὀκτάβιον, by dropping a law aimed at him, Plu.CG4; but also, by unjust condemnation, Act.Ap.25.11,16; also τῷ θεῷ με ἐχαρίσω, of a dedication ceremony, PBremen49.14 (ii A. D.).III [voice] Pass., esp. in [tense] pf. and [tense] plpf., κεχάριστο θυμῷ was dear to her heart, Od.6.23; τοῖσι Εὐβοεῦσι ἐκεχάριστο the pleasure of the Euboeans was done, Hdt.8.5; ταῦτα μὲν οὖν μνήμῃ κεχαρίσθω let a tribute be paid.. Pl.Phdr. 250c; cf.χάρις A.
V.2 mostly part. [tense] pf. κεχαρισμένος, η, ον, as Adj., acceptable, welcome,ἐμῷ κεχαρισμένε θυμῷ Il.5.243
, 826, etc.; κεχαρισμένα δῶρα θεοῖσι δίδωσι, 20.298, cf. Od.16.184, 19.397; κεχαρισμένα θεῖναί τινι to do things pleasing to one, Il.24.661;ἀνὴρ κεχαρισμένα εἰδώς Od.8.584
;θεοις κεχαρισμένα ποιεῖν Lys.6.33
; κεχ. τοῖς θεοῖς λέγειν τε καὶ πράττειν, Pl.Euthphr. 14b, cf. Phdr. 273e; , cf. Hdt.1.87, 3.119, X.Mem. 1.2.10, etc.;κεχαρισμένα θύρσῳ E.HF 892
(lyr.); (lyr.);πᾶσιν κεχαρισμένος Pl.Sph. 218a
;λόγος κεχ. D.14.1
;σιτίον ἢ ποτόν X.Mem.2.1.24
;ἐν τοῖς μὴ κεχαρισμένοις.. πρὸς τὴν αἴσθησιν Arist.PA 645a7
; cf. κεχαρισμένως.3 later, [comp] Comp.κεχαρισμενώτερος Ael.NA12.7
; [comp] Sup.- ώτατος Alciphr. 3.65
.—Rare in Trag., but freq. in [dialect] Att. Prose. -
12 λόγος
λόγος, ου, ὁ (verbal noun of λέγω in the sense ‘pick’; Hom.+).① a communication whereby the mind finds expression, wordⓐ of utterance, chiefly oral.α. as expression, word (oratorical ability plus exceptional performance were distinguishing marks in Hellenic society, hence the frequent association of λ. and ἔργον ‘deed’; a sim. formulation as early as Il. 9, 443 μύθων τε ῥητῆρʼ ἔμεναι πρηκτῆρά τε ἔργων; Polystrat. p. 33 μὴ λόγῳ μόνον ἀλλʼ ἔργω; Just., A II, 4, 2 ἢ λόγῳ ἢ ἔργῳ and D. 35, 7 λόγον ἢ πρᾶξιν) δυνατὸς ἐν ἔργῳ κ. λόγῳ, i.e. an exceptional personage Lk 24:19; pl. of Moses Ac 7:22 (the contrast expressed w. a verb Choix 20, 6–8 ποιεῖ ἀγαθὸν ὄτι δύναται καὶ λόγῳ καὶ ἔργῳ of Apollordorus, a benefactor in Cyzicus, a flourishing city in Phrygia; sim. New Docs 7, 233, no. 10, 8f πολιτευόμενος … λόγῳ καὶ ἔργῳ; cp. IKourion 32, 8; without contrast Diod S 13, 101, 3 ἄνδρας λόγῳ δυνατούς; for sim. constructions using λέγω and πράσσω s. Danker, Benefactor 339–43). Cp. Ro 15:18; 2 Cor 10:11; Col 3:17; 2 Th 2:17; Hb 13:21 v.l.; 1J 3:18 (cp. Theognis 1, 87f Diehl3 μή μʼ ἔπεσιν μὲν στέργε κτλ.—For the contrast λόγῳ … ἀληθείᾳ cp. Diod S 13, 4, 1). In contrast to a sinful deed we also have the λόγος ἁμαρτίας sinful word Judaicon 172, 9. W. γνῶσις: ἐν παντὶ λόγῳ κ. πάσῃ γνώσει 1 Cor 1:5. ἰδιώτης τῷ λόγῳ, ἀλλʼ οὐ τῇ γνώσει 2 Cor 11:6. (Opp. δύναμις ‘revelation of power’) 1 Cor 4:19, 20. τὸ εὐαγγέλιον οὐκ ἐγενήθη ἐν λόγῳ μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐν δυνάμει 1 Th 1:5 (cp. Ar. 13, 7 of mythical accounts οὐδέν εἰσιν εἰ μὴ μόνον λόγοι ‘they’re nothing but words’). W. ἐπιστολή: 2 Th 2:2, 15. W. ἀναστροφή: 1 Ti 4:12; 1 Pt 3:1b. Opp. ‘be silent’: IRo 2:1.—μόνον εἰπὲ λόγῳ just say the word Mt 8:8; cp. Lk 7:7 (Ath. 17, 1 ὡς λόγῳ εἰπεῖν; 29, 2; Phalaris, Ep. 121, 1 λόγῳ λέγειν; cp. schol. on Pla. 341a ἐν λόγῳ μόνον εἰπεῖν). οὐδεὶς ἐδύνατο ἀποκριθῆναι αὐτῷ λόγον no one was able to answer him a (single) word Mt 22:46; cp. 15:23 (cp. TestAbr A 16 p. 98, 11 [Stone p. 44] οὐκ ἀπεκρίθη αὐτῷ λόγον).— The (mighty) word (of one who performs miracles) ἐξέβαλεν τὰ πνεύματα λόγῳ Mt 8:16 (a rare use of λ. as ‘single utterance’, s. L-S-J-M s.v. VII).—διὰ λόγου by word of mouth (opp. ‘by letter’) Ac 15:27.—In the textually uncertain pass. Ac 20:24 the text as it stands in N., οὐδενὸς λόγου (v.l. λόγον) ποιοῦμαι τὴν ψυχὴν τιμίαν, may well mean: I do not consider my life worth a single word (cp. λόγου ἄξιον [ἄξιος 1a] and our ‘worth mention’; s. Conzelmann ad loc.).β. The expression may take on a variety of formulations or topical nuances: what you say Mt 5:37; statement (PGM 4, 334) Lk 20:20; question (Sext. Emp., Math. 8, 295; 9, 133; Diog. L. 2, 116) ἐρωτήσω ὑμᾶς λόγον I will ask you a question (cp. TestJob 36:5; GrBar 5:1; ApcSed 13:6; Jos., Ant. 12, 99) Mt 21:24; cp. Mk 11:29; Lk 20:3; prayer (PGM 1, 25; 4, 90; 179; 230 al.; 5, 180; 196 al.) Mt 26:44; Mk 14:39. ἡγούμενος τοῦ λ. principal speaker Ac 14:12. W. epexeget. gen. λ. παρακλήσεως 13:15. W. κήρυγμα our manner of presentation and our proclamation 1 Cor 2:4a (but s. comm.). (W. διδασκαλία) preaching 1 Ti 5:17; prophecy (Biogr. p. 364 [Pythia]) J 2:22; 18:32. Command (Aeschyl., Pers. 363) Lk 4:36; 2 Pt 3:5, 7; via a letter 2 Th 3:14. Report, story (X., An. 1, 4, 7; Diod S 3, 40, 9; 19, 110, 1 λ. διαδιδόναι=spread a report; Appian, Iber. 80 §346, Maced. 4 §1 [both=rumor]; Diod S 32, 15, 3 ἦλθεν ὁ λ. ἐπί τινα=the report came to someone; Arrian, Anab. 7, 22, 1 λόγος λέγεται τοιόσδε=a story is told like this, Ind. 9, 2; Diod S 3, 18, 3 λ.=story, account; Jos., Ant. 19, 132; Tat. 27, 2 τοῦ καθʼ Ἡρακλέα λόγου) Mt 28:15; Mk 1:45; Lk 5:15 (λ. περί τινος as X., An. 6, 6, 13; Jos., Ant. 19, 127) 7:17; J 21:23. ἠκούσθη ὁ λόγος εἰς τὰ ὦτα τ. ἐκκλησίας the report came to the ears of the assembly in Jerusalem Ac 11:22. λόγον ἔχειν σοφίας have the appearance of wisdom, pass for wisdom Col 2:23 (cp. Pla., Epinomis 987b ἔχει λόγον; Demosth., C. Lept. 462 [20, 18] λόγον τινʼ ἔχον; but mng. 2f is possible). Proverb (Pla., Phdr. 17, 240c, Symp. 18, 195b, Gorg. 54, 499c, Leg. 6, 5, 757a; Socrat., Ep. 22, 1) J 4:37 (Ps.-Callisth. 1, 13, 7 ἀληθῶς ἐν τούτῳ ὁ λ. foll. by a proverb). Proclamation, instruction, teaching, message Lk 4:32; 10:39; J 4:41; 17:20; Ac 2:41; 4:4; 10:44; 20:7; 1 Cor 1:17; 2:1. In Ac18:15 ζητήματα περὶ λόγου καὶ ὀνομάτων καὶ νόμου the sense appears to be someth. like this: controversial issues involving disputes about words and your way of life with λ. prob. referring to the presentation of controversial subjects, which in turn arouses heated ζητήματα debates. λόγος σοφίας proclamation of wisdom, speaking wisely 1 Cor 12:8a (Ps.-Phoc. 129 τῆς θεοπνεύστου σοφίης λ.); corresp. λ. γνώσεως vs. 8b. Cp. 14:9; 15:2; 2 Cor 1:18; 6:7; 10:10. λ. μαρτυρίας word of witness Rv 12:11. ὁ κατὰ τ. διδαχὴν πιστὸς λ. the message of faith, corresponding to the teaching Tit 1:9; the opp. 2 Ti 2:17. A speech (Aristot. p. 14b, 2; Diod S 40, 5a) διὰ λόγου πολλοῦ in a long speech Ac 15:32; cp. 20:2. λ. κολακείας flattering speech 1 Th 2:5. Speaking gener. 2 Cor 8:7; Eph 6:19; Col 4:6; D 2:5. ἐν λόγῳ πταίειν make a mistake in what one says Js 3:2.—Of God’s word, command, commission (LXX; ParJer 5:19 κατηχῆσαι αὐτοὺς τὸν λόγον; SyrBar 13:2; ApcSed 14:10; Just., D. 84, 2; Ael. Aristid. hears a ἱερὸς λ. at night fr. a god: 28, 116 K.=49, p. 529 D.; Sextus 24) ἠκυρώσατε τ. λόγον τοῦ θεοῦ Mt 15:6 (v.l. νόμον, ἐντολήν); cp. Mk 7:13.—J 5:38; 8:55; 10:35; Ro 3:4 (Ps 50:6). Of God’s promise Ro 9:6, 9 (but these two vss., and Gal 5:14 below, prob. fit better under 2a), 28 (Is 10:22f). Cp. Hb 2:2; 4:2 (s. ἀκοή 4b); 7:28; 12:19. For B 15:1 see 1aδ. The whole law (as the expr. εἴ τι ἑτέρα ἐντολή indicates not limited to a narrow list of commandments), acc. to Ro 13:9. In what is prob. a play on words (s. 2a and b), Gal 5:14 (s. 2a below) is summed up in the λόγος as expressed in Lev 19:18.—That which God has created ἁγιάζεται διὰ λόγου θεοῦ 1 Ti 4:5; in line w. the context, this hardly refers to God’s creative word (so SibOr 3, 20; PtK 2; πάντα γὰρ λόγῳ ποιήσας ὁ θεός Theoph. Ant. 2, 18 [144, 8]), but to table prayers which use biblical expressions. The divine word as judge of thoughts Hb 4:12. τελεσθήσονται οἱ λ. τοῦ θεοῦ Ac 17:17; cp. 19:9.—Of the divine revelation through Christ and his messengers (Just., A I, 61, 9 λόγον … παρὰ τῶν ἀποστόλων ἐμάθομεν τοῦτον) θεὸς ἐφανέρωσεν τὸν λ. αὐτοῦ ἐν κηρύγματι Tit 1:3. δέδωκα αὐτοῖς τὸν λ. σου J 17:14; cp. vss. 6, 17; 1J 1:10; 2:14. ἵνα μὴ ὁ λ. τοῦ θεοῦ βλασφημῆται Tit 2:5. The apostles and other preachers, w. ref. to the λόγος of God, are said to: λαλεῖν Ac 4:29, 31; 13:46; Phil 1:14; Hb 13:7; καταγγέλλειν Ac 13:5; 17:13; διδάσκειν 18:11; μαρτυρεῖν Rv 1:2. Of their hearers it is said: τὸν λ. τοῦ θεοῦ ἀκούειν Ac 13:7; δέχεσθαι 8:14; 11:1. Of the λ. τοῦ θεοῦ itself we read: ηὔξανεν Ac 6:7; 12:24; 19:20; οὐ δέδεται 2 Ti 2:9. In these places and many others ὁ λόγος τοῦ θεοῦ is simply the Christian message, the gospel: Lk 5:1; 8:11, 21; 11:28 (Simplicius in Epict. p. 1, 20 μὴ μόνον ἀκουόντων ἀλλὰ πασχόντων καὶ ὑπὸ τῶν λόγων=let the message have its effect on oneself); Ac 6:2 (s. καταλείπω 7c; for prob. commercial metaph. s. 2a below); 13:44 v.l. (for κυρίου); 16:32 v.l.; 1 Cor 14:36; 2 Cor 2:17; 4:2; Col 1:25; 1 Pt 1:23; Rv 1:9; 6:9; 20:4; IPhld 11:1. Cp. 1 Th 2:13ab; 1J 2:5.—Since this ‘divine word’ is brought to humanity through Christ, his word can be used in the same sense: ὁ λόγος μου J 5:24; cp. 8:31, 37, 43, 51f; 12:48; 14:23f; 15:3, 20b; Rv 3:8. ὁ λόγος τοῦ Χριστοῦ Col 3:16; cp. Hb 6:1. ὁ λ. τοῦ κυρίου Ac 8:25; 12:24 v.l.; 13:44, 48f; 14:25 v.l.; 15:35, 36; 16:32 (cp. λ. θεοῦ); 19:10; 1 Th 1:8; 2 Th 3:1. Pl. Mk 8:38 (Lk 9:26); 1 Ti 6:3; cp. Lk 24:44; s. also 1aδ.—Or it is called simply ὁ λόγος=the ‘Word’, for no misunderstanding would be possible among Christians: Mt 13:20–23; Mk 2:2; 4:14–20, 33; 8:32 (s. 1aε below); 16:20; Lk 1:2; 8:12f, 15; Ac 6:4; 8:4; 10:36 (on the syntax s. FNeirynck, ETL 60, ’84, 118–23); 11:19; 14:25 (cp. λ. κυρίου above); 16:6; 17:11; 18:5; Gal 6:6; Phil 1:14; Col 4:3; 1 Th 1:6; 2 Ti 4:2; Js 1:21ff; 1 Pt 2:8; 3:1; 1J 2:7; AcPl Ha 7, 6 (so also Mel., HE 4, 26, 13; Ath. 2, 3).—Somet. the ‘Word’ is more closely defined by a gen.: ὁ λ. τῆς βασιλείας the word of the reign/rule (of God) Mt 13:19. τῆς σωτηρίας Ac 13:26. τῆς καταλλαγῆς 2 Cor 5:19. τοῦ σταυροῦ 1 Cor 1:18. δικαιοσύνης (q.v. 3a) Hb 5:13. ζωῆς Phil 2:16. (τῆς) ἀληθείας (Theoph. Ant. 3, 4 [p. 212, 2]; cp. περὶ ἀληθείας Hippol., Ref. 10, 6, 1) Eph 1:13; Col 1:5; 2 Ti 2:15; Js 1:18; AcPl Ha 8, 8 (Just., D. 121, 2). τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ (=τοῦ κυρίου) Ac 14:3; 20:32. (Differently the pl. οἱ λόγοι τ. χάριτος gracious words Lk 4:22; cp. Marcellinus, Vi. Thu. 57 Hude λόγοι εἰρωνείας.) ὁ λ. τοῦ εὐαγγελίου Ac 15:7; ὁ τοῦ Χριστιανισμοῦ λ. MPol 10:1. In Rv 3:10 the gospel is described by the ‘One who has the key of David’ as ὁ λ. τῆς ὑπομονῆς μου my word of endurance (W-S. §30, 12c). λ. τῶν ὑ[πο]μονῶν AcPl Ha 6, 11. παρελάβετε τὸν λ. ὅτι AcPl Ha 8, 25.—The pastoral letters favor the expr. πιστὸς ὁ λόγος (sc. ἐστίν, and s. πιστός 1b) 1 Ti 1:15; 3:1; 4:9; 2 Ti 2:11; Tit 3:8; cp. Rv 21:5; 22:6. λ. ὑγιής sound preaching Tit 2:8; cp. the pl. ὑγιαίνοντες λόγοι 2 Ti 1:13 (on medicinal use of words for the mind or soul s. VLeinieks, The City of Dionysos ’96, 115–22, on Eur.).—The pl. is also used gener. of Christian teachings, the words of the gospel Lk 1:4 (s. κατηχέω 2a); 1 Th 4:18. οἱ λ. τῆς πίστεως 1 Ti 4:6. On λόγοι κυριακοί for λόγια κυριακά in the title of the Papias document s. ἐξήγησις 2.—JSchniewind, Die Begriffe Wort und Evangelium bei Pls, diss. Bonn 1910; RAsting (εὐαγγέλιον, end).γ. of an individual declaration or remark: assertion, declaration, speech ἀκούσαντες τὸν λ. when they heard the statement Mt 15:12; cp. 19:11, 22; 22:15; Mk 5:36. διὰ τοῦτον τὸν λ. because of this statement of yours 7:29 (TestAbr A 15 p. 95, 29 [Stone p. 38] τὸν λ. τοῦτον; ApcMos 25 εἰς τὸν λόγον σου κρινῶ σε). Cp. 10:22; 12:13; Lk 1:29; 22:61 v.l. (for ῥήματος); J 4:39, 50; 6:60; 7:36, 40 v.l.; 15:20a; 18:9; 19:8; Ac 6:5; 7:29; 20:38; 22:22; 1 Th 4:15. ὸ̔ς ἐὰν εἴπῃ λόγον κατὰ τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου whoever utters a (defamatory) word against the Son of Humanity Mt 12:32 (λ. εἰπεῖν κατά τινος as Jos., Ant. 15, 81); cp. Lk 12:10. λόγος σαπρός unwholesome talk Eph 4:29. λόγον ποιεῖσθαι make a speech Ac 11:2 D (cp. Hyperid. 3, 20; Jos., Ant. 11, 86).δ. the pl. (οἱ) λόγοι is used, on the one hand, of words uttered on various occasions, of speeches or instruction given here and there by humans or transcendent beings (TestAbr A 14 p. 94, 19 [Stone p. 36]; Jos., Ant. 4, 264; Just., D. 100, 3) ἐκ τῶν λόγων σου δικαιωθήσῃ (καταδικασθήσῃ) Mt 12:37ab; 24:35; Mk 13:31; Lk 21:33; Ac 2:40; 7:22 (ἐν λόγοις καὶ ἔργοις αὐτοῦ. On the word-deed pair cp. Dio Chrys. 4, 6 the λόγοι and ἔργα of Diogenes; s. α above). οἱ δέκα λόγοι the ten commandments (Ex 34:28; Dt 10:4; Philo, Rer. Div. Her. 168, Decal. 32; Jos., Ant. 3, 138; cp. 91f; Did., Gen. 36, 10) B 15:1. Ac 15:24; 20:35; 1 Cor 2:4b, 13; 14:19ab; κενοὶ λ. Eph 5:6; AcPl Ox 6, 13 (cp. Aa 1, 241, 14); Dg 8:2; πλαστοὶ λ. 2 Pt 2:3. λ. πονηροί 3J 10.—Also of words and exprs. that form a unity, whether it be connected discourse (Jos., Ant. 15, 126; Just., A II, 12, 6, D. 11, 5; 81, 3 al.), a conversation, or parts of one and the same teaching, or expositions on the same subject (Diod S 16, 2, 3 μετέσχε τῶν Πυθαγορίων λόγων; Dio Chrys. 37 [54], 1; Ael. Aristid. 50, 55 K.=26 p. 519 D.: οἱ Πλάτωνος λόγοι; PsSol 17:43 [words of the Messiah]; AscIs 3:12 οἱ λόγοι τοῦ Βελχειρά) πᾶς ὅστις ἀκούει μου τοὺς λόγους τούτους Mt 7:24; cp. vss. 26, 28; 10:14; 19:1; 26:1; Mk 10:24; Lk 1:20; 6:47; 9:28, 44. ἐπηρώτα αὐτὸν ἐν λόγοις ἱκανοῖς he questioned him at some length 23:9. τίνες οἱ λ. οὗτοι οὓς ἀντιβάλλετε; what is this conversation that you are holding? 24:17; J 7:40 (s. γ); 10:19; J 14:24a; 19:13; Ac 2:22; 5:5, 24; 16:36; 2 Ti 4:15; 1 Cl 13:1; 46:7. λόγοις φθοριμαίοις AcPlCor 1:2.ε. the subject under discussion, matter, thing gener. (Theognis 1055 Diehl; Hdt. 8, 65 μηδενὶ ἄλλῳ τὸν λόγον τοῦτον εἴπῃς. Cp. Hebr. דָּבָר) τὸν λ. ἐκράτησαν they took up the subject Mk 9:10; cp. Mt. 21:24 (s. 1aβ beg.). οὐκ ἔστιν σοι μερὶς ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ you have no share in this matter Ac 8:21. ἰδεῖν περὶ τ. λόγου τούτου look into this matter 15:6. ἔχειν πρός τινα λόγον have a complaint against someone (cp. Demosth. 35, 55 ἐμοὶ πρὸς τούτους ὁ λόγος; PIand 16, 3 δίκαιον λόγον ἔχει πρὸς σέ) 19:38. παρεκτὸς λόγου πορνείας Mt 5:32; 19:9 v.l. (2d is also prob.).—Perh. also Mk 8:32 he discussed the subject quite freely (but s. 1aβ above).ⓑ of literary or oratorical productions: of the separate books of a work (Hdt. 5, 36 ἐν τῷ πρώτῳ τ. λόγων; Pla., Parmen. 2, 127d ὁ πρῶτος λόγος; Philo, Omn. Prob. Lib. 1 ὁ μὲν πρότερος λόγος ἦν ἡμῖν, ὦ Θεόδοτε, περὶ τοῦ …) treatise Ac 1:1 (s. on the prologue to Ac: AHilgenfeld, ZWT 41, 1898, 619ff; AGercke, Her 29, 1894, 373ff; RLaqueur, Her 46, 1911, 161ff; Norden, Agn. Th. 311ff; JCreed, JTS 35, ’34, 176–82; Goodsp., Probs. 119–21). Παπίας … πέντε λόγους κυριακῶν λογίων ἔγραψεν Papias (11:1; cp. 3:1 e; 11:2; 12:2).—περὶ οὗ πολὺς ἡμῖν ὁ λόγος about this we have much to say Hb 5:11. Hb is described as ὁ λ. τῆς παρακλήσεως a word of exhortation (in literary form) 13:22. Of writings that are part of Holy Scripture ὁ λ. Ἠσαί̈ου J 12:38. ὁ λ. ὁ ἐν τῷ νόμῳ γεγραμμένος 15:25; ὁ προφητικὸς λ. 2 Pt 1:19; 2 Cl 11:2 (quot. of unknown orig.); AcPl Ha 8, 27/BMM recto 35 (Just., D. 77, 2 al.). ὁ ἅγιος λ. the holy word 1 Cl 56:3. ὁ λ. ὁ γεγραμμένος 1 Cor 15:54 (Is 25:8 and Hos 13:14 follow). Pl. οἱ λόγοι τ. προφητῶν Ac 15:15. ὡς γέγραπται ἐν βίβλῳ λόγων Ἠσαί̈ου Lk 3:4 (Pla., 7th Epistle 335a πείθεσθαι ἀεὶ χρὴ τοῖς παλαιοῖς καὶ ἱεροῖς λόγοις; TestJob 1:1 βίβλος λόγων Ἰώβ; ParJer 9:32 v.l. τὰ λοιπὰ τῶν λόγων Ἱερεμίου; ApcEsdr 1:1 καὶ ἀποκάλυψις τοῦ … Ἐσδράμ; ApcSed prol.; Just., D. 72, 3f).—Of the content of Rv: ὁ ἀναγινώσκων τ. λόγους τῆς προφητείας 1:3. οἱ λόγοι (τ. προφητείας) τ. βιβλίου τούτου 22:7, 9f, 18f.② computation, reckoningⓐ a formal accounting, esp. of one’s actions, and freq. with fig. extension of commercial terminology account, accounts, reckoning λόγον δοῦναι (Hdt. 8, 100; X., Cyr. 1, 4, 3; Diod S 3, 46, 4; SIG 1099, 16; BGU 164, 21; Jos., Ant. 16, 120; Just., D. 115, 6) give account, make an accounting ἕκαστος περὶ ἑαυτοῦ λόγον δώσει τ. θεῷ Ro 14:12. Also λ. ἀποδοῦναι abs. (Just., D. 116, 1 al.; Diod S 16, 56, 4; 19, 9, 4) Hb 13:17. τινί to someone (Diod S 16, 27, 4; Plut., Alcib. 7, 3; Chariton 7, 6, 2; SIG 631, 13 τᾷ πόλει; 2 Ch 34:28; Da 6:3 Theod.; Jos., Bell. 1, 209) τῷ ἑτοίμως ἔχοντι κρῖναι 1 Pt 4:5. τινὸς of someth. (SIG 1044, 46; 1105, 10 τοῦ ἀναλώματος; Jos., Ant. 19, 307) Lk 16:2 (here λ. w. the art.; on the subject of undergoing an audit cp. Aeschin. 3, 22). Likew. περί τινος (Diod S 18, 60, 2 δοὺς αὑτῷ περὶ τούτων λόγον=taking account [considering] with himself; BGU 98, 25 περὶ τούτου) Mt 12:36; Ac 19:40. ὑπέρ τινος concerning someone Hv 3, 9, 10.—αἰτεῖν τινα λόγον περί τινος call someone to account for someth. 1 Pt 3:15 (cp. Pla., Pol. 285e; Dio Chrys. 20 [37], 30; Apc4Esdr Fgm. b ἕκαστος ὑπὸ τοῦ οἰκείου ἔργου τὸν λόγον ἀπαιτηθήσεται; Just., A I, 17, 4. For another perspective s. d below.).—Of banking responsibility ὁ λόγος τοῦ θεοῦ (PStras 72, 10 [III A.D.] ὁ τῶν θεῶν λ.; PHerm 108 [III A.D.] λ. τοῦ Σαραπείου) in wordplay Ac 6:2 (w. τράπεζα q.v. 1c); s. also 1aβ.—Of a ledger heading (POxy 1333 [II/III A.D.] δὸς αὐτῳ λόγῳ θεωρικῶν=credit him under ‘festivals’; for others s. Preisig., Wörterbuch s.v. λ. 14; s. also Fachwörter 119) Ro 9:6 (the point is that God’s ‘list’ of Israelites is accurate; on ἐκπίπτω in the sense ‘is not deficient’ s. s.v. 4); vs. 9 (the ‘count’ is subsumed by metonymy in divine promise); Gal 5:14 (all moral obligations come under one ‘entry’: ‘you shall love your neighbor as yourself’; for commercial association of ἀναλίσκω vs. 15, which rounds out the wordplay, s. s.v.). The contexts of these three passages suggest strong probability for commercial associations; for another view s. 1aβ.ⓑ settlement (of an account) (εἰς λόγον commercial t.t. ‘in settlement of an account’ POxy 275, 19; 21) εἰς λόγον δόσεως κ. λήμψεως in settlement of a mutual account (lit., ‘of giving and receiving’, ‘of debit and credit’) Phil 4:15 (cp. Plut., Mor. 11b λόγον δοῦναι καὶ λαβεῖν; a parallel formulation POxy 1134,10 [421 A.D.] λ. λήμματος καὶ ἐξοδιασμοῦ=ledger of income and expenditures); for the linked accounting terms δόσις and λήμψις s. PCairMasp 151, 208 [VI A.D.]. The same ideas are in the background of εἰς λόγον ὑμῶν credited to your account vs 17.—συναίρειν λόγον settle accounts (BGU 775, 18f. The mid. in the same mng. PFay109, 6 [I A.D.]; POxy 113, 27f.—Dssm., LO 94 [LAE 118f]) μετά τινος Mt 18:23; 25:19.ⓒ reflection, respect, regard εἰς λόγον τινός with regard to, for the sake of (Thu. 3, 46, 4; Demosth. 19, 142 εἰς ἀρετῆς λόγον; Polyb. 11, 28, 8; Ath. 31, 1; Ael. Aristid. 39 p. 743 D.: εἰς δεινότητος λ.) εἰς λ. τιμῆς IPhld 11:2. εἰς λ. θεοῦ ISm 10:1.ⓓ reason for or cause of someth., reason, ground, motive (Just., D. 94, 3 δότε μοι λόγον, ὅτου χάριν … ; Ath. 30, 3 τὶς γὰρ … λόγος; Dio Chrys. 64 [14], 18 ἐκ τούτου τ. λόγου; Appian, Hann. 29 §126 τῷ αὐτῷ λόγῳ; Iambl., Vi. Pyth. 28, 155) τίνι λόγω; for what reason? Ac 10:29 (cp. Pla., Gorg. 512c τίνι δικαίῳ λ.; Appian, Mithrid. 57 §232 τίνι λόγῳ;). λόγον περὶ τῆς ἐν ὑμῖν ἐλπίδος 1 Pt 3:15 (but s. a above); κατὰ λόγον Ac 18:14 (s. κατά B 5bβ). παρεκτὸς λόγου πορνείας Mt 5:32; 19:9 v.l. (though 1aε is also poss.).ⓔ πρὸς ὸ̔ν ἡμῖν ὁ λόγος (ἐστίν) with whom we have to do (i.e. to reckon) (Dio Chrys. 31, 123; other exx. in FBleek, Hb II/1, 1836, 590ff), in his capacity as judge (Libanius, Legat. Ulixis [=Declamatio IV] 2 F. τοῖς δὲ ἀδίκως ἀποκτενοῦσι καὶ πρὸς θεοὺς καὶ πρὸς ἀνθρώπους ὁ λόγος γίγνεται) Hb 4:13. οὐ πρὸς σάρκα ὁ λόγος, ἀλλὰ πρὸς θεόν he has to do not with flesh, but with God IMg 3:2.ⓕ In Col 2:23 (s. 1aβ) λόγον μὲν ἔχοντα σοφίας may= make a case for wisdom (cp. λόγος ἡμῖν οὐδείς Plut., Mor. 870b).③ the independent personified expression of God, the Logos. Our lit. shows traces of a way of thinking that was widespread in contemporary syncretism, as well as in Jewish wisdom lit. and Philo, the most prominent feature of which is the concept of the Logos, the independent, personified ‘Word’ (of God): GJs 11:2 (word of the angel to Mary) συνλήμψῃ ἐκ Λόγου αὐτοῦ (sc. τοῦ πάντων Δεσπότου). J 1:1abc, 14 (cp. Just., A I, 23, 2; Mel., P. 9, 61 and oft. by all apolog., exc.. Ar.). It is the distinctive teaching of the Fourth Gospel that this divine ‘Word’ took on human form in a historical person, that is, in Jesus (s. RSeeberg, Festgabe für AvHarnack ’21, 263–81.—Λόγος w. ζωή in gnostic speculation: Iren.1, 1, 1 [Harv. 1, 10, 4]; Aelian, VH 4, 20 ἐκάλουν τὸν Πρωταγόραν Λόγον. Similarly Favorinus [II A.D.]: Vorsokr. 80 A 1 ln. 22 [in Diog. L. 9, 50] of Democritus: ἐκαλεῖτο Σοφία. Equating a divinity with an abstraction that she personifies: Artem. 5, 18 φρόνησις εἶναι νομίζεται ἡ θεός [Athena]). Cp. 1J 1:1; Rv 19:13. εἷς θεός ἐστιν, ὁ φανερώσας ἑαυτὸν διὰ Ἰ. Χριστοῦ τοῦ υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ, ὅς ἐστιν αὐτοῦ λόγος, ἀπὸ σιγῆς προελθών there is one God, who has revealed himself through Jesus Christ his Son, who is his ‘Word’ proceeding from silence (i.e., without an oral pronouncement: in a transcendent manner) IMg 8:2 (s. σιγή). The Lord as νόμος κ. λόγος PtK 1. Cp. Dg 11:2, 3, 7, 8; 12:9.—HClavier, TManson memorial vol., ’59, 81–93: the Alexandrian eternal λόγος is also implied in Hb 4:12; 13:7.—S. also the ‘Comma Johanneum’ (to the bibliography in RGG3 I, ’54 [HGreeven] add AJülicher, GGA 1905, 930–35; AvHarnack, SBBerlAk 1915, 572f [=Studien I ’31, 151f]; MMeinertz, Einl. in d. NT4 ’33, 309–11; AGreiff, TQ 114, ’33, 465–80; CDodd, The Joh. Epistles ’46; WThiele, ZNW 50, ’59, 61–73) ὁ πατήρ, ὁ λόγος καὶ τὸ ἅγιον πνεῦμα 1J 5:7 v.l. (s. N. app.; Borger, TRu 52, ’87, 57f). (Such interpolations were not unheard of. According to Diog. L. 1, 48 some people maintain that Solon inserted the verse mentioning the Athenians after Il. 2, 557.—τῆς τριάδος, τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ τοῦ λόγου αὐτοῦ καὶ τῆς σοφίας αὐτοῦ Theoph. Ant. 2, 15 [p. 138, 19].)—On the Logos: EZeller, D. Philosophie der Griechen III 24 1903, 417–34; MHeinze, D. Lehre v. Logos in d. griech. Philosophie 1872; PWendland, Philo u. d. kynisch-stoische Diatribe (Beiträge z. Gesch. der griech. Philosophie u. Religion by Wendl. and OKern 1895, 1–75); AAall, Gesch. d. Logosidee 1896, 1899; MPohlenz, D. Stoa ’48f, I 482; 490 (index); LDürr, D. Wertung des göttl. Wortes im AT u. im ant. Orient ’38 (§9 of the Joh. Logos); EBréhier, Les idées philosophiques et religieuses de Philon d’Alexandrie 1907, 83–111; (2 ’25); JLebreton, Les théories du Logos au début de l’ère chrétienne 1907; ESchwartz, NGG 1908, 537–56; GVos, The Range of the Logos-Title in the Prologue of the Fourth Gospel: PTR 11, 1913, 365–419; 557–602; RHarris, The Origin of the Prologue to St. John’s Gospel 1917, Athena, Sophia and the Logos: BJRL 7, 1, 1922 p. 56–72; M-JLagrange, Vers le Logos de S. Jean: RB 32, 1923, 161–84, Le Logos de Philon: ibid. 321–71; HLeisegang, Logos: Pauly-W. XIII 1926, 1035–81; TGlasson, Heraclitus’ Alleged Logos Doctr., JTS 3, ’52, 231–38.—NWeinstein, Z. Genesis d. Agada 1901, 29–90; Billerb. II 302–33.—Rtzst., Zwei religionsgeschichtl. Fragen 1901, 47–132, Mysterienrel.3 1927, 428 index; WBousset, Kyrios Christos2 1921, 304ff; 316f; JKroll, D. Lehren d. Hermes Trismegistos1914, 418 index.—RBultmann, D. religionsgesch. Hintergrund des Prol. z. Joh.: HGunkel Festschr., 1923, II 1–26, Comm. ’41, 5ff; AAlexander, The Johannine Doctrine of the Logos: ET 36, 1925, 394–99; 467–72; (Rtzst. and) HSchaeder, Studien z. antiken Synkretismus 1926, 306–37; 350; GAvdBerghvanEysinga, In den beginne was de Logos: NThT 23, ’34, 105–23; JDillersberger, Das Wort von Logos ’35; RBury, The 4th Gosp. and the Logos-Doctrine ’40; EMay, CBQ 8, ’46, 438–47; GKnight, From Moses to Paul ’49, 120–29. TW IV 76–89; 126–40 (on this s. SLyonnet, Biblica 26, ’45, 126–31); CStange, ZST 21, ’50, 120–41; MBoismard, Le Prologue de St. Jean ’53; HLangkammer, BZ 9, ’65, 91–94; HRinggren, Word and Wisdom [hypostatization in Near East] ’47; WEltester, Haenchen Festschr., ’64, 109–34; HWeiss, Untersuchungen zur Kosmologie etc., TU 97, ’66, 216–82; MRissi, Die Logoslieder im Prolog des vierten Evangeliums, TZ 31, ’75, 321–36; HLausberg, NAWG, Ph. ’87, 1 pp. 1–7.—B. 1262. DELG s.v. λέγω B 1. M-M. EDNT. TW. -
13 Πέτρος
Πέτρος, ου, ὁ (ὁ πέτρος=‘stone’ Hom.+; Jos., Bell. 3, 240, Ant. 7, 142.—Π. as a name can scarcely be pre-Christian, as AMerx, D. vier kanon. Ev. II/1, 1902, 160ff, referring to Jos., Ant. 18, 156 [Niese did not accept the v.l. Πέτρος for Πρῶτος], would have it. But s. ADell [πέτρα 1b] esp. 14–17. Fr. the beginning it was prob. thought of as the Gk. equivalent of the Aram. כֵּיפָא= Κηφᾶς: J 1:42; cp. Mt 16:18 and JWackernagel, Syntax II2 1928, 14f, perh. formed on the analogy of the Gk. male proper name Πέτρων: UPZ 149, 8 [III B.C.]; 135 [78 B.C.]; Plut., Mor. 422d.—A gentile named Πέτρος in Damasc., Vi. Isid. 170. S. also the Praeses Arabiae of 278/79 A.D. Aurelius P.: Publ. Princeton Univ. Arch. Expedition to Syria III A, 1913, 4 no. 546) Peter, surname of the head of the circle of Twelve Disciples, whose name was orig. Simon. His father was a certain John (s. Ἰωάννης 4) or Jonah (s. Ἰωνᾶς 2). Acc. to J 1:44 he himself was from Bethsaida, but, at any rate, when he met Jesus he lived in Capernaum (Mk 1:21, 29). Fr. that city he and his brother Andrew made their living as fishers (Mk 1:16). He was married (Mk 1:30; cp. 1 Cor 9:5), but left his home and occupation, when Jesus called, to follow him (Mk 1:18; 10:28). He belonged to the three or four most intimate of the Master’s companions (Mk 5:37; 9:2; 13:3; 14:33). He stands at the head of the lists of the apostles (Mt 10:2; Mk 3:16; Lk 6:14; Ac 1:13). Not all the problems connected w. the conferring of the name Cephas-Peter upon Simon (s. Σίμων 1) have yet been solved (the giving of a new name and the reason for it: Plato [s. ὀνομάζω 1] and Theophrastus [Vi. Platonis 2 ln. 21 in Biog. p. 388 W.= Prolegom. 1 in CHermann, Pla. VI 196 Θεόφραστος, Τύρταμος καλούμενος πάλαι, διὰ τὸ θεῖον τῆς φράσεως Θ. μετεκλήθη]; CRoth, Simon-Peter HTR 54, ’61, 91–97). He was at least not always a model of rock-like (πέτρος is a symbol of imperturbability Soph., Oed. Rex 334; Eur., Med. 28 al.) firmness (note Gethsemane, the denial, the unsuccessful attempt at walking on water; his conduct at Antioch Gal 2:11ff which, though, is fr. time to time referred to another Cephas; s. KLake, HTR 14, 1921, 95ff; AVöllmecke, Jahrbuch d. Missionshauses St. Gabriel 2, 1925, 69–104; 3, 1926, 31–75; DRiddle, JBL 59, ’40, 169–80; NHuffman, ibid. 64, ’45, 205f; PGaechter, ZKT 72, ’50, 177–212; but s. HBetz, Gal [Hermeneia] p. 105f w. n. 442). Despite all this he was the leader of Jesus’ disciples, was spokesman for the Twelve (e.g. Mt 18:21; 19:27; Mk 8:27ff; Lk 12:41; 18:28) and for the three who were closest to Jesus (Mk 9:5); he was recognized as leader even by those on the outside (Mt 17:24). He is especially prominent in the pronouncement made Mt 16:18. Only in the Fourth Gospel does Peter have a place less prominent than another, in this case the ‘disciple whom Jesus loved’ (s. Hdb. exc. on J 13:23). In connection w. the miraculous events after Jesus’ death (on this ELohmeyer, Galiläa u. Jerusalem ’36; WMichaelis, D. Erscheinungen d. Auferstanden-en ’44; MWerner, D. ntl. Berichte üb. d. Erscheinungen d. Auferstandenen: Schweiz. Theol. Umschau ’44) Pt. played a unique role: 1 Cor 15:5; Lk 24:34; Mk 16:7. He was one of the pillars of the early church (Gal 2:9 [Κηφᾶς]). Three years after Paul was converted, on his first journey to Jerusalem as a Christian, he established a significant contact w. Peter: Gal 1:18. At least until the time described in Gal 2:1–10 (cp. Ac 15:7) he was prob. the head of the early Christian community/church. He was also active as a missionary to Israel Gal 2:8; cp. 1 Cor 9:5 (Κηφᾶς).—MGoguel, L’apôtre Pierre a-t-il joué un role personnel dans les crises de Grèce et de Galatie?: RHPR 14, ’34, 461–500.—In 1 Pt 1:1 and 2 Pt 1:1 he appears as author of an epistle. On Paul’s journey to Rome: Ἀρτέμων ὁ κυβερνήτης τοῦ πλοίου ἦν λελουμένος ὑπὸ Πέτρου Artemon, the ship’s captain, was baptized by Peter AcPl Ha 7, 20. It is probable that he died at Rome under Nero, about 64 A.D..—In the NT he is somet. called Σίμων (q.v. 1; in Ac 15:14 and 2 Pt 1:1 more exactly Συμεών=שִׁמְעוֹן); except for Gal 2:7f Paul always calls him Κηφᾶς (q.v.). Both names Σίμων Π. Mt 16:16; Lk 5:8; J 1:40; 6:8, 68; 13:6, 9, 24, 36; 18:10, 15, 25; 20:2, 6; 21:2f, 7b, 11, 15. Σίμων ὁ λεγόμενος Π. Mt 4:18; 10:2. Σίμων ὁ ἐπικαλούμενος Π. Ac 10:18; 11:13. Σίμων ὸ̔ς ἐπικαλεῖται Π. 10:5, 32.—Outside the NT it is found in our lit. GEb 34, 59; GPt 14:60 (Σίμων Πέτρος); ApcPt Rainer; GMary 463 (2 times); AcPt Ox 849 (4 times); 1 Cl 5:4 (Paul follows in 5:5); 2 Cl 5:3f (a piece fr. an apocr. gosp.); IRo 4:3 (Πέτρος καὶ Παῦλος); ISm 3:2=GHb 356, 39; Papias (2:4, w. other disciples; 15, w. Mark as his ἑρμηνευτής).—Zahn, Einl. II §38–44; KErbes, Petrus nicht in Rom, sondern in Jerusalem gestorben: ZKG 22, 1901, 1ff; 161ff (against him AKneller, ZKT 26, 1902, 33ff; 225ff; 351ff); PSchmiedel, War der Ap. Petrus in Rom?: PM 13, 1909, 59–81; HLietzmann, Petrus u. Pls in Rom2 1927; GEsser, Der hl. Ap. Petrus 1902; CGuignebert, La primauté de St. Pierre et la venue de Pierre à Rome 1909; FFoakes-Jackson, Peter, Prince of Apostles 1927; HDannenbauer, D. röm. Pt-Legende: Hist. Ztschr. 146, ’32, 239–62; 159, ’38, 81–88; KHeussi, War Pt. in Rom? ’36, War Pt. wirklich röm. Märtyrer? ’37, Neues z. Pt.-frage ’39, TLZ 77, ’52, 67–72; HLietzmann, Pt. röm. Märt.: SBBerlAk ’36, XXIX; DRobinson, JBL 64, ’45, 255–67; HSchmutz, Pt. war dennoch in Rom: Benedikt. Monatsschr. 22, ’46, 128–41.—On Mt 16:17–19 s., in addition to the lit. on κλείς 1 and πέτρα 1b: JSchnitzer, Hat Jesus das Papsttum gestiftet? 1910, Das Papsttum eine Stiftung Jesu? 1910; FTillmann, Jesus u. das Papsttum 1910; AKneller, ZKT 44, 1920, 147–69; OLinton, D. Problem der Urkirche ’32, 157–83; KPieper, Jes. u. d. Kirche ’32; AEhrhard, Urkirche u. Frühkatholizismus I 1, ’36.—JMunck, Pt. u. Pls in der Offenb. Joh. ’50 (Rv 11:3–13).—OCullmann, Petrus2, ’60 (Eng. tr. Peter, FFilson2, ’62), L’apôtre Pierre: NT Essays (TManson memorial vol.), ’59, 94–105; OKarrer, Peter and the Church: an examination of the Cullmann thesis, ’63; RO’Callaghan, Vatican Excavations and the Tomb of Peter: BA 16, ’53, 70–87; AvGerkan, D. Forschung nach dem Grab Petri, ZNW 44, ’52/53, 196–205, Zu den Problemen des Petrusgrabes: JAC ’58, 79–93; GSnyder, BA 32, ’69, 2–24; JGwynGriffiths, Hibbert Journal 55, ’56/57, 140–49; TBarnes, JTS 21, ’70, 175–79; GSchulze-Kadelbach, D. Stellung des P. in der Urchristenheit: TLZ 81, ’56, 1–18 (lit.); PGaechter, Petrus u. seine Zeit, ’58; EKirschbaum, The Tombs of St. Peter and St. Paul (transl. JMurray) ’59; EHaenchen, Petrus-Probleme, NTS 7, ’60/61, 187–97; SAgourides, Πέτρος καὶ Ἰωάννης ἐν τῷ τετάρτῳ Εὐαγγελίῳ, Thessalonike, ’66; DGewalt, Petrus, diss. Hdlbg, ’66; RBrown, KDonfried, JReumann edd., Peter in the NT, ’73; CCaragounis, Peter and the Rock (BZNW 58) ’89.—Pauly-W. XIX ’38, 1335–61; Kl. Pauly IV 674–76; BHHW III 1430f. LGPN I. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv. -
14 προεῖπον
προεῖπον (alsoA- εῖπα Plb.3.114.8
), [tense] aor. with no [tense] pres. in use, προλέγω and προαγορεύω being used, part. προειπών, inf. προειπεῖν:— foretell, Pl.Euthphr.3c, al., Gal.14.601; premise, .II proclaim or declare publicly,ἀλλήλοισι πόλεμον π. Hdt.7.9
.β; ξεινίην τοῖσι Ἀκανθίοισι π. Id.7.116
;ἀγῶνας ἑκάστοις X.Cyr.1.6.18
; νικητήρια ταῖς τάξεσι ib. 2.1.24;θάνατον αὐτῷ π. μὴ πράξαντι ταῦτα Pl.Lg. 698c
; π. τινὶ φόνου make proclamation of murder against him, D.59.9, cf. Lex ap.eund. 43.57;π. τοῖς θεοῖς ὅτι.. Pl.Cra. 401a
; ὀνυμάξει αὐτὸν προειπὼν τρῖς ἁμέρας giving notice of three days (within which he must answer the call), Berl.Sitzb.1927.167 ([place name] Cyrene); (i A.D.).III c. inf., order or command before,πρό οἱ εἴπομεν.., μήτ' αὐτὸν κτείνειν Od.1.37
, cf. Hdt.1.21, 155, 7.12, S.OT 351;οἱ νόμοι προεῖπον αὐτῷ μὴ δημηγορεῖν Aeschin.1.3
;π. τοῖς καδεσταῖς ἀλλύεθθαι Leg.Gort.2.28
: c. acc. et inf.,π. σῖτον ἐσάγειν τὸν βουλόμενον Th.4.26
; π. αὐτῷ δήσειν threatened him that.., And.4.17.2 enjoin, c. acc.,π. Λυδοῖσι τὰ ὁ Κροῖσος ὑπετίθετο Hdt.1.156
.Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > προεῖπον
-
15 ἀφίστημι
A causal in [tense] pres. and [tense] impf., in [tense] fut. ἀποστήσω, and [tense] aor. I ἀπέστησα, as also in [tense] aor. I [voice] Med. (v. infr.):—put away, remove, keep out of the way,τὸ ἀσθενέστατον τοῦ στρατεύματος X.HG7.5.23
; (lyr.); of diseases, Dsc.2.96, Gal.13.846;τὰ συγκείμενα ἀ. ἀπ' ἀλλήλων Pl.Plt. 282b
;ἀ. τῆς ἐλάας τὸν φλοιόν Thphr.CP3.3.2
;ἀ. τινὰ λόγου
hinder from..,E.
IT 912; ἀ. τὰς τῶν πολεμίων ἐπιβουλάς frustrate them, Th.1.93; ἀ. τὸν ἄρχοντα depose him, X.HG7.1.45:—[tense] aor. [voice] Med., Ἀργείων δόρυ πυλῶν ἀπεστήσασθε remoued it from your own gates, E.ph.1087:—in Hdt.9.23 ἀποστήσαντες, = ἀποστάντες, having retired.2 cause to revolt, of allies, Id.8.19, Ar.Eq. 238, Th.1.81;τινὰ ἀπό τινος Hdt.1.76
, 154, etc.;τινά τινος And.3.22
.3 in geom. constructions, cut off, Procl.Hyp. 6.7.II weigh out, X.Smp.2.20;ἀποστησάτωσαν τὰ χρυσία IG7.303.19
([place name] Oropus); pay, (ii B.C.): also in [tense] aor. I [voice] Med., μὴ.. ἀποστήσωνται Ἀχαιοὶ χρεῖος lest they weigh out (i. e. pay in full) the debt, Il.13.745, cf. IG12.91.20, al.:—in strict sense of [voice] Med., ἀποστήσασθαι τὸν χαλκόν to have the brass weighed out to one, D.49.52.—Hom. has it trans. only in l.c.III [voice] Med., give a final decision (or break up, dismiss the assembly), ῥήτρα ap.Plu. Lyc.6.B intr., in [voice] Pass., as also in [tense] aor. 2 ἀπέστην, imper. ,ἀπόστα Men.375
: [tense] pf. ἀφέστηκα in [tense] pres. sense, sync. in pl. ἀφέστᾰμεν, -στᾰτε, -στᾶσι, as in inf. ἀφεστάναι, part. ἀφεστώς, -ῶσα, -ός or - ώς: [tense] plpf. ἀφεστήκειν, [dialect] Att. : [tense] fut. [voice] Med.ἀποστήσομαι E.Hec. 1054
, Th.5.64, etc. (while [tense] aor. I [voice] Med. is causal (v. supr.)): for [tense] fut. ἀφεστήξω v. h. v.:— stand away or aloof from, keep far from,ὅσσον δὲ τροχοῦ ἵππος ἀφίσταται Il.23.517
;οὐ μέν κ' ἄλλη γ' ὧδε γυνὴ.. ἀνδρὸς ἀφεσταίη Od.23.101
;ἀποστᾶσ' ἐκποδών E.Hel. 1023
;ἐς ἄλλο σχῆμ' ἀ. βίου Id.Med. 1039
; ; ὡς γραφεὺς (or βραβεὺς)ἀποσταθείς E.Hec. 807
;μακρὰν τόποις καὶ χρόνοις ἀ. D.S.13.22
: hence in various relations, ἀφεστάναι φρενῶν lose one's wits, S.Ph. 865; (lyr.); οὐδενὸς ἀποστήσονται ὅσα ἂν δίκαια λέγητε depart from, object to right proposals, Th.4.118;ἀ. φόνου E.Or. 1544
; ἀ. ἀρχῆς to be deposed from office, Pl.Lg. 928d; simply, resign, SIG527.105 (Crete, iii B. C.); ἀ. τῶν πραγμάτων, τῆς πολιτείας, etc., withdraw from business, politics, have done with it, D.10.1, 18.308, etc.; ἔργων ἢ πόνων ἢ κινδύνων shun them, Isoc.4.83, cf.X.HG7.5.19, etc.; ὧν εἷλεν ἀποστάς giving up all claim to what he had won (at law), D.21.181;τῶν αὑτῆς Id.19.147
, cf. 35.4; ἀφίστασθαι τῶν τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ ib.44;οὐδενὸς τῶν ἀνηκόντων τῇ πόλει Inscr.Magn.53.65
; τὴν πολιτείαν.. τὴν ἀφεστηκυῖαν τοῦ μέσου πλεῖον further removed from.., Arist.Pol. 1296b8;ἀποστὰς τῶν πατρῴων Luc.DMort.12.3
; ἀ. ἐκ Σικελίας withdraw from the island, give up the expedition, Th.7.28; retire,ἐς Ἰθώμην Id.1.101
: rarely c.acc., avoid, shrink from,τὸν ἥλιον X.Cyn. 3.3
;τὸν πόλεμον Id.An.2.5.7
; ;πυγμήν Philostr. Gym.20
(prob. cj.).2 in Prose, ἀ. ἀπό τινος revolt from.., Hdt. 1.95, 130, etc.;τινός Id.2.113
;οὐκ ἀποστήσομαι ἀπὸ τοῦ δήμου Ἀθηναίων IG12.39.21
; but Ἀθηναίων τοῦ πλήθους ib.10.22; also ἀ. εἴς or πρός τινας, Hdt.2.30, 162, cf. X.An.1.6.7;ἐς δημοκρατίαν ἀ. Th.8.90
: abs., revolt, Hdt.1.102, etc.; ὑπό τινος at his instigation, Th.8.35 ( ἀπό codd.).3 ἀ. τινί make way for another, give way to him, E. Hec. 1054, D.8.37.4 c. gen., shrink from,τῶν κινδύνων Isoc.9.29
: also c. inf., shrink from doing,ἀπέστην τοῦτ' ἐρωτῆσαι σαφῶς E. Hel. 536
.5 abs., stand aloof, recoil from fear, horror, etc.,τίπτε καταπτώσσοντες ἀφέστατε; Il.4.340
;πολλὸν ἀφεσταότες 17.375
;παλίνορσος ἀπέστη 3.33
, Pi.O.1.52, P.4.145;ἐγὼ οὐδέν τι μᾶλλον ἀ. Pl.Tht. 169b
, cf. D.19.45, etc.; desist,μὴ νῦν -ώμεθα Pl.Lg. 960e
; a runaway,Lys.
23.7.6 Medic., ἀφίσταται, = ἀπόστασις γίγνεται, εἰς ἄρθρα Hp.Aph.4.74; ἀ. ὀστέον exfoliates, ib. 6.45; alsoἀ. ἀπὸ τῶν ὀστῶν Pl.Ti. 84a
;τὸ δέρμα ἀ. X.Eq.1.5
; also, project, stand out,ὦτα ἀφεστηκότα PLond.3.1209.12
(i B. C.).b to be separated by the formation of an abscess, Gal.11.116, al. (also in [voice] Act.,τὸ πύον ἀφίστησι 7.715
).Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἀφίστημι
-
16 ἔχω
ἔχω (A), [ per.] 2sg. ἔχεισθα cj. in Thgn. 1316 ( ἔχοισθα cod.), ἔχῃσθα cj. in Sapph.21 ( ἔχεισθα cod.); [ per.] 2sg. subj.Aἔχῃσθα Il.19.180
: [tense] impf. εἶχον, [dialect] Ep.ἔχον Od.2.22
, al., [dialect] Ion. and poet.ἔχεσκον Il.13.257
, Hdt.6.12, Epigr.Gr.988.6 ([place name] Balbilla): [tense] fut. ἕξω, [dialect] Ep. inf.ἑξέμεναι Call.Aet.3.1.27
(of duration) or σχήσω (of momentary action, esp. in sense check, v. infr. A. 11.9, not found in [dialect] Att. Inscrr. or NT); [ per.] 2sg. codd.: [tense] aor. 1 ἔσχης α f.l.in Nonn.D.17.177, alsoἔσχα IG3.1363.6
, 14.1728, [ per.] 3pl. μετ-έσχαν ib.12(7).271.12 (Amorgos, iii A.D.): [tense] aor. 2 ἔσχον, imper. , E.Hipp. 1353 (anap.) ( σχέ only in Orac. ap. Sch.E.Ph. 638 (dub.l.), sts. in compds. in codd., as , ); subj.σχῶ Il.21.309
, etc.; opt.σχοίην Isoc. 1.45
, in compds. σχοῖμι (asμετάσχοιμι S.OC 1484
(lyr.),κατάσχοιμεν Th.6.11
); [ per.] 3pl.σχοίησαν Hyp.Eux.32
,σχοῖεν Th.6.33
; inf.σχεῖν Il. 16.520
, etc., [dialect] Ep.σχέμεν 8.254
(in Alexandr. Gr. [ per.] 3pl. [tense] impf. and [tense] aor. 2εἴχοσαν AP5.208
(Posidipp. or Asclep.), v.l. in Ev.Jo.15.22,ἔσχοσαν Scymn.695
): for the poet. form ἔσχεθον, v. Σχέθω: [tense] pf. , εἴσχηκα in Inscrr. of iii/i B.C., SIG679.54, etc.; [dialect] Ep. ὄχωκα is dub., v. συνόχωκα:—[voice] Med., [tense] impf.εἰχόμην Pi.P.4.244
, etc.: [tense] fut.ἕξομαι Il.9.102
, etc.; σχήσομαι ib. 235, Ar.Av. 1335, more freq. in compds. ( ἀνα-) A.Th. 252, ( παρα-) Lys.9.8, etc.: [tense] pf. [voice] Pass. παρ-έσχημαι in med. sense, X.An.7.6.11, etc.: [tense] aor. 2ἐσχόμην Hom.
, Hdt.6.85, rare in [dialect] Att. exc. in compds.; imper.σχέο Il.21.379
,σχέσθε 22.416
, later σχοῦ in compds. ( ἀνά- ) E. lon947, etc.; inf.σχέσθαι Od.4.422
, Hes.Fr.79:—[voice] Pass., [tense] fut. [voice] Med. ἐν-έξομαι in pass. sense, E.Or. 516, D.51.11, laterσχεθήσομαι Gal.UP15.3
, freq. in compds. (συ- ) Phld.Ir.p.83 W., (ἐν- ) Plu.2.98 of, ( ἐπι-) S.E.P.1.186: [tense] aor. 1ἐσχέθην Arr.An.5.7.4
, 6.11.2, Aret.SA2.5, (κατ-, συν-) Plu.Sol. 21, Hp.Int. 45 vulg.: [tense] fut. [voice] Med. σχήσομαι in pass. sense, Il.9.235 (dub.), 655, 13.630: [tense] aor. 2 [voice] Med. in pass. sense,ἐσχόμην Il.17.696
, al., Hdt. 1.31 (σχέτο Il.7.248
, 21.345), part.σχόμενος Od.11.279
, prob. in Isoc.19.11, ( κατα-) Pi.P.1.10, Pl.Phdr. 244e, Parth.33.2 (s.v.l.): [tense] pf.ἔσχημαι Paus.4.21.2
; also in compds., freq. written - ίσχημαι, -ήσχημαι in codd. of late authors. (I.-E. seĝh- (cf. Skt. sáhate 'overpower', Goth. sigis 'victory', Gr. ἔχ- dissim. fr. ἔχ-), reduced form sĝh-(σχ-), whence redupl. ἴσχω ( = si-sĝh-o) (q.v.): cf. ἕκ-τωρ, ἕξω, ἕξις; but hέχ- IG12.374.161, al., is a mere error (ἔχ- ib.12.116.4, 16).)A Trans., have, hold:I possess, of property, the most common usage, Od.2.336, 16.386, etc.; οἵ τι ἔχοντες the propertied class, Hdt.6.22; ὁ ἔχων a wealthy man, S.Aj. 157 (anap.);οἱ ἔχοντες E.Alc.57
, Ar.Eq. 1295, Pl. 596; οἱ οὐκ ἔχοντες the poor, E.Supp. 240;κακὸν τὸ μὴ 'χειν Id.Ph. 405
; ἔχειν χρέα to have debts due to one, D. 36.41, cf. 37.12; to have received,θεῶν ἄπο κάλλος ἐ. h.Ven.77
;τι ἔκ τινος S.OC 1618
;παρά τινος Id.Aj. 663
;πρός τινος X.An.7.6.33
, etc.;ὑπὸ.. θεοῖσι h.Ap. 191
; πλέον, ἔλασσον ἔ.. (v. h. vv.): in [tense] aor., acquire, get, : also [tense] fut.σχήσω, δύναμιν Th.6.6
;λέχος E.Hel.30
, cf. Pi.P.9.116:—[voice] Pass., to be possessed,ἔντεα.. μετὰ Τρώεσσιν ἔχονται Il.18.130
, cf. 197.2 keep, have charge of,ἔχον πατρώϊα ἔργα Od. 2.22
;κῆπον 4.737
;Εἰλείθυιαι.. ὠδῖνας ἔχουσαι Il.11.271
;πύλαι.., ἃς ἔχον Ὧραι 5.749
, 8.393;τὰς ἀγέλας X.Cyr.7.3.7
; διαιτητῶν ἐχόντων τὰς δίκας having control of, D.47.45; to be engaged in, φυλακὰς ἔχον kept watch, Il.9.1, 471;σκοπιὴν ἔχεν Od.8.302
;ἀλαοσκοπιὴν εἶχε Il. 10.515
, 13.10; σκοπιὴν ἔ. τινός for a thing, Hdt.5.13;δυσμενῶν θήραν ἔχων S.Aj. 564
, etc.; ἐν χερσὶν ἔ. τι (v. χείρ).b metaph., of a patient, οὐκ ἔχει ἑωυτόν is not himself, Hp.Int.49.3 c. acc. loci, inhabit,οὐρανόν Il.21.267
;Ὄλυμπον 5.890
; haunt, [Νύμφαι] ἔχουσ' ὀρέων αἰπεινὰ κάρηνα Od.6.123
;Βρόμιος ἔχει τὸν χῶρον A.Eu.24
; esp. of tutelary gods and heroes, Th.2.74, X.Cyr.8.3.24; of men,πόλιν καὶ γαῖαν Od.6.177
, 195, etc.; Θήβας ἔσχον ( ἔσχεν codd.) ruled it, E.HF 4; ἔχεις γὰρ χῶρον occupiest it, S.OC37, cf. Od.23.46; in military sense, ἔ. τὸ δεξιόν (with or without κέρας) Th.3.107, X.An.2.1.15; of beasts,τὰ ὄρη ἔ. Id.Cyn.5.12
.4 have to wife or as husband (usu. without γυναῖκα, ἄνδρα), οὕνεκ' ἔχεις Ἑλένην καί σφιν γαμβρὸς Διός ἐσσι Od. 4.569
, cf.7.313, Il.3.53, etc.;ἔσχε ἄλλην ἀδελφεήν Hdt.3.31
, cf. Th.2.29;νυμφίον Call.Aet.3.1.27
; also of a lover, Th.6.54, AP5.185 (Posidipp.), etc.;ἔχω Λαΐδα, ἀλλ' οὐκ ἔχομαι Aristipp.
ap. D.L.2.75, cf. Ath. 12.544d:—in [voice] Pass.,τοῦ περ θυγάτηρ ἔχεθ' Ἕκτορι Il.6.398
.6 [tense] pres. part. with Verbs, almost, = with,ἤϊε ἔχων ταῦτα Hdt.3.128
, cf. 2.115;ὃς ἂν ἥκῃ ἔχων στρατόν Id.7.8
.δ', cf. X.Cyr.1.6.10.—Prose use.7 of Place, ἐπ' ἀριστερὰ ἔ. τι keep it on one's left, i.e. to keep to the right of it, Od.3.171;ἐπ' ἀριστερὰ χειρὸς ἔ. 5.277
; ἐν δεξιᾷ, ἐν ἀριστερᾷ ἔ., Th.3.106; τοὺς οἰκέτας ὑστάτους ἔ. X.Cyr.4.2.2: but in [tense] aor., get,περιπλώοντες τὴν Λιβύην τὸν ἥλιον ἔσχον ἐς τὰ δεξιά Hdt.4.42
.8 of Habits, States, or Conditions, bodily or mental,γῆρας λυγρὸν ἔ Od.24.250
;ἀνεκτὸν ἔχει κακόν 20.83
;ἕλκος Il.16.517
;λύσσαν 9.305
;μάχην ἔ. 14.57
;ἀρετῆς πέρι δῆριν ἔ. Od.24.515
; ὕβριν ἔ. indulge in.., 1.368, etc.; [ Ἀφροδίτην] 22.445; [φρένας] ἔ. Il.13.394
, etc.;βουλήν 2.344
;τλήμονα θυμόν 5.670
; , cf. Od.14.490 (for later senses of νοῦν ἔχειν, v. νοῦς); ἄλγεα Il.5.895
, etc.;ἄχεα θυμῷ 3.412
;πένθος μετὰ φρεσίν 24.105
;πένθος φρεσίν Od.7.219
;πόνον.. καὶ ὀϊζύν Il.13.2
, Od.8.529;οὐδὲν βίαιον Hdt.3.15
;πρήγματα ἔ. Id.7.147
, cf. Pl.Tht. 174b, etc.: in periphrastic phrases, ποθὴν ἔ. τινός, = ποθεῖν, Il.6.362; ἐπιδευὲς ἔ. τινός, = ἐπιδεύεσθαι, 19.180; ἔ. τέλος, = τελεῖσθαι, 18.378; κότον ἔ. τινί, = κοτεῖσθαι, 13.517;ἐπιθυμίαν τινός E.Andr. 1281
;φροντίδα τινός Id.Med. 1301
; ἡσυχίην ἔ. keep quiet, Hdt.2.45, etc. ([tense] fut.ἡσυχίαν ἕξειν D.47.29
, but οὐκ ἔσθ' ὅπως.. ἡ. σχήσει will not keep still for a moment, Id.1.14); αἰτίαν ἔ. to be accused, X.An.7.1.8;ὑπό τινος A.Eu.99
(but μομφὴν ἔ., = μέμφεσθαι, E.Or. 1069, A.Pr. 445): in [tense] aor., of entering upon a state, ἔσχεν χόλον conceived anger, B. 5.104; ἔχειν τι κατά τινος have something against somebody, Ev.Matt.5.23, Ev.Marc.11.25, Apoc.2.4;ἔχω τι πρός τινα Act.Ap.24.19
;ἔχειν πρός τινα 2 Ep.Cor.5.12
;ἕξει πρὸς τὸν Θεόν JRS14.85
([place name] Laodicea): —these phrases are freq. inverted,οὓς ἔχε γῆρας Il.18.515
;οὐδὲ Ποσειδάωνα γέλως ἔχε Od.8.344
;ἀμηχανίη δ' ἔχε θυμόν 9.295
;θάμβος δ' ἔχεν εἰσορόωντας Il.4.79
;σ' αὔτως κλέος ἐσθλὸν ἔχει 17.143
;Διὸς αἴσῃ, ἥ μ' ἕξει παρὰ νηυσί 9.609
(unless the antecedent is τιμῆς in 1.608);ὥς σφεας ἡσυχίη τῆς πολιορκίης ἔσχε Hdt.6.135
;ὄφρα με βίος ἔχῃ S.El. 225
(lyr.): c. dupl. acc.,φόβος μ' ἔχει φρένας A.Supp. 379
; also of external objects,αἴθρη ἔχει κορυφήν Od.12.76
;μιν ἔχεν μένος ἠελίοιο 10.160
;σε οἶνος ἔχει φρένας 18.331
; ἔχῃ βέλος ὀξὺ γυναῖκα, of a woman in travail, Il.11.269; λόγος ἔχει τινά c. inf., the story goes, that.., S.OC 1573 (lyr.); and so in later Gr., Plu.Dem.28, Ph. 1.331, Ael.VH3.14, NA5.42, Ath.13.592e;ὡς ἡ φάτις μιν ἔχει Hdt. 7.3
, cf. 5,26, 9.78 (but also ; [Κλεισθένης] λόγον ἔχει τὴν Πυθίην ἀναπεῖσαι Id.5.66
); ὡς ἂν λόγος ἔχῃ πρὸς ἀνθρώπους, ὅτι .. Plu.Alex.38:—[voice] Pass.,ἔχεσθαι κακότητι καὶ ἄλγεσι Od.8.182
;κωκυτῷ καὶ οἰμωγῇ Il.22.409
;ὀργῇ Hdt.1.141
;νούσῳ Hp.Epid.5.6
;ἀγρυπνίῃσι Hdt.3.129
;ὑπὸ πυρετοῦ Hp.Aph.4.34
;ὑπὸ τοῦ ὕδρωπος Id.Prorrh.2.6
,ἐν ἀπόρῳ Th.1.25
;ἐν συμφοραῖς Pl.R. 395e
.9 possess mentally, understand,ἵππων δμῆσιν Il.17.476
; ;πάντ' ἔχεις λόγον A. Ag. 582
, cf. E.Alc.51;ἔχετε τὸ πρᾶγμα S.Ph. 789
; ἔχεις τι; do you understand? Ar.Nu. 733: imper. ἔχε attend! listen! Pl.Alc.1.109b; ἔ. οὖν ib. 129b: with imper., ;ἔ. νυν, ἄλειψον Id.Eq. 490
; ἔχεις τοῦτο ἰσχυρῶς; Pl.Tht. 154a; know of a thing,μαντικῆς ὁδόν S.OT 311
; τινὰ σωτηρίαν; E.Or. 778 (troch.).10 keep up, maintain, καναχὴν ἔχε made a rattling noise, Il.16.105, 794; βοὴν ἔχον, of flutes and lyres, 18.495.11 involve, admit of, , cf. Th.1.5;βάσανον Lys.12.31
;ταῦτ' ἀπιστίαν, ταῦτ' ὀργὴν ἔχει D.10.44
; ἀγανάκτησιν, κατάμεμψιν, Th.2.41;τὰ ἀόρατα νοσήματα δυσχερεστέραν ἔχει τὴν θεραπείαν Onos. 1.15
.12 of Measure or Value,τὸ Δαμαρέτειον.. εἶχε Ἀττικὰς δραχμὰς δέκα D.S.11.26
;ἔχει τὸ Εὐβοϊκὸν τάλαντον Ἀλεξανδρείους δραχμὰς ἑπτακισχιλίας App.Sic.2.2
;χοῖρος ἔχων τὸ ὕψος δύο καὶ ἡμίσους πήχεων Ptol.Euerg.9
.b Geom., ἡ ἔχουσα τὰ κέντρα the (straight line) containing the centres, Archim.Aequil.1.6; ὁ κύκλος ἔχων τὸ πολύγωνον the circle containing (circumscribing) the polygon, Id.Sph.Cyl.1.23.13 c. dupl.acc.,Ὀρφέα ἄνακτ' ἔχειν E.Hipp. 953
;Ζῆν' ἔχειν ἐπώμοτον S.Tr. 1188
;παιδιὰν ἔ. τὸν ἐκείνου θάνατον Seleuc.
Alex. ap. Ath.4.155e.II hold:1 hold, ἔ. χερσίν, ἐν χερσίν, μετὰ χερσίν, etc., v. χείρ; μετὰ γαμφηλῇσιν ἔ. Il.13.200; πρόσθεν ἔ. ἀσπίδα ib. 157; ὑψοῦ, πασάων ὑπέρ, ὄπιθεν κάρη ἔ., 6.509, Od.6.107, Il. 23.136; ἔ. τινί τι to hold it for him, as his helper, 9.209, 13.600; uphold,οὐρανὸν.. κεφαλῇ τε καὶ ἀκαμάτῃσι χέρεσσι Hes.Th. 517
, 746; ἔχει δέ τε κίονας of Atlas, Od.1.53;ἐπ' ὤμων πατέρα S.Fr.
373.2 hold fast, χειρὸς ἔχων Μενέλαον holding him by the hand, Il.4.154, cf. 16.763, 11.488 (v. infr. C.I); ἔ. τινὰ μέσον grip one by the middle, of wrestlers, Ar.Nu. 1047;ἔχομαι μέσος Id.Ach. 571
, cf. Eq. 388, Ra. 469: metaph., ἔ. φρεσί keep in one's mind, Il.2.33;νῷ ἔ. τινά Pl.Euthphr.2b
, cf. R. 490a.3 of arms and clothes, bear, wear,εἷμα δ' ἔχ' ἀμφ' ὤμοισι Il.18.538
, cf. 595;παρδαλέην ὤμοισιν ἔ. 3.17
;σάκος ὤμῳ 14.376
;κυνέην κεφαλῇ Od.24.231
;τάδε εἵματ' ἔχω 17.24
, cf. 573, etc.;στολὴν ἀμφὶ σῶμα E.Hel. 554
, cf. X.Cyr.1.4.26, etc.; πολιὰς ἔχω I am grey-haired, Aeschin.1.49: abs., as a category, Arist.Cat. 2a3.4 of a woman, to be pregnant, Hdt.5.41, Hp.Epid.4.21, Arist.Pol. 1335b18; in fullἐν γαστρὶ ἔ. Hdt.3.32
; alsoπρὸς ἑωυτῇ ἔχειν Hp.Epid.1.26
.ιγ.b παῖδα ἔσχεν she had, i.e. bore, a child, Nic.Dam.11 J.7 enclose,φρένες ἧπαρ ἔχουσι Od.9.301
;σάρκας τε καὶ ὀστέα ἶνες ἔ. 11.219
;τοὺς δ' ἄκραντος ἔχει νύξ A.Ch.65
(lyr.); of places, contain,θηρῶν οὓς ὅδ' ἔχει χῶρος S.Ph. 1147
(lyr.), cf. X.Cyn.5.4; [τεῖχος] νῆας ἐντὸς ἔχον Il.12.8
;ὅσσους Κρήτη ἐντὸς ἔχει h.Ap.30
.8 hold or keep in a certain direction, ὀϊστὸν ἔχε aimed it, Il.23.871; more fullyχεῖράς τε καὶ ἔγχεα.. ἀντίον ἀλλήλων 5.569
; of horses or ships, guide, drive, steer, , cf. 11.760;φόβονδε 8.139
;τῇ ῥα.. ἔχον ἵππους 5.752
, etc.;παρὲξ ἔχε δίφρον Hes.Sc. 352
;ὅπῃ ἔσχες.. εὐεργέα νῆα Od.9.279
;παρὰ τὴν ἤπειρον ἔ. νέας Hdt.6.95
, etc.: abs., τῇ ῥ' ἔχε that way he held his course, Il.16.378, cf. 23.422; Πύλονδ' ἔχον I held on to Pylos, Od.3.182, cf. S.El. 720: metaph.,ἐπὶ ῥητορείαν ἔσχε Hsch.Mil.
(?)ap.Sch.Pl.R. 600c; also (esp. in [tense] fut. σχήσω, [tense] aor. 2 ἔσχον), put in, land,νέες ἔσχον ἐς τὴν Ἀργολίδα χώρην Hdt. 6.92
;σχεῖν πρὸς τὴν Σαλαμῖνα Id.8.40
; ἐς Φειάν, τῷ Δήλῳ, κατὰ τὸ Ποσειδώνιον, Th.2.25,3.29, 4.129;τάχ' οὖν τις ἄκων ἔσχε S.Ph. 305
; ποῖ σχήσειν δοκεῖς; Ar.Ra. 188; ἔχε.. ἀρὰν ἐπ' ἄλλοις point it against others, S.Ph. 1119 (lyr.); ὄμμ' ἔ. to turn or keep one's eye fixed, Id.Aj. 191 (lyr.);ἐπὶ ἔργῳ θυμὸν ἔ. Hes.Op. 445
;ἄλλοσ' ὄμμα θητέρᾳ δὲ νοῦν ἔ. S.Tr. 272
;τὸν δὲ νοῦν ἐκεῖσ' ἔχει E.Ph. 360
; δεῦρο νοῦν ἔχε attend to this, Id.Or. 1181; πρός τινα or πρός τι τὸν νοῦν ἔ., Th.3.22, 7.19; soπρός τινα τὴν γνώμην ἔ. Id.3.25
.9 hold in, stay, keep back,ἵππους Il.4.302
, 16.712; check, stop, [ τινα] 23.720, etc. ( σχήσω is usu. [tense] fut. in this sense, , cf. Il.11.820, Ar.Lys. 284, D.19.272, butἕξω Il.13.51
); χεῖρας ἔχων Ἀχιλῆος holding his hands, 18.33; but οὐ σχήσει χεῖρας will not stay his hands, Od.22.70; ἔ. [δάκρυον] 16.191; ἔ. ὀδύνας allay, assuage them, Il.11.848;ἔσχε κῦμα Od.5.451
;σιγῇ μῦθον 19.502
(soεἶχε σιγῇ καὶ ἔφραζε οὐδενί Hdt.9.93
);ἐν φρεσὶ μῦθον Od.15.445
; στόμα σῖγα, ἐν ἡσυχίᾳ, E.Hipp. 660, Fr.773.61 (lyr.); ; πόδα ἔξω or ἐκτός τινος ἔχειν, v. πούς:—[voice] Pass.,οὖρα σχεθέντα Aret.SA 2.5
.10 keep away from, c. gen.rei, τινὰ ἀγοράων, νεῶν, Il.2.275, 13.687; ; : c.inf.,ἦ τινα.. σχήσω ἀμυνέμεναι Il.17.182
; stop, hinder from doing,τοῦ μὴ καταδῦναι X. An.3.5.11
, cf. HG4.8.5;ἔσχον μὴ κτανεῖν E.Andr. 686
, cf. Hdt.1.158, etc.;μὴ οὐ τάδ' ἐξειπεῖν E.Hipp. 658
; ὥστε μή .. X.An.3.5.11;τὸ μὴ ἀδικεῖν A.Eu. 691
, cf. Hdt.5.101: also c. part.,ἔ. τινὰ βουθυτοῦντα S.OC 888
(troch.); .11 keep back, withhold a thing,ὅς οἱ χρήματα εἶχε βίῃ Od.15.231
, cf. D.30.14;Ἕκτορ' ἔχει.. οὐδ' ἀπέλυσεν Il.24.115
, cf. 136; αὐτὸς ἔχε pray keep it, a civil form of declining, E.Cyc. 270.13 with predicate, keep in a condition or place,εἶχον ἀτρέμας σφέας αὐτούς Hdt.9.54
, cf. 53, Ar.Th. 230;ἔ. ἑωυτοὺς κατ' οἴκους Hdt.3.79
;σαυτὸν ἐκποδών A.Pr. 346
, cf. X.Cyr.6.1.37;σῖγα νάπη φύλλ' εἶχε E.Ba. 1085
;τοὺς στρατιώτας πολὺν χρόνον πειθομένους ἔ. X.Cyr.7.2.11
.14 hold, consider,τινὰ θέᾳ ἰκέλαν Sapph. Supp.25.3
(dub.), cf. E.Supp. 164;τινὰ ὡς προφήτην Ev.Matt.14.5
;τινὰ ὅτι προφήτης ἦν Ev.Marc.11.32
;ἔχε με παρῃτημένον Ev.Luc.14.18
, cf.POxy.292.6 (i A.D.).III c.inf., have means or power to do, to be able, c. [tense] aor. inf., Il.7.217, 16.110, etc.: c. [tense] pres. inf., Od.18.364, etc.;πόλλ' ἂν λέγειν ἔχοιμι S.Ph. 1047
: sts. with inf. omitted or supplied from context, ἀλλ' οὔ πως ἔτι εἶχε he could not, Il.17.354; οἷά κ' ἔχωμεν so far as we be able, Od.15.281;ἐξ οἵων ἔχω S.El. 1379
;ὅσον εἶχες E.IA 1452
; .b have to face, be obliged,παθεῖν Porph. Chr.63
;εἰ ἕξω βλαβῆναι Astramps.Orac.p.5
H.;βάπτισμα ἔχω βαπτισθῆναι Ev.Luc.12.50
.2 after Hom., οὐκ ἔχω, folld. by a dependent clause, I know not..,οὐκ εἶχον τίς ἂν γενοίμαν A.Pr. 905
, cf. Isoc.12.130;οὐδ' ἔχω πῶς με χρὴ.. ἀφανίσαι S.OC 1710
;οὐκ ἔχων ὅ τι χρὴ λέγειν X.Cyr.1.4.24
;οὐκ ἔχω ποῖ πέσω S.Tr. 705
;ὅπως μολούμεθ' οὐκ ἔχω Id.OC 1743
; the two constructions combined,οὐ γὰρ εἴχομεν οὔτ' ἀντιφωνεῖν οὔθ' ὅπως.. πράξαιμεν Id.Ant. 270
.IV impers. c. acc., there is.. (as in Mod. Gr.),ἔχει δὲ φυλακτήριον πρὸς τὸ μή σε καταπεσεῖν PMag.Par.1.2505
, cf. 1262, 1840.B intrans., hold oneself, i.e. keep, so and so, ἔχον [οὕτως], ὥς τε τάλαντα γυνή (sc. ἔχει) kept balanced, like the scales which.., Il.12.433; ἕξω δ' ὡς ὅτε τις στερεὴ λίθος I will keep unmoved, as a stone.., Od.19.494, cf. Il.13.679, 24.27;νωλεμέως ἐχέμεν 5.492
; ἔγχος ἔχ' ἀτρέμας it kept still, 13.557; σχὲς οὗπερ εἶ keep where thou art, S.OC 1169;ἕξειν κατὰ χώραν Ar.Ra. 793
, cf. Hdt.6.42, X.Oec.10.10; διὰ φυλακῆς ἔχοντες to keep on their guard, Th.2.81; ἔχε ἠρέμα keep still, Pl.Cra. 399e, etc.; ἔχε δή stay now, Id.Prt. 349e, Grg. 460a, etc.;ἔχ' αὐτοῦ D.45.26
.64 with Preps., to be engaged or busy, (lyr.), X.An.5.2.26, etc.;περί τινας Id.HG7.4.28
.II simply, be,ἑκὰς εἶχον Od.12.435
;ἔ. κατ' οἴκους Hdt.6.39
;περὶ πολλῶν ἔ. πρηγμάτων Id.3.128
; ἀγῶνα διὰ πάσης ἀγωνίης ἔχοντα consisting in.., Id.2.91;ἔ. ἐν ἀνάγκαισι E.Ba. 88
(lyr.);ὅπου συμφορᾶς ἔχεις Id.El. 238
;ἐκποδὼν ἔχειν Id.IT 1226
, etc.2 freq. with Advbs. of manner,εὖ ἔχει Od.24.245
, etc.; καλῶς ἔχει, κακῶς ἔχει, it is, is going on well or ill, v. καλός, κακός (but [tense] fut. σχήσειν καλῶς will turn out well, D.1.9, cf. 18.45; ); οὕτως.. σχεῖν to turn out, happen thus, Pl.Ap. 39b; οὕτως ἔχει so the case stands, Ar.Pl. 110; οὕτως ἐχόντων, Lat. cum res ita se habeant, X.An.3.2.10;ὡς ὧδ' ἐχόντων S.Aj. 981
;οὕτω χρὴ διὰ στέρνων ἔχειν Id.Ant. 639
;οὕτως ἔ. περί τινος X.Mem.4.8.7
, cf. Hdt.6.16;πρός τι D. 9.45
;τῇδ' ἔ. S.Ph. 1336
;κοσμίως ἔ. Ar.Th. 854
;ἥδιον ἔ. πρός τινας D.9.63
; ὡς εἶχε just as he was, Hdt.1.114;ὥσπερ εἶχε Th.1.134
, X. HG4.1.30; ὡς ἔχω how I am, Ar.Lys. 610;ὥσπερ ἔχομεν Th.3.30
;τἀναντία εἶχεν D.9.41
; ἀσφαλέως, ἀναγκαίως ἔχει, = ἀσφαλές, ἀναγκαῖόν ἐστι, Hdt.1.86,9.27; καλῶς ἔχει no, I thank you, v. καλός.b c. gen. modi, εὖ ἔ. τινός to be well off for a thing, abound in it; καλῶς ἔ. μέθης to be well off for drink, i.e. to be pretty well drunk, Hdt. 5.20; σπόρου ἀνακῶς ἐ. to be busy with sowing, Id.8.109; εὖ ἐ. φρενῶν, σώματος, E.Hipp. 462, Pl.R. 404d;εὖ ὥρας ἔχον χωρίον Poll.5.108
; cf. ἥκω; so ὡς ποδῶν εἶχον as fast as they could go, Hdt.6.116, 9.59;ὡς τάχεος εἶχε ἕκαστος Id.8.107
;ὡς.. τις εὐνοίας ἢ μνήμης ἔχοι Th.1.22
;ὡς ὀργῆς ἔχω S.OT 345
, cf. E.Hel. 313, 857, etc.; πῶς ἔχεις δόξης; Pl.R. 456d;οὕτω τρόπου ἔχεις X.Cyr.7.5.56
;μετρίως ἔ. βίου Hdt.1.32
;ὑγιεινῶς ἔ. αὐτὸς αὑτοῦ καὶ σωφρόνως Pl.R. 571d
;οὐκ εὖ σεαυτοῦ τυγχάνεις ἔχων Philem.4.11
: also c. acc.,εὖ ἔ. τὸ σῶμα καὶ τὴν ψυχήν Pl.Grg. 464a
, cf. X.Oec.21.7: c. dat.,οὕτως ἐχόντων τούτων τῇ φύσει D.18.315
;πῶς ἔχετε ταῖς διανοίαις Lycurg.75
;τῇ λέξει κακῶς ἔ. Isoc.9.10
.3 lead towards,ὁδοὶ ἐπὶ τὸν ποταμὸν ἔ. Hdt.1.180
, cf. 191, 2.17; ἔ. εἴς τι to be directed, point towards,ἔχθρης ἐχούσης ἐς Ἀθηναίους Id.5.81
; τὸ ἐς τοὺς Ἀργείους ἔχον what concerns them, Id.6.19; ταῦτα ἐς τὴν ἀπόστασιν ἔχοντα ib.2, etc.; of Place, extend, reach to,ἐπ' ὅσον ἔποψις τοῦ ἱροῦ εἶχε Id.1.64
.IV after Hom., ἔχω as auxiliary, c. [tense] aor. part. giving a perfect sense,κρύψαντες ἔχουσι Hes.Op.42
;ἀποκληΐσας ἔχεις Hdt.1.37
;ἐγκλῄσασ' ἔχει Ar.Ec. 355
, cf. Th. 706; freq. in S.,θαυμάσας ἔχω OC 1140
, cf. Ant.22, al.: also in late Prose,ἀναλώσας ἔχεις Aristid. Or.18(20).1
;ὅς σφε νῦν ἀτιμάσας ἔχει E.Med.33
: less freq. c. [tense] pf. part., S.OT 701, Ph. 600, X.An.1.3.14,4.7.1: rarely c. [tense] pres. part., (lyr.), cf. X.Cyn.10.11.2 part. ἔχων, with [tense] pres., adds a notion of duration to that of present action, τί κυπτάζεις ἔ.; why do you keep poking about there? Ar.Nu. 509; τί δῆτα διατρίβεις ἔ.; why then keep wasting time? Id.Ec. 1151; τί γὰρ ἕστηκ' ἔ.; ib. 853, cf. Th. 473, 852: without interrog., φλυαρεῖς ἔ., ἔ. φλυαρεῖς, you keep chattering, Pl.Grg. 490e, Euthd. 295c;κακοῦν ἔχοντ' αὐτὸν ἀποκτιννύναι D.23.35
(and so possiblyἐνεργεῖ ἔ. Arist.Metaph. 1072b23
);παίσδεις ἔ. Theoc.14.8
: so in later Prose,παίζεις ἔ. Luc. Icar.24
; but ῥιπτεῖς ἔ.; do you throw away the prize when it is in your grasp? Aristid.1.443 J.C [voice] Med., hold oneself fast, cling closely,τῷ προσφὺς ἐχόμην Od. 12.433
, cf. Il.1.513, etc.;πρὸς ἀλλήλῃσιν Od.5.329
: mostly c. gen., hold on by, cling to, [ πέτρης] ib. 429;χερσὶν ἀώτου 9.435
;βρετέων A. Th.98
(lyr.);ἑξόμεσθάσου Ar.Pl. 101
; τῆς πληγῆς ἔχ εται claps his hand on the place struck, D.4.40.2 metaph., cleave, cling to,ἔργου Hdt. 8.11
, X.HG7.2.19; (iii A.D.);τῶν πραγμάτων Jul. Or.1.19a
; βιοτᾶς, ἐλπίδος, E. Ion 491, Fr. 409;τῆς αὐτῆς γνώμης Th.1.140
; lay hold on, take advantage of,τῶν ἀγαθῶν ἔχεο Thgn.32
;προφάσιος ἔχεσθαι Hdt.6.94
; fasten upon, attack, D.18.79; lay claim to,ἀμφοτέρων τῶν ἐπωνυμιέων Hdt.2.17
; to be zealous for, [ μάχης] S.OC 424; ;κοινῇ τῆς σωτηρίας X.An.6.3.17
, etc.3 come next to, follow closely, ib.1.8.4;ἕπεσθαι ἐχομένους ὅτι μάλιστα τῶν ἁρμάτων Id.Cyr.7.1.9
; of peoples or places, to be close, border on, c. gen., Hdt.4.169, Th.2.96, etc.; freq. in part., τὴν ἐχομένην [τῶν νεωρίων] στοάν Aen. Tact.11.3; οἱ ἐ. the neighbouring people, Hdt.1.134; ὁ ἐχόμενος the next man, Aen.Tact.22.27; of Time, τὸ ἐχόμενον ἔτος the next year, Th.6.3;ὁ ἐ. διαλογισμός PRev.Laws 16.15
(iii B.C.); τὰ ἐχόμενα τούτοις what follows, Pl.Grg. 494e (withoutτούτοις Isoc.6.29
).5 pertain to,ὅσα ἔχεται τῶν αἰσθήσεων Pl.Lg. 661b
;ἃ διδασκάλων εἴχετο Id.Prt. 319e
;ὅσα τέχνης ἔχεται Id.Men. 94b
, etc.: esp. in Hdt. in periphrases, τὰ τῶν ὀνειράτων, καρπῶν ἐχόμενα, 1.120, 193;ὀρνίθων ἢ ἰχθύων 2.77
; σιτίων, ἐσθῆτος, 3.25,66.II bear or hold for oneself, κρήδεμνα ἄντα παρειάων σχομένη before her cheeks, Od.1.334; ἀσπίδα πρόσθ' ἔσχετο his shield, Il.12.294, cf. 298, 20.262.IV keep oneself back, abstain or refrain from, ἀϋτῆς, μάχης, 2.98, 3.84;βίης Od.4.422
;ἐχώμεθα δηϊοτῆτος ἐκ βελέων Il.14.129
;τῆς ἀγωγῆς Hdt.6.85
;τῆς τιμωρίης Id.7.169
;τῶν ἀθίκτων S.OT 891
(lyr., s.v.l.): c.inf., A.R.1.328; ; κακῶν ἄπο χεῖρας ἔχεσθαι to keep one's hands from ill, Od.22.316;Μενέλεω σχέσθαι χέρα E.Rh. 174
: abs., σχέο, σχέσθε, hold! cease! Il.21.379, 22.416.V [voice] Pass. ofἔχω B. 1
, ἐπὶ ξυροῦ ἀκμῆς ἔχεται ἡμῖν τὰ πρήγματα are balanced on.., Hdt.6.11.------------------------------------ἔχω (B), -
17 ὁ
ὁ, [full] ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,A demonstr. Pronoun.B in [dialect] Att., definite or prepositive Article.C in [dialect] Ep., the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nom. masc. and fem. sg. and pl., ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codd. and most printed books, exc. when used as the relative ; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, αἳ ; the nom. forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by A.D.Pron.8.7 not to be enclitic. The forms τῶν, τοῖς, ταῖς were barytone (i. e. τὼν, τοὶς, ταὶς ) in [dialect] Aeol. acc. to Aristarch. ap. A.D.Synt.51.26. For οἱ, αἱ some dialects (not Cypr., cf. Inscr.Cypr.135.30H., nor Cret., cf.Leg.Gort. 5.28, nor Lesbian, cf. Alc.81, Sapph.Supp.5.1 ) and Hom. have τοί, ταί (though οἱ, αἱ are also found in Hom.): other Homeric forms are gen. sg. τοῖο, gen. and dat. dualτοῖιν Od.18.34
, al.: gen. pl. fem. τάων [pron. full] [ᾱ], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι, never ταῖσι or ταῖς in Hom.— In [dialect] Dor. and all other dialects exc. [dialect] Att. and [dialect] Ion. the fem. forms preserve the old [pron. full] ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence [dialect] Dor. etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶς ; the gen. pl. τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶν ; the gen. sg. is in many places τῶ, acc. pl. τώς, but Cret., etc., τόνς (Leg.Gort.7.7, al.) or τός (ib.3.50, al.) ; in Lesbian [dialect] Aeol. the acc. pl. forms are τοὶς, ταὶς, IG12(2).645 A13, B62 ; dat. pl. τοῖς, ταῖς (or τοὶς, ταὶς, v. supr.), ib.645 A8, ib.1.6 ; ταῖσι as demonstr., Sapph. 16. The [dialect] Att. Poets also used the [dialect] Ion. and [dialect] Ep. forms τοῖσι, ταῖσι ; and in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν.., τοὶ δέ.., for οἱ μέν.., οἱ δέ.., not only in lyr., as A.Pers. 584, Th. 295, 298 ;οἱ μέν.. τοὶ δ' S.Aj. 1404
(anap.) ; but even in a trimeter, A.Pers. 424. In [dialect] Att. the dual has usu. only one gender, τὼ θεώ (for τὰ θεά) And.1.113 sq. ; τὼ πόλεε Foed. ap. Th.5.23 ;τὼ ἡμέρα X.Cyr.1.2.11
;τὼ χεῖρε Id.Mem.2.3.18
;τοῖν χεροῖν Pl.Tht. 155e
;τοῖν γενεσέοιν Id.Phd. 71e
;τοῖν πολέοιν Isoc.4.75
(τά S.Ant. 769, Ar.Eq. 424, 484,ταῖν Lys.19.17
, Is.5.16, etc. have been corrected) ; in Arc. the form τοῖς functions as gen. dual fem., (Orchom., iv B.C.):—in Elean and [dialect] Boeot. ὁ, ἡ (ἁ), τό, with the addition of -ί, = ὅδε, ἥδε, τόδε, nom.pl. masc. τυΐ the following men, Schwyzer485.14 (Thespiae, iii B.C.), al., cf. infr. VIII. 5. (With ὁ, ἁ, cf. Skt. demonstr. pron. sa, sā, Goth. sa, sō, ONorse sá, sú, Old Lat. acc. sum, sam (Enn.): —with τό [from Τόδ] cf. Skt. tat (tad), Lat. is-tud, Goth. pata: —with τοί cf. Skt. te, Lith. tĩe, OE. pá, etc.:—with τάων cf. Skt. tāsām, Lat. is-tarum:— the origin of the relative ὅς, ἥ, ὅ (q. v.) is different.)A ὁ, ἡ, τό, DEMONSTR. PRONOUN, that, the oldest and in Hom. the commonest sense: freq. also in Hdt. (1.86,5.35,al.), and sts. in Trag. (mostly in lyr., A.Supp. 1047, etc.; in trimeters, Id.Th. 197, Ag.7, Eu. 174 ; τῶν γάρ.., τῆς γάρ.., Id.Supp. 358, S.OT 1082 ; seldom in [dialect] Att. Prose, exc. in special phrases, v. infr. VI, VII):I joined with a Subst., to call attention to it, ὁ Τυδεΐδης he—Tydeus' famous son, Il. 11.660; τὸν Χρύσην that venerable man Chryses, I.II: and so with Appellat., Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων N.— thataged man, 7.324 ; αἰετοῦ.. τοῦ θηρητῆρος the eagle, that which is called hunter, 21.252, al. ; also to define and give emphasis, τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, 20.181 ; οἴχετ' ἀνὴρ ὤριστος a man is gone, and he the best, 11.288, cf. 13.433, al.: sts. with words between the Pron. and Noun,αὐτὰρ ὁ αὖτε Πέλοψ 2.105
;τὸν Ἕκτορι μῦθον ἐνίσπες 11.186
, cf. 703, al.:—different from this are cases like Il.1.409 αἴ κέν πως ἐθέλῃσιν ἐπὶ Τρώεσσιν ἀρῆξαι, τοὺς δὲ κατὰ πρύμνας τε καὶ ἀμφ' ἅλα ἔλσαι Ἀχαιούς if he would help the Trojans, but drive those back to the ships— I mean the Achaeans, where Ἀχ. is only added to explain τούς, cf. 1.472, 4.20, 329, al.II freq. without a Subst., he, she, it,ὁ γὰρ ἦλθε Il.1.12
, al.III placed after its Noun, before the Relat. Prons., ἐφάμην σὲ περὶ φρένας ἔμμεναι ἄλλων, τῶν ὅσσοι Λυκίην ναιετάουσι far above the rest, above those to wit who, etc., Il.17.172 ; οἷ' οὔ πώ τιν' ἀκούομεν οὐδὲ παλαιῶν, τάων αἳ πάρος ἦσαν.. Ἀχαιαί such as we have not heard tell of yet even among the women of old, those women to wit who.., Od.2.119, cf. Il.5.332 ;θάλαμον τὸν ἀφίκετο, τόν ποτε τέκτων ξέσσεν Od.21.43
, cf. 1.116, 10.74 :—for the [dialect] Att. usage v. infr.IV before a Possessive Pron. its demonstr. force is sts. very manifest, φθίσει σε τὸ σὸν μένος that spirit of thine, Il.6.407, cf. 11.608 ; but in 15.58, 16.40, and elsewh. it is merely the Art.V for cases in which the Homeric usage approaches most nearly to the Attic, v. infr. B. init.VI ὁ μέν.., ὁ δέ.. without a Subst., in all cases, genders, and numbers, Hom., etc.: sts. in Opposition, where ὁ μέν prop. refers to the former, ὁ δέ to the latter ; more rarely ὁ μέν the latter, the former,Pl.
Prt. 359e, Isoc.2.32,34: sts. in Partition, the one.., the other.., etc.—The Noun with it is regularly in gen. pl., being divided by the ὁ μέν.., ὁ δέ.., into parts,ἠΐθεοι καὶ παρθένοι.., τῶν δ' αἱ μὲν λεπτὰς ὀθόνας ἔχον, οἱ δὲ χιτῶνας εἵατο Il.18.595
;τῶν πόλεων αἱ μὲν τυραννοῦνται, αἱ δὲ δημοκρατοῦνται, αἱ δὲ ἀριστοκρατοῦνται Pl.R. 338d
, etc.: but freq. the Noun is in the same case, by a kind of apposition,ἴδον υἷε Δάρητος, τὸν μὲν ἀλευάμενον τὸν δὲ κτάμενον Il.5.28
, cf. Od.12.73, etc.: so in Trag. and [dialect] Att., S.Ant. 22, etc. ;πηγὴ ἡ μὲν εἰς αὐτὸν ἔδυ, ἡ δὲ ἔξω ἀπορρεῖ Pl.Phdr. 255c
; if the Noun be collective, it is in the gen. sg.,ὁ μὲν πεπραμένος ἦν τοῦ σίτου, ὁ δὲ ἔνδον ἀποκείμενος D.42.6
: sts. a Noun is added in apposition with ὁ μέν orὁ δέ, ὁ μὲν οὔτασ' Ἀτύμνιον ὀξέϊ δουρὶ Ἀντίλοχος.., Μάρις δὲ.. Il.16.317
-19, cf. 116 ;τοὺς μὲν τὰ δίκαια ποιεῖν ἠνάγκασα, τοὺς πλουσίους, τοὺς δὲ πένητας κτλ. D.18.102
, cf. Pl.Grg. 501a, etc.2 when a neg. accompanies ὁ δέ, it follows δέ, e.g. ;τὸν φιλόσοφον σοφίας ἐπιθυμητὴν εἶναι, οὐ τῆς μὲν τῆς δ' οὔ, ἀλλὰ πάσης Pl.R. 475b
;οὐ πάσας χρὴ τὰς δόξας τιμᾶν, ἀλλὰ τὰς μὲν τὰς δ' οὔ· οὐδὲ πάντων, ἀλλὰ τῶν μὲν τῶν δ' οὔ Id.Cri. 47a
, etc.3 ὁ μέν τις.., ὁ δέ τις.. is used in Prose, when the Noun to which ὁ refers is left indefinite,ἔλεγον ὁ μέν τις τὴν σοφίαν, ὁ δὲ τὴν καρτερίαν.., ὁ δέ τις καὶ τὸ κάλλος X.Cyr.3.1.41
;νόμους.. τοὺς μὲν ὀρθῶς τιθέασιν τοὺς δέ τινας οὐκ ὀρθῶς Pl.R. 339c
, cf. Phlb. 13c.4 on τὸ μέν.., τὸ δέ.., or τὰ μέν.., τὰ δέ.., v. infr. VIII.4.5 ὁ μέν is freq. used without a correspondingὁ δέ, οἱ μὲν ἄρ' ἐσκίδναντο.., Μυρμιδόνας δ' οὐκ εἴα ἀποσκίδνασθαι Il.23.3
, cf. 24.722, Th.8.12, etc.: also folld. byἀλλά, ἡ μὲν γάρ μ' ἐκέλευε.., ἀλλ' ἐγὼ οὐκ ἔθελον Od.7.304
; by ἄλλος δέ, Il.6.147, etc. ;τὸν μὲν.., ἕτερον δέ Ar.Av. 843
, etc. ;ὁ μέν.., ὃς δέ.. Thgn.205
(v.l. οὐδέ): less freq. ὁ δέ in the latter clause without ὁ μέν preceding, τῇ ῥα παραδραμέτην φεύγων, ὁ δ' ὄπισθε διώκων (for ὁ μὲν φεύγων) Il.22.157 ;σφραγῖδε.. χρυσοῦν ἔχουσα τὸν δακτύλιον, ἡ δ' ἑτέρα ἀργυροῦν IG22.1388.45
, cf.μέν D.
III ;γεωργὸς μὲν εἷς, ὁ δὲ οἰκοδόμος, ἄλλος δέ τις ὑφαντής Pl.R. 369d
, cf. Tht. 181d.6 ὁ δέ following μέν sts. refers to the subject of the preceding clause,τοῦ μὲν ἅμαρθ', ὁ δὲ Λεῦκον.. βεβλήκει Il. 4.491
;τὴν μὲν γενομένην αὐτοῖσι αἰτίην οὐ μάλα ἐξέφαινε, ὁ δὲ ἔλεγέ σφι Hdt.6.3
, cf. 1.66,6.9, 133,7.6 : rare in [dialect] Att. Prose,ἐπεψήφιζεν αὐτὸς ἔφορος ὤν· ὁ δὲ οὐκ ἔφη διαγιγνώσκειν τὴν βοήν Th.1.87
;ἔμενον ὡς κατέχοντες τὸ ἄκρον· οἱ δ' οὐ κατεῖχον X.An.4.2.6
: this is different from ὁ δέ in apodosi, v. infr. 7 ; also from passages in which both clauses have a common verb, v. ὅ γε 11.7 ὁ δέ is freq. used simply in continuing a narrative, Il.1.43, etc.; also used by Hom. in apodosi after a relat., v. ὅδε 111.3.8 the opposition may be expressed otherwise than by μέν andδέ, οὔθ' ὁ.. οὔθ' ὁ Il.15.417
;ἢ τοῖσιν ἢ τοῖς A.Supp. 439
;οὔτε τοῖς οὔτε τοῖς Pl.Lg. 701e
.VII the following usages prevailed in [dialect] Att. Prose,1 in dialogue, after καί, it was usual to say in nom. sg. masc. καὶ ὅς ; in the other cases the usual forms of the Art. were used (v.ὅς A.
II.I and cf. Skt. sas, alternat. form of sa) ; so, in acc.,καὶ τὸν εἰπεῖν Pl.Smp. 174a
, cf. X.Cyr.1.3.9, etc.; also in Hdt.,καὶ τὴν φράσαι 6.61
, al.2 ὁ καὶ ὁ such and such,τῇ καὶ τῇ ἀτιμίᾳ Pl.Lg. 721b
: but mostly in acc.,καί μοι κάλει τὸν καὶ τόν Lys.1.23
, cf. Pl.Lg. 784d ;τὰ καὶ τὰ πεπονθώς D.21.141
, cf. 9.68 ;τὸ καὶ τό Id.18.243
; ἀνάγκη ἄρα τὸ καὶ τό it must then be so and so, Arist.Rh. 1401a4, cf. 1413a22 ; but τὰ καὶ τά now one thing, now another, of good and bad, , cf. Pi.P.5.55,7.20, al.;τῶν τε καὶ τῶν καιρόν Id.O. 2.53
; so πάντα τοῦ μετρίου μεταβαλλόμενα ἐπὶ τὰ καὶ ἐπὶ τά, of excess and defect, Hp.Acut.46 ; cf. A. VI.8.VIII abs. usages of single cases,1 fem. dat. τῇ, of Place, there, on that spot, here, this way, that way, Il.5.752, 858, al.: folld. by ᾗ, 13.52, etc.: also in Prose,τὸ μὲν τῇ, τὸ δὲ τῇ X.Ath.2.12
.b with a notion of motion towards, that way, in that direction, Il.10.531,11.149, 12.124 ;τῇ ἴμεν ᾗ.. 15.46
; :—only poet.c of Manner, in this way, thus,Od.
8.510.d repeated, τῇ μέν.., τῇ δέ.., in one way.., in another.., or partly.., partly.., E.Or. 356, Pl.Smp. 211a, etc.: withoutμέν, τῇ μᾶλλον, τῇ δ' ἧσσον Parm.8.48
.e relat., where, by which way, only [dialect] Ep., as Il.12.118, Od.4.229.2 neut. dat. τῷ, therefore, on this account, freq. in Hom., Il.1.418, 2.254, al. (v. infr.): also in Trag., A.Pr. 239, S.OT 510 (lyr.) ; in Prose,τῷ τοι.. Pl.Tht. 179d
, Sph. 230b.b thus, so, Il.2.373, 13.57, etc.: it may also, esp. when εἰ precedes, be translated, then, if this be so, on this condition, Od.1.239,3.224, 258,al., Theoc.29.11.—In Hom. the true form is prob. τῶ, as in cod. A, or τώ, cf. A.D.Adv.199.2.3 neut. acc. τό, wherefore, Il.3.176, Od.8.332, al., S.Ph. 142(lyr.) ; also τὸ δέ abs., but the fact is.., Pl.Ap. 23a, Men. 97c, Phd. 109d, Tht. 157b, R. 340d, Lg. 967a ; even when the τό refers to what precedes, the contrast may lie not in the thing referred to, but in another part of the sentence (cf. supr. VI. 6),τὸ δ' ἐπὶ κακουργίᾳ.. ἐπετήδευσαν Th.1.37
;τὸ δὲ.. ἡμῖν μᾶλλον περιέσται Id.2.89
; φασὶ δέ τινες αὐτὸν καὶ τῶν ἑπτὰ σοφῶν γεγονέναι· τὸ δὲ οὐκ ἦν but he was not, Nic.Dam.58J.4 τὸ μέν.., τὸ δέ.., partly.., partly.., or on the one hand.., on the other.., Th.7.36, etc., cf.Od.2.46 ; more freq. τὰ μέν.., τὰ δέ.., Hdt.1.173, S.Tr. 534, etc.; alsoτὰ μέν τι.., τὰ δέ τι.. X.An.4.1.14
;τὸ μέν τι.., τὸ δέ τι.. Luc.Macr.14
;τὰ μέν.., τὸ δὲ πλέον.. Th.1.90
: sts. without τὸ μέν.. in the first clause,τὸ δέ τι Id.1.107
,7.48 : rarely of Time, τὰ μὲν πολλὰ.., τέλος δέ several times.. and finally, Hdt.3.85.5 of Time, sts. that time, sts. this (present) time, συνμαχία κ' ἔα ἑκατὸν ϝέτεα, ἄρχοι δέ κα τοΐ (where it is possible, but not necessary, to supply ϝέτος) SIG9.3 (Olympia, vi B.C.): so with Preps., ἐκ τοῦ, [dialect] Ep. τοῖο, from that time, Il.1.493,15.601.b πρὸ τοῦ, sts. written προτοῦ, before this, aforetime, Hdt.1.103, 122,5.55, A.Ag. 1204, Ar.Nu.5, etc.;ἐν τῷ πρὸ τοῦ χρόνῳ Th.1.32
, cf. A.Eu. 462 ;τὸ πρὸ τοῦ D.S.20.59
.c in Thess. Prose, ὑππρὸ τᾶς yesterday, τὰ ψαφίσματα τό τε ὑππρὸ τᾶς γενόμενον καὶ τὸ τᾶμον the decree which was passed yesterday (lit. before this [day]), and to-day's, IG9(2).517.43 (Larissa, iii B.C.).6 ἐν τοῖς is freq. used in Prose with Superlatives, ἐν τοῖσι θειότατον a most marvellous thing, Hdt.7.137 ; ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι the very first, Th.1.6, etc.; ἐν τοῖσι πρῶτος ( πρώτοις codd.) Pherecr.145.4 ; [Ζεὺς] Ἔρωτά τε καὶ Ἀνάγκην ἐν τοῖς πρῶτα ἐγέννησεν first of all, Aristid. Or.43(1).16, cf. 37(2).2: when used with fem. Nouns, ἐν τοῖς remained without change of gender, ἐν τοῖς πλεῖσται δὴ νῆες the greatest number of ships, Th.3.17; ἐν τοῖς πρώτη ἐγένετο (sc. ἡ στάσις) ib.82 : also with Advbs.,ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα Id.8.90
, Pl.Cri. 52a, Plu.2.74e, 421d, 723e, Brut.6, 11,al., Paus.1.16.3, etc.;ἐν τοῖς χαλεπώτατα Th.7.71
; : in late Prose, also with Positives,ἐν τοῖς παράδοξον Aristid.Or.48(24).47
codd.; withπάνυ, ἐν τοῖς πάνυ D.H.1.19
, cf. 66 ( ἐν ταῖς πάνυ f.l. 4.14,15).B ὁ, ἡ, τό, THE DEFINITE ARTICLE, the, to specify individuals: rare in this signf. in the earliest Gr., becoming commoner later. In Hom. the demonstr. force can generally be traced, v. supr. A. I, but the definite Art. must be recognized in places like Il.1.167,7.412, 9.309, 12.289, Od.19.372 : also when joined to an Adj. to make it a Subst., the hindmost man,Il.
11.178 ;τὸν ἄριστον 17.80
;τὸν δύστηνον 22.59
;τὸν προὔχοντα 23.325
; τῷ πρώτῳ.., τῷ δευτέρῳ.., etc., ib. 265sq. ; also inτῶν ἄλλων 2.674
, al.: with Advs.,τὸ πρίν 24.543
, al.;τὸ πάρος περ 17.720
;τὸ πρόσθεν 23.583
; also τὸ τρίτον ib. 733 ;τὰ πρῶτα 1.6
,al.; τὸ μὲν ἄλλο for the rest, 23.454 ;ἀνδρῶν τῶν τότε 9.559
.—The true Art., however, is first fully established in fifth-cent. [dialect] Att., whilst the demonstr. usage disappears, exc. in a few cases, V. A. VI-VIII.—Chief usages, esp. in [dialect] Att.I not only with common Appellats., Adjs., and Parts., to specify them as present to sense or mind, but also freq. where we use the Possessive Pron.,τὸ κέαρ ηὐφράνθην Ar.Ach.5
; τὴν κεφαλὴν κατεάγην my head was broken, And.1.61, etc. ; τοὺς φίλους ποιούμεθα we make our friends, S.Ant. 190 ; τὰς πόλεις ἔκτιζον they began founding their cities, Th.1.12; .b omitted with pr.nn.and freq. with Appellats. which require no specification, as θεός, βασιλεύς, v. θεός 1.1, βασιλεύς III ; ἐμ πόλει in the Acropolis, IG12.4.1, al.: but added to pr. nn., when attention is to be called to the previous mention of the person, as Th. (3.70 ) speaks first of Πειθίας and then refers to him repeatedly as ὁ Π.; cf. Θράσυλος in Id.8.104, with ὁ Θ. ib. 105 ; or when the person spoken of is to be specially distinguished, Ζεύς, ὅστις ὁ Ζεύς whoever this Zeus is, E.Fr. 480 ; and therefore properly omitted when a special designation follows, as Σωκράτης ὁ φιλόσοφος: seldom in Trag. with pr. nn., save to give pecul. emphasis, like Lat. ille, ὁ Λάϊος, ὁ Φοῖβος, S.OT 729, El.35, etc.: later, however, the usage became very common (the Homeric usage of ὁ with a pr. n. is different, v. A.I).c Aristotle says Σωκράτης meaning the historical Socrates, as in SE183b7, PA642a28, al., but ὁ Σωκράτης when he means the Platonic Socrates, as Pol.1261a6, al.: so with other pr.nn., EN1145a21, 1146a21, al.2 in a generic sense, where the individual is treated as a type,οἷς ὁ γέρων μετέῃσιν.. λεύσσει Il.3.109
;πονηρὸν ὁ συκοφάντης D.18.242
, etc.b freq. with abstract Nouns,ἥ τε ἐλπὶς καὶ ὁ ἔρως Th.3.45
, etc.3 of outstanding members of a class, ὁ γεωγράφος, ὁ κωμικός, ὁ ποιητής, ὁ τεχνικός, v. γεωγράφος, κωμικός, ποιητής, τεχνικός.4 with infs., which thereby become Substs., τὸ εἴργειν prevention, Pl.Grg. 505b ; τὸ φρονεῖν good sense, S.Ant. 1348(anap.), etc.: when the subject is expressed it is put between the Art.and the inf., τὸ θεοὺς εἶναι the existence of gods, Pl.Phd. 62b ; τὸ μηδένα εἶναι ὄλβιον the fact or statement that no one is happy, Hdt.1.86.5 in neut. before any word or expression which itself is made the object of thought, τὸ ἄνθρωπος the word or notion man ; τὸ λέγω the word λέγω ; τὸ μηδὲν ἄγαν the sentiment 'ne quid nimis', E.Hipp. 265(lyr.); τὸ τῇ αὐτῇ the phrase τῇ αὐτῇ, Pl.Men. 72e : and so before whole clauses, ἡ δόξα.. περὶ τοῦ οὕστινας δεῖ ἄρχειν the opinion about the question 'who ought to rule', Id.R. 431e ; τὸ ἐὰν μένητε παρ' ἐμοί, ἀποδώσω the phrase 'I will give back, if.. ', X.Cyr. 5.1.21, cf. Pl.R. 327c, etc.;τοὺς τοῦ τί πρακτέον λογισμούς D.23.148
; τὸ ὀλίγοι the term few, Arist.Pol. 1283b11.6 before relat. clauses, when the Art. serves to combine the whole relat. clause into one notion, τῇ ᾗ φὴς σὺ σκληρότητι the harshness you speak of, Pl.Cra. 435a ; τὸν ἥμερον καρπόν.., καὶ τὸν ὅσος ξύλινος (i.e. καὶ τὸν καρπὸν ὅσος ἂν ᾖ ξύλινος) Id.Criti. 115b ;τῶν ὅσοι ἂν.. ἀγαθοὶ κριθῶσιν Id.R. 469b
;ἐκ γῆς καὶ πυρὸς μείξαντες καὶ τῶν ὅσα πυρὶ καὶ γῇ κεράννυται Id.Prt. 320d
, cf. Hyp.Lyc.2 ;ταύτην τε τὴν αἰτίαν καὶ τὴν ὅθεν ἡ κίνησις Arist.Metaph. 987a8
;τὸν ὃς ἔφη Lys.23.8
: hence the relat., by attraction, freq. follows the case of the Art., τοῖς οἵοις ἡμῖν τε καὶ ὑμῖν, i.e. τοῖς οὖσιν οἷοι ἡμεῖς καὶ ὑμεῖς, X.HG2.3.25, etc.7 before Prons.,a before the pers. Prons., giving them greater emphasis, but only in acc., ,Phlb. 20b ; τὸν.. σὲ καὶ ἐμέ ib. 59b ; ; on ὁ αὐτός, v. αὐτός 111.b before the interrog. Pron. (both τίς and ποῖος), referring to something before, which needs to be more distinctly specified, A.Pr. 251, Ar. Pax 696 ; also τὰ τί; because οἷα went before, ib. 693. Of τίς only the neut. is thus used (v.supr.): ποῖος is thus used not only in neut. pl., τὰ ποῖα; E.Ph. 707 ; but also in the other genders, ὁ ποῖος; ib. 1704 ; τῆς ποίας μερίδος; D.18.64 ; τοῖς ποίοις.. ; Arist.Ph. 227b1.c with τοιοῦτος, τοιόσδε, τηλικοῦτος, etc., the Art. either makes the Pron. into a Subst., that sort of person,X.
Mem.4.2.21, etc.; or subjoins it to a Subst. which already has an Art.,τὴν ἀπολογίαν τὴν τοιαύτην D.41.13
.8 before ἅπας, Pi.N.1.69, Hdt.3.64, 7.153 (s.v.l.), S.OC 1224 (lyr.), D.18.231, etc.; also τὸν ἕνα, τὸν ἕνα τοῦτον, Arist.Pol. 1287b8, 1288a19 : on its usage with ἕκαστος, v. sub voc.; and on οἱ ἄλλοι, οἱ πολλοί, etc., v. ἄλλος 11.6,πολύς 11.3
, etc.II elliptic expressions:1 before the gen. of a pr.<*>., to express descent, son or daughter, Θουκυδίδης ὁ Ὀλόρου (sc. υἱός) Th.4.104 ; Ἑλένη ἡ τοῦ Διός (sc. θυγάτηρ) E.Hel. 470 : also to denote other relationships, e.g. brother, Lys.32.24, Alciphr.2.2.10 ; ἡ Σμικυθίωνος Μελιστίχη M. the wife of S., Ar.Ec.46 ; Κλέαρχος καὶ οἱ ἐκείνου Cl. and his men, X.An.1.2.15 ; ὁ τοῦ Ἀντιγένεος the slave of A., Hp.Hum.20.2 generally, before a gen. it indicates a wider relation, as τὸ τῶν νεῶν, τὸ τῶν Ἑρμῶν, the matter of the ships, the affair of the Hermae, Th.4.23,6.60 ; τὰ τοῦ Ἀρριβαίου πράσσειν to promote the interests of Arrhibaeus, Id.4.83, cf. 6.89, etc.; τὸ τῆς τύχης,=ἡ τύχη, Id.4.18 ; τὰ τῆς τύχης accidents, chance events, ib.55 ; τὰ γὰρ φθιτῶν τοῖς ὁρῶσι κόσμος performance of the rites due to the dead befits the living, E.Supp.78(lyr.); τὰ τῶν θεῶν that which is destined by the gods, S.Tr. 498(lyr.): hence with neut. of Possessive Pron., τὸ ἐμόν, τὸ σόν, what regards me or thee, my or thy business or interests, S.Aj. 124, El. 251, etc.: and with gen. of 3 pers.,τὸ τῆσδε E.Hipp.48
. But τό τινος is freq. also, a man's word or saying, asτὸ τοῦ Σόλωνος Hdt.1.86
; τὸ τοῦ Ὁμήρου as Homer says, Pl.Tht. 183e ; also τά τινος so-and-so's house, Ar.V. 1432, D.54.7, Theoc.2.76, Herod.5.52, Ev.Luc.2.49.3 very freq. with cases governed by Preps.. αἱ ἐκ τῆς Ζακύνθου νῆες the ships from Zacynthus, Th.4.13 ; οἱ ἀμφί τινα, οἱ περί τινα, such an one and his followers, v. ἀμφί c.1.3, περί c.1.2 ; also τὰ ἐπὶ Θρᾴκης the Thrace-ward district, Th.1.59, al.; τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ καταστρώματος matters on deck, Id.7.70 ; τὰ ἀπ' Ἀλκιβιάδου the proposals of Alcibiades, Id.8.48 ; τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς τύχης the incidents of fortune, Id.2.87, etc.4 on μὰ τόν, μὰ τήν, etc., v. μά IV.5 in elliptical phrases, ἐπορευόμην τὴν ἔξω τείχους (sc. ὁδόν) Pl.Ly. 203a ; ἡ ἐπὶ θανάτῳ (sc. στολή, δέσις), v. θάνατος; κατὰ τὴν ἐμήν (sc. γνώμην), v. ἐμός 11.4 ; ἡ αὔριον (sc. ἡμέρα), v. αὔριον; ἡ Λυδιστί (sc. ἁρμονία) Arist.Pol. 1342b32, etc.: freq. with Advs., which thus take an adj. sense, as ὁ, ἡ, τὸ νῦν;ὁ οἴκαδε πλοῦς Th.1.52
; οἱ τότε, οἱ ἔπειτα (sc. ἄνθρωποι), ib.9,10, etc. ; but τό stands abs. with Advs. of time and place, when one cannot (as in the preceding instances) supply a Subst., asκἀκεῖσε καὶ τὸ δεῦρο E.Ph. 266
, cf.[315] (lyr.);ὁ μὲν τὸ κεῖθεν, ὁ δὲ τὸ κεῖθεν Id.Or. 1412
(lyr.): rarely abs. in gen., ἰέναι τοῦ πρόσω to go forward, X.An.1.3.1 ;τοῦ προσωτάτω δραμεῖν S.Aj. 731
.C as RELATIVE PRONOUN in many dialects ; both in nom. sg. masc. ὅ, asκλῦθί μοι, ὃ χθιζὸς θεὸς ἤλυθες Od.2.262
, cf. 1.300, al. ;Ἔρως, ὃ κατ' ὀμμάτων στάζεις πόθον E.Hipp. 526
(lyr.);Ἄδωνις, ὃ κἠν Ἀχέροντι φιλεῖται Theoc.15.86
; ὃ ἐξορύξη he who banishes him, Schwyzer679.12,25 ([place name] Cyprus) ; and in the forms beginning with τ, esp. in Hom. (Od.4.160, al.), Hdt.1.7, al.: also in [dialect] Ion. Poets,ἐν τῷ κάθημαι Archil.87.3
, cf. Semon.7.3, Anacr.86 (prob.), Herod.2.64, al.: freq. in Trag., , Tr. 381, 728, E.Alc. 883 (anap.);τῷ S.Ph.14
; , Tr.47, El. 1144 ; τό Id.OT 1427 ; τῶν ib. 1379, Ant. 1086.—Never in Com. or [dialect] Att. Prose:—[dialect] Ep. gen. sg.τεῦ Il.18.192
(s.v.l.).D CRASIS OF ARTICLE:a [dialect] Att. ὁ, ἡ, τό, with [pron. full] ᾰ make ᾱ, as ἁνήρ, ἁλήθεια, τἀγαθόν, τᾄτιον; so οἱ, αἱ, τά, as ἅνδρες, τἀγαθά; also τοῦ, τῷ, as τἀγαθοῦ, τἀγαθῷ: ὁ, τό, οἱ, before e gives ου, οὑξ, οὑπί, οὑμός, τοὔργον, οὑπιχώριοι, etc.; also τοῦ, as τοὐμοῦ, τοὐπιόντος; but ἅτερος, θάτερον ([pron. full] ¯ ?ὁX?ὁX), [dialect] Ion. οὕτερος, τοὔτερον (v. ἕτερος), [dialect] Att. fem. ἡτέρα, dat. θητέρᾳ (v. ἕτερος); τῷ loses the iota, τὠμῷ, τὠπιόντι: ὁ, τό, before ο gives ου, as Οὁδυσσεύς, Οὑλύμπιος, τοὔνομα: ὁ, τό, etc., before αυ gives ᾱυ, αὑτός, ταὐτό, ταὐτῷ (freq. written ἁτός, etc. in Inscrr. and Pap.); so τὰ αὐτά=ταὐτά, αἱ αὐταί= αὑταί: ἡ before εὐ gives ηὑ, as ηὑλάβεια: τῇ before ἡ gives θη, as θἠμέρᾳ: τὸ before ὑ gives θου, as θοὔδωρ for τὸ ὕδωρ. -
18 πνεῦμα
πνεῦμα, ατος, τό (πνέω; Aeschyl., Pre-Socr., Hdt.+. On the history of the word s. Rtzst., Mysterienrel.3 308ff).① air in movement, blowing, breathing (even the glowing exhalations of a volcanic crater: Diod S 5, 7, 3)ⓐ wind (Aeschyl. et al.; LXX, EpArist, Philo; Jos., Ant. 2, 343; 349; SibOr 8, 297) in wordplay τὸ πνεῦμα πνεῖ the wind blows J 3:8a (EpJer 60 πνεῦμα ἐν πάσῃ χώρᾳ πνεῖ. But s. TDonn, ET 66, ’54f, 32; JThomas, Restoration Qtrly 24, ’81, 219–24). ὀθόνη πλοίου ὑπὸ πνεύματος πληρουμένη MPol 15:2. Of God ὁ ποιῶν τοὺς ἀγγέλους αὐτοῦ πνεύματα who makes his angels winds Hb 1:7; 1 Cl 36:3 (both Ps 103:4).ⓑ the breathing out of air, blowing, breath (Aeschyl. et al.; Pla., Tim. 79b; LXX) ὁ ἄνομος, ὅν ὁ κύριος Ἰησοῦς ἀνελεῖ τῷ πνεύματι τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 2 Th 2:8 (cp. Is 11:4; Ps 32:6).② that which animates or gives life to the body, breath, (life-)spirit (Aeschyl. et al.; Phoenix of Colophon 1, 16 [Coll. Alex. p. 231] πν.=a breathing entity [in contrast to becoming earth in death]; Polyb. 31, 10, 4; Ps.-Aristot., De Mundo 4 p. 394b, 8ff; PHib 5, 54 [III B.C.]; PGM 4, 538; 658; 2499; LXX; TestAbr A 17 p. 98, 19 [Stone p. 44] al.; JosAs 19:3; SibOr 4, 46; Tat. 4:2) ἀφιέναι τὸ πνεῦμα give up one’s spirit, breathe one’s last (Eur., Hec. 571; Porphyr., Vi. Plotini 2) Mt 27:50. J says for this παραδιδόναι τὸ πν. 19:3 (cp. ApcMos 31 ἀποδῶ τὸ πν.; Just., D. 105, 5). Of the return of the (life-)spirit of a deceased person into her dead body ἐπέστρεψεν τὸ πν. αὐτῆς Lk 8:55 (cp. Jdg 15:19). εἰς χεῖράς σου παρατίθεμαι τὸ πν. μου into your hands I entrust my spirit 23:46 (Ps 30:6; for alleged focus on ἐλπίζειν s. EBons, BZ 38, ’94, 93–101). κύριε Ἰησοῦ, δέξαι τὸ πνεῦμά μου Ac 7:59; composite of both passages AcPl Ha 10, 23 (cp. ApcMos 42). τὸ πν. μου ὁ δεσπότης δέξεται GJs 23:3 (on the pneuma flying upward after death cp. Epicharm. in Vorsokrat. 23 [=13, 4th ed.], B 9 and 22; Eur., Suppl. 533 πνεῦμα μὲν πρὸς αἰθέρα, τὸ σῶμα δʼ ἐς γῆν; PGM 1, 177ff τελευτήσαντός σου τὸ σῶμα περιστελεῖ, σοῦ δὲ τὸ πνεῦμα … εἰς ἀέρα ἄξει σὺν αὑτῷ ‘when you are dead [the angel] will wrap your body … and take your spirit with him into the sky’). τὸ σῶμα χωρὶς πν. νεκρόν ἐστιν Js 2:26. πν. ζωῆς ἐκ τ. θεοῦ εἰσῆλθεν ἐν αὐτοῖς (i.e. the prophet-witnesses who have been martyred) Rv 11:11 (cp. Ezk 37:10 v.l. εἰσῆλθεν εἰς αὐτοὺς πνεῦμα ζωῆς; vs. 5). Of the spirit that animated the image of a beast, and enabled it to speak and to have Christians put to death 13:15.—After a person’s death, the πν. lives on as an independent being, in heaven πνεύματα δικαὶων τετελειωμένων Hb 12:23 (cp. Da 3:86 εὐλογεῖτε, πνεύματα καὶ ψυχαὶ δικαίων, τὸν κύριον). According to non-biblical sources, the πν. are in the netherworld (cp. En 22:3–13; Sib Or 7, 127) or in the air (PGM 1, 178), where evil spirits can prevent them from ascending higher (s. ἀήρ2b). τοῖς ἐν φυλακῇ πνεύμασιν πορευθεὶς ἐκήρυξεν 1 Pt 3:19 belongs here if it refers to Jesus’ preaching to the spirits of the dead confined in Hades (so Usteri et al.; s. also JMcCulloch, The Harrowing of Hell, 1930), whether it be when he descended into Hades, or when he returned to heaven (so RBultmann, Bekenntnis u. Liedfragmente im 1 Pt: ConNeot11, ’47, 1–14).—CClemen, Niedergefahren zu den Toten 1900; JTurmel, La Descente du Christ aux enfers 1905; JMonnier, La Descente aux enfers 1906; HHoltzmann, ARW 11, 1908, 285–97; KGschwind, Die Niederfahrt Christi in die Unterwelt 1911; DPlooij, De Descensus in 1 Pt 3:19 en 4:6: TT 47, 1913, 145–62; JBernard, The Descent into Hades a Christian Baptism (on 1 Pt 3:19ff): Exp. 8th ser., 11, 1916, 241–74; CSchmidt, Gespräche Jesu mit seinen Jüngern: TU 43, 1919, 452ff; JFrings, BZ 17, 1926, 75–88; JKroll, Gott u. Hölle ’32; RGanschinietz, Katabasis: Pauly-W. X/2, 1919, 2359–449; Clemen2 89–96; WBieder, Die Vorstellung v. d. Höllenfahrt Jesu Chr. ’49; SJohnson, JBL 79, ’60, 48–51; WDalton, Christ’s Proclamation to the Spirits ’65. S. also the lit. in Windisch, Hdb.2 1930, exc. on 1 Pt 3:20; ESelwyn, The First Ep. of St. Peter ’46 and 4c below.—This is prob. also the place for θανατωθεὶς μὲν σαρκὶ ζωοποιηθεὶς δὲ πνεύματι• ἐν ᾧ καὶ … 1 Pt 3:18f (some mss. read πνεύματι instead of πνεύμασιν in vs. 19, evidently in ref. to the manner of Jesus’ movement; πνεῦμα is that part of Christ which, in contrast to σάρξ, did not pass away in death, but survived as an individual entity after death; s. ἐν 7). Likew. the contrast κατὰ σάρκα … κατὰ πνεῦμα Ro 1:3f. Cp. 1 Ti 3:16.③ a part of human personality, spiritⓐ when used with σάρξ, the flesh, it denotes the immaterial part 2 Cor 7:1; Col 2:5. Flesh and spirit=the whole personality, in its outer and inner aspects, oft. in Ign.: IMg 1:2; 13:1a; ITr ins; 12:1; IRo ins; ISm 1:1; IPol 5:1; AcPl Ant 13, 18 (=Aa I 237, 3).—In the same sense beside σῶμα, the body (Simplicius, In Epict. p. 50, 1; Ps.-Phoc. 106f; PGM 1, 178) 1 Cor 5:3–5; 7:34.—The inner life of humans is divided into ψυχὴ καὶ πνεῦμα (cp. Ps.-Pla., Axioch. 10 p. 370c τὶ θεῖον ὄντως ἐνῆν πνεῦμα τῇ ψυχῇ=a divine spirit was actually in the soul; Wsd 15:11; Jos., Ant. 1, 34; Tat. 13, 2; 15, 1 et al.; Ath. 27, 1. S. also Herm. Wr. 10, 13; 16f; PGM 4, 627; 630. ἐκ τριῶν συνεστάναι λέγουσι τὸν ἄνθρωπον ἐκ ψυχῆς καὶ σώματος καὶ πνεύματος Did., Gen. 55, 14) Hb 4:12. Cp. Phil 1:27. τὸ πνεῦμα καὶ ἡ ψυχὴ καὶ τὸ σῶμα 1 Th 5:23 (s. GMilligan, Thess. 1908, 78f; EvDobschütz in Meyer X7 1909, 230ff; EBurton, Spirit, Soul, and Flesh 1918; AFestugière, La Trichotomie des 1 Th 5:23 et la Philos. gr.: RSR 20, 1930, 385–415; CMasson, RTP 33, ’45, 97–102; FGrant, An Introd. to NT Thought ’50, 161–66). σαρκί, ψυχῇ, πνεύματι IPhld 11:2.ⓑ as the source and seat of insight, feeling, and will, gener. as the representative part of human inner life (cp. PGM 4, 627; 3 Km 20:5; Sir 9:9 al.; Just., D. 30, 1; Did., Gen. 232, 5) ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πν. αὐτοῦ Mk 2:8. ἀναστενάξας τῷ πν. αὐτοῦ λέγει 8:12 (s. ἀναστενάζω). ἠγαλλίασεν τὸ πν. μου Lk 1:47 (in parallelism w. ψυχή vs. 46, as Sir 9:9). ἠγαλλιάσατο τῷ πν. 10:21 v.l., Ἰησοῦς ἐνεβριμήσατο τῷ πν. J 11:33 (s. ἐμβριμάομαι 3); Ἰης. ἐταράχθη τῷ πν. 13:21. παρωξύνετο τὸ πν. αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ Ac 17:16; ζέων τῷ πν. with spirit-fervor 18:25 (s. ζέω). τὸ παιδίον ἐκραταιοῦτο πνεύματι Lk 1:80; 2:40 v.l.; ἔθετο ὁ Παῦλος ἐν τῷ πν. Paul made up his mind Ac 19:21 (some would put this pass. in 6c, but cp. Lk 1:66 and analogous formulations Hom. et al. in L-S-J-M s.v. τίθημι A6). προσκυνήσουσιν τῷ πατρὶ ἐν πνεύματι of the spiritual, i.e. the pure, inner worship of God, that has nothing to do w. holy times, places, appurtenances, or ceremonies J 4:23; cp. vs. 24b. πν. συντετριμμένον (Ps 50:19) 1 Cl 18:17; 52:4.—2 Cl 20:4; Hv 3, 12, 2; 3, 13, 2.—This usage is also found in Paul. His conviction (s. 5 below) that the Christian possesses the (divine) πνεῦμα and thus is different fr. all other people, leads him to choose this word in preference to others, in order to characterize a believer’s inner being gener. ᾧ λατρεύω ἐν τῷ πν. μου Ro 1:9. οὐκ ἔσχηκα ἄνεσιν τῷ πν. μου 2 Cor 2:13. Cp. 7:13. As a matter of fact, it can mean simply a person’s very self or ego: τὸ πνεῦμα συμμαρτυρεῖ τῷ πνεύματι ἡμῶν the Spirit (of God) bears witness to our very self Ro 8:16 (cp. PGM 12, 327 ἠκούσθη μου τὸ πνεῦμα ὑπὸ πνεύματος οὐρανοῦ). ἀνέπαυσαν τὸ ἐμὸν πν. καὶ τὸ ὑμῶν they have refreshed both me and you 1 Cor 16:18. ἡ χάρις τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰ. Χρ. μετά τοῦ πν. (ὑμῶν) Gal 6:18; Phil 4:23; Phlm 25. Cp. 2 Ti 4:22. Likew. in Ign. τὸ ἐμὸν πν. my (unworthy) self IEph 18:1; IRo 9:3; cp. 1 Cor 2:11a—On the relation of the divine Spirit to the believer’s spiritual self, s. SWollenweider, Der Geist Gottes als Selbst der Glaubenden: ZTK 93, ’96, 163–92.—Only a part of the inner life, i.e. that which concerns the will, is meant in τὸ μὲν πνεῦμα πρόθυμον, ἡ δὲ σὰρξ ἀσθενής Mt 26:41; Mk 14:38; Pol 7:2. That which is inferior, anxiety, fear of suffering, etc. is attributed to the σάρξ.—The mng. of the expr. οἱ πτωχοὶ τῷ πνεύματι Mt 5:3 is difficult to determine w. certainty (cp. Pla., Ep. 7, 335a πένης ἀνὴρ τὴν ψυχήν. The dat. as τῇ ψυχῇ M. Ant. 6, 52; 8, 51). The sense is prob. those who are poor in their inner life, because they do not have a misdirected pride in their own spiritual riches (s. AKlöpper, Über den Sinn u. die ursprgl. Form der ersten Seligpreisung der Bergpredigt bei Mt: ZWT 37, 1894, 175–91; RKabisch, Die erste Seligpreisung: StKr 69, 1896, 195–215; KKöhler, Die ursprgl. Form der Seligpreisungen: StKr 91, 1918, 157–92; JBoehmer, De Schatkamer 17, 1923, 11–16, TT [Copenhagen] 4, 1924, 195–207, JBL 45, 1926, 298–304; WMacgregor, ET 39, 1928, 293–97; VMacchioro, JR 12, ’32, 40–49; EEvans, Theology 47, ’44, 55–60; HLeisegang, Pneuma Hagion 1922, 134ff; Betz, SM 116 n. 178 for Qumran reff.).ⓒ spiritual state, state of mind, disposition ἐν ἀγάπῃ πνεύματί τε πραΰτητος with love and a gentle spirit 1 Cor 4:21; cp. Gal 6:1. τὸ πν. τοῦ νοὸς ὑμῶν Eph 4:23 (s. νοῦς 2a). ἐν τῷ ἀφθάρτῳ τοῦ ἡσυχίου πνεύματος with the imperishable (gift) of a quiet disposition 1 Pt 3:4.④ an independent noncorporeal being, in contrast to a being that can be perceived by the physical senses, spirit (ELangton, Good and Evil Spirits ’42).ⓐ God personally: πνεῦμα ὁ θεός J 4:24a (Ath. 16, 2; on God as a spirit, esp. in the Stoa, s. MPohlenz, D. Stoa ’48/49. Hdb. ad loc. Also Celsus 6, 71 [Stoic]; Herm. Wr. 18, 3 ἀκάματον μέν ἐστι πνεῦμα ὁ θεός).ⓑ good, or at least not expressly evil spirits or spirit-beings (cp. CIG III, 5858b δαίμονες καὶ πνεύματα; Proclus on Pla., Cratyl. p. 69, 6; 12 Pasqu.; En 15:4; 6; 8; 10; TestAbr A 4 p. 81, 15f [Stone p. 10, 15f] πάντα τὰ ἐπουράνια πνεύματα; TestAbr B 13 p. 117, 26 [Stone p. 82] ὑψηλὸν πν.; PGM 3, 8 ἐπικαλοῦμαί σε, ἱερὸν πνεῦμα; 4, 1448; 3080; 12, 249) πνεῦμα w. ἄγγελος (cp. Jos., Ant. 4, 108; Ps.-Clem., Hom. 3, 33; 8, 12) Ac 23:8f. God is ὁ παντὸς πνεύματος κτίστης καὶ ἐπίσκοπος 1 Cl 59:3b.—Pl., God the μόνος εὐεργέτης πνεύματων 1 Cl 59:3a. Cp. 64 (s. on this Num 16:22; 27:16. Prayers for vengeance fr. Rheneia [Dssm., LO 351–55=LAE 423ff=SIG 1181, 2] τὸν θεὸν τὸν κύριον τῶν πνευμάτων; PGM 5, 467 θεὸς θεῶν, ὁ κύριος τῶν πν.; sim. the magic pap PWarr 21, 24; 26 [III A.D.]); the πατὴρ τῶν πνευμάτων Hb 12:9. Intermediary beings (in polytheistic terminology: δαίμονες) that serve God are called λειτουργικὰ πνεύματα Hb 1:14. In Rv we read of the ἑπτὰ πνεύματα (τοῦ θεοῦ) 1:4; 3:1; 4:5; 5:6; s. ASkrinjar, Biblica 16, ’35, 1–24; 113–40.— Ghost Lk 24:37, 39.ⓒ evil spirits (PGM 13, 798; 36, 160; TestJob 27, 2; ApcSed [both Satan]; AscIs 3:28; Just., D. 39, 6 al.; Ath. 25, 3), esp. in accounts of healing in the Synoptics: (τὸ) πνεῦμα (τὸ) ἀκάθαρτον (Just., D. 82, 3) Mt 12:43; Mk 1:23, 26; 3:30; 5:2, 8; 7:25; 9:25a; Lk 8:29; 9:42; 11:24; Rv 18:2. Pl. (TestBenj 5:2) Mt 10:1; Mk 1:27; 3:11; 5:13; 6:7; Lk 4:36; 6:18; Ac 5:16; 8:7; Rv 16:13; ending of Mk in the Freer ms.—τὸ πν. τὸ πονηρόν Ac 19:15f. Pl. (En 99:7; TestSim 4:9; 6:6, TestJud 16:1; Just., D. 76, 6) Lk 7:21; 8:2; Ac 19:12f.—πν. ἄλαλον Mk 9:17; cp. vs. 25b (s. ἄλαλος). πν. πύθων Ac 16:16 (s. πύθων). πν. ἀσθενείας Lk 13:11. Cp. 1 Ti 4:1b. πνεῦμα δαιμονίου ἀκαθάρτου (s. δαιμόνιον 2) Lk 4:33. πνεύματα δαιμονίων Rv 16:14 (in effect = personified ‘exhalations’ of evil powers; for the combination of πν. and δαιμ. cp. the love spell Sb 4324, 16f τὰ πνεύματα τῶν δαιμόνων τούτων).—Abs. of a harmful spirit Mk 9:20; Lk 9:39; Ac 16:18. Pl. Mt 8:16; 12:45; Lk 10:20; 11:26.—1 Pt 3:19 (s. 2 above) belongs here if the πνεύματα refer to hostile spirit-powers, evil spirits, fallen angels (so FSpitta, Christi Predigt an die Geister 1890; HGunkel, Zum religionsgesch. Verständnis des NT 1903, 72f; WBousset, ZNW 19, 1920, 50–66; Rtzst., Herr der Grösse 1919, 25ff; Knopf, Windisch, FHauck ad loc.; BReicke, The Disobedient Spirits and Christian Baptism ’46, esp. 54–56, 69).—Hermas also has the concept of evil spirits that lead an independent existence, and live and reign within the inner life of a pers.; the Holy Spirit, who also lives or would like to live there, is forced out by them (cp. TestDan 4) Hm 5, 1, 2–4; 5, 2, 5–8; 10, 1, 2. τὸ πν. τὸ ἅγιον … ἕτερον πονηρὸν πν. 5, 1, 2. These πνεύματα are ὀξυχολία 5, 1, 3; 5, 2, 8 (τὸ πονηρότατον πν.); 10, 1, 2; διψυχία 9:11 (ἐπίγειον πν. ἐστι παρὰ τοῦ διαβόλου); 10, 1, 2; λύπη 10, 1, 2 (πάντων τῶν πνευμάτων πονηροτέρα) and other vices. On the complicated pneuma-concept of the Mandates of Hermas s. MDibelius, Hdb. exc. on Hm 5, 2, 7; cp. Leutzsch, Hermas 453f n. 133.⑤ God’s being as controlling influence, with focus on association with humans, Spirit, spirit as that which differentiates God fr. everything that is not God, as the divine power that produces all divine existence, as the divine element in which all divine life is carried on, as the bearer of every application of the divine will. All those who belong to God possess or receive this spirit and hence have a share in God’s life. This spirit also serves to distinguish Christians fr. all unbelievers (cp. PGM 4, 1121ff, where the spirit is greeted as one who enters devotees and, in accordance w. God’s will, separates them fr. themselves, i.e. fr. the purely human part of their nature); for this latter aspect s. esp. 6 below.ⓐ the Spirit of God, of the Lord (=God) etc. (LXX; TestSim 4:4; JosAs 8:11; ApcSed 14:6; 15:6; ApcMos 43; SibOr 3, 701; Ps.-Phoc. 106; Philo; Joseph. [s. c below]; apolog. Cp. Plut., Numa 4, 6 πνεῦμα θεοῦ, capable of begetting children; s. παρθένος a) τὸ πν. τοῦ θεοῦ 1 Cor 2:11b, 14; 3:16; 6:11; 1J 4:2a (Just., D. 49, 3; Tat. 13, 3; Ath. 22, 3). τὸ τοῦ θεοῦ πν. 1 Pt 4:14 (Just., A I, 60, 6). τὸ πν. τὸ ἐκ τοῦ θεοῦ 1 Cor 2:12b. τὸ πν. κυρίου Ac 5:9; B 6:14; B 9:2 (cp. Mel., P. 32, 222). τὸ πνεῦμά μου or αὐτοῦ: Mt 12:18 (Is 42:1); Ac 2:17f (Jo 3:1f.—Cp. 1QS 4:21); 1 Cor 2:10a v.l.; Eph 3:16; 1 Th 4:8 (where τὸ ἅγιον is added); 1J 4:13.—τὸ πν. τοῦ πατρὸς ὑμῶν Mt 10:20. τὸ πν. τοῦ ἐγείραντος τὸν Ἰησοῦν Ro 8:11a.—Without the art. πν. θεοῦ (JosAs 4:9; Tat. 15:3; Theoph. Ant. 1, 5 [p. 66, 18]) the Spirit of God Mt 3:16; 12:28; Ro 8:9b, 14, 19; 1 Cor 7:40; 12:3a; 2 Cor 3:3 (πν. θεοῦ ζῶντος); Phil 3:3. πν. κυρίου Lk 4:18 (Is 61:1); Ac 8:39 (like J 3:8; 20:22; Ac 2:4, this pass. belongs on the borderline betw. the mngs. ‘wind’ and ‘spirit’; cp. Diod S 3, 60, 3 Ἕσπερον ἐξαίφνης ὑπὸ πνευμάτων συναρπαγέντα μεγάλων ἄφαντον γενέσθαι ‘Hesperus [a son of Atlas] was suddenly snatched by strong winds and vanished fr. sight’. S. HLeisegang, Der Hl. Geist I 1, 1919, 19ff; OCullmann, TZ. 4, ’48, 364); 1 Cl 21:2.ⓑ the Spirit of Christ, of the Lord (=Christ) etc. τὸ πν. Ἰησοῦ Ac 16:7. τὸ πν. Χριστοῦ AcPlCor 2:32. τὸ ἐν αὐτοῖς πν. Χριστοῦ 1 Pt 1:11. πν. Χριστοῦ Ro 8:9c. πν. τοῦ Χριστοῦ AcPl Ha 8, 18. ἀπὸ τοῦ πν. τοῦ χριστοῦ AcPlCor 2:10. τὸ πν. Ἰης. Χριστοῦ Phil 1:19. τὸ πν. κυρίου 2 Cor 3:17b (JHermann, Kyrios und Pneuma, ’61). τὸ πν. τοῦ υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ (=θεοῦ) Gal 4:6. As possessor of the divine Spirit, and at the same time controlling its distribution among humans, Christ is called κύριος πνεύματος Lord of the Spirit 2 Cor 3:18 (s. Windisch ad loc.); but many prefer to transl. from the Lord who is the Spirit.—CMoule, OCullmann Festschr., ’72, 231–37.ⓒ Because of its heavenly origin and nature this Spirit is called (the) Holy Spirit (cp. PGM 4, 510 ἵνα πνεύσῃ ἐν ἐμοὶ τὸ ἱερὸν πνεῦμα.—Neither Philo nor Josephus called the Spirit πν. ἅγιον; the former used θεῖον or θεοῦ πν., the latter πν. θεῖον: Ant. 4, 118; 8, 408; 10, 239; but ἅγιον πνεῦμα Orig. C. Cels 1, 40, 16).α. w. the art. τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἅγιον (Is 63:10f; Ps 50:13; 142:10 v.l.; cp. Sus 45 Theod.; TestAbr A 4 p. 81, 10 [Stone p. 10]; JosAs 8:11 [codd. ADE]; AscIs 3, 15, 26; Just., D. 36, 6 al.) Mt 12:32 = Mk 3:29 = Lk 12:10 (τὸ ἅγιον πνεῦμα; on the ‘sin against the Holy Spirit’ s. HLeisegang, Pneuma Hagion 1922, 96–112; AFridrichsen, Le péché contre le Saint-Esprit: RHPR 3, 1923, 367–72). Mk 12:36; 13:11; Lk 2:26; 3:22; 10:21; J 14:26; Ac 1:16; 2:33; 5:3, 32; 7:51; 8:18 v.l.; 10:44, 47; 11:15; 13:2; 15:8, 28; 19:6; 20:23, 28; 21:11; 28:25; Eph 1:13 (τὸ πν. τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τὸ ἅγιον); 4:30 (τὸ πν. τὸ ἅγιον τοῦ θεοῦ); Hb 3:7; 9:8; 10:15; 1 Cl 13:1; 16:2; 18:11 (Ps 50:13); 22:1; IEph 9:1; Hs 5, 5, 2; 5, 6, 5–7 (on the relationship of the Holy Spirit to the Son in Hermas s. ALink, Christi Person u. Werk im Hirten des Hermas 1886; JvWalter, ZNW 14, 1913, 133–44; MDibelius, Hdb. exc. following Hs 5, 6, 8 p. 572–76).—τὸ ἅγιον πνεῦμα (Wsd 9:17; OdeSol 11:2; TestJob 51:2; ApcEsdr 7:16; Just. D. 25, 1 al.) Mt 28:19; Lk 12:10 (s. above), 12; Ac 1:8; 2:38 (epexegetic gen.); 4:31; 9:31; 10:45; 13:4; 16:6; 1 Cor 6:19; 2 Cor 13:13; 1J 5:7 v.l. (on the Comma Johanneum s. λόγο 3); GJs 24:4 (s. χρηματίζω 1bα). As the mother of Jesus GHb 20, 61 (HLeisegang, Pneuma Hagion 1922, 64ff; SHirsch, D. Vorstellg. v. e. weibl. πνεῦμα ἅγ. im NT u. in d. ältesten christl. Lit. 1927. Also WBousset, Hauptprobleme der Gnosis 1907, 9ff).β. without the art. (s. B-D-F §257, 2; Rob. 761; 795) πνεῦμα ἅγιον (PGM 3, 289; Da 5:12 LXX; PsSol 17:37; AssMos Fgm. b; Just., D. 4, 1 al.; Ath. 24, 1. S. also Da Theod. 4:8, 9, 18 θεοῦ πνεῦμα ἅγιον or πνεῦμα θεοῦ ἅγιον) Mk 1:8; Lk 1:15, 35, 41, 67; 2:25; 4:1; 11:13; J 20:22 (Cassien, La pentecôte johannique [J 20:19–23] ’39.—See also 1QS 4:20f); Ac 2:4a; 4:8; 7:55; 8:15, 17, 19; 9:17; 10:38; 11:24; 13:9; 19:2ab; Hb 2:4; 6:4; 1 Pt 1:12 v.l.; 1 Cl 2:2; AcPl 6:18; 9:4 (restored after Aa I 110, 11); AcPlCor 2:5.—So oft. in combination w. a prep.: διὰ πνεύματος ἁγίου Ac 1:2; 4:25; Ro 5:5; 2 Ti 1:14; 1 Cl 8:1 (cp. διὰ πν. αἰωνίου Hb 9:14). διὰ φωνῆς πν. ἁγίου AcPl Ha 11, 6. ἐκ πνεύματος ἁγίου (Eus., PE 3, 12, 3 of the Egyptians: ἐκ τ. πνεύματος οἴονται συλλαμβάνειν τὸν γῦπα. Here πνεῦμα= ‘wind’; s. Horapollo 1, 11 p. 14f. The same of other birds since Aristot.—On the neut. πνεῦμα as a masc. principle cp. Aristoxenus, Fgm. 13 of the two original principles: πατέρα μὲν φῶς, μητέρα δὲ σκότος) Mt 1:18, 20; IEph 18:2; GJs 14:2; 19:1 (pap). ἐν πνεύματι ἁγίῳ (PsSol 17:37; ApcZeph; Ar. 15, 1) Mt 3:11; Mk 1:8 v.l.; Lk 3:16; J 1:33b; Ac 1:5 (cp. 1QS 3:7f); 11:16; Ro 9:1; 14:17; 15:16; 1 Cor 12:3b; 2 Cor 6:6; 1 Th 1:5; 1 Pt 1:12 (without ἐν v.l.); Jd 20. ὑπὸ πνεύματος ἁγίου 2 Pt 1:21. Cp. ἐν δυνάμει πνεύματος ἁγίου Ro 15:13, 19 v.l. (for πνεύματος θεοῦ). μετὰ χαρᾶς πνεύματος ἁγίου 1 Th 1:6. διὰ ἀνακαινώσεως πνεύματος ἁγίου Tit 3:5.ⓓ abs.α. w. the art. τὸ πνεῦμα. In this connection the art. is perh. used anaphorically at times, w. the second mention of a word (s. B-D-F §252; Rob. 762); perh. Mt 12:31 (looking back to vs. 28 πν. θεοῦ); Mk 1:10, 12 (cp. vs. 8 πν. ἅγιον); Lk 4:1b, 14 (cp. vs. 1a); Ac 2:4b (cp. vs. 4a).—As a rule it is not possible to assume that anaphora is present: Mt 4:1; J 1:32, 33a; 3:6a, 8b (in wordplay), 34; 7:39a; Ac 8:29; 10:19; 11:12, 28; 19:1 D; 20:3 D, 22; 21:4; Ro 8:23 (ἀπαρχή 1bβ; 2), 26a, 27; 12:11; 15:30; 2 Cor 1:22 and 5:5 (KErlemann, ZNW 83, ’92, 202–23, and s. ἀρραβών); 12:18 (τῷ αὐτῷ πν.); Gal 3:2, 5, 14 (ἐπαγγελία 1bβ); Eph 4:3 (gen. of the author); 6:17 (perh. epexegetic gen.); 1 Ti 4:1a; Js 4:5; 1J 3:24; 5:6ab (some mss. add καὶ πνεύματος to the words διʼ ὕδατος κ. αἵματος at the beg. of the verse; this is approved by HvSoden, Moffatt, Vogels, Merk, and w. reservations by CDodd, The Joh. Epistles ’46, TManson, JTS 48, ’47, 25–33), vs. 8; Rv 2:7, 11, 17, 29; 3:6, 13, 22; 14:13; 22:17; B 19:2, B 7= D 4:10 (s. ἐτοιμάζω b). ἐν τῷ πνεύματι (led) by the Spirit Lk 2:27.—Paul links this Spirit of God, known to every Christian, with Christ as liberating agent in contrast to legal constraint ὁ κύριος τὸ πνεῦμα ἐστιν the Lord means Spirit 2 Cor 3:17a (UHolzmeister, 2 Cor 3:17 Dominus autem Spiritus est 1908; JNisius, Zur Erklärung v. 2 Cor 3:16ff: ZKT 40, 1916, 617–75; JKögel, Ὁ κύριος τὸ πνεῦμά ἐστιν: ASchlatter Festschr. 1922, 35–46; C Guignebert, Congr. d’Hist. du Christ. II 1928, 7–22; EFuchs, Christus u. d. Geist b. Pls ’32; HHughes, ET 45, ’34, 235f; CLattey, Verb. Dom. 20, ’40, 187–89; DGriffiths ET 55, ’43, 81–83; HIngo, Kyrios und Pneuma, ’61 [Paul]; JDunn, JTS 21, ’70, 309–20).β. without the art. πνεῦμα B 1:3. κοινωνία πνεύματος Phil 2:1 (κοινωνία 1 and 2). πνεύματι in the Spirit or through the Spirit Gal 3:3; 5:5, 16, 18; 1 Pt 4:6. εἰ ζῶμεν πνεύματι, πνεύματι καὶ στοιχῶμεν if we live by the Spirit, let us also walk by the Spirit Gal 5:25. Freq. used w. a prep.: διὰ πνεύματος 1 Pt 1:22 v.l. ἐξ (ὕδατος καὶ) πνεύματος J 3:5. ἐν πνεύματι in, by, through the Spirit Mt 22:43; Eph 2:22; 3:5; 5:18; 6:18; Col 1:8 (ἀγάπη ἐν πνεύματι love called forth by the Spirit); B 9:7. κατὰ πνεῦμα Ro 8:4f; Gal 4:29. ἐν ἁγιασμῷ πνεύματος 2 Th 2:13; 1 Pt 1:2 (s. ἁγιασμός).—In neg. expressions: οὔπω ἧν πνεῦμα the Spirit had not yet come J 7:39b. ψυχικοὶ πνεῦμα μὴ ἔχοντες worldly people, who do not have the Spirit Jd 19.—ἓν πνεῦμα one and the same Spirit 1 Cor 12:13; Eph 2:18; 4:4; one (in) Spirit 1 Cor 6:17.ⓔ The Spirit is more closely defined by a gen. of thing: τὸ πν. τῆς ἀληθείας (TestJud 20:5) J 14:17; 15:26; 16:13 (in these three places the Spirit of Truth is the Paraclete promised by Jesus upon his departure); 1J 4:6 (opp. τὸ πνεῦμα τῆς πλάνης, as TestJud 20:1; PsSol 8:14 πλ. πλανήσεως; Just., D. 7, 3 πλάνου καὶ ἀκαθάρτου πνεύματος; cp. 1QS 4:23); τὸ τῆς δόξης πν. 1 Pt 4:14. τὸ πν. τῆς ζωῆς the Spirit of life Ro 8:2. το πν. τῆς πίστεως 2 Cor 4:13. πν. σοφίας καὶ ἀποκαλύψεως Eph 1:17 (cp. Just., D. 87, 4). πν. υἱοθεσίας Ro 8:15b (opp. πν. δουλείας vs. 15a). πν. δυνάμεως AcPl Ha 8, 25. πν. δυνάμεως καὶ ἀγάπης καὶ σωφρονισμοῦ 2 Ti 1:7 (opp. πν. δειλίας). τὸ πν. τῆς χάριτος (s. TestJud 24:2) Hb 10:29 (Zech 12:10); cp. 1 Cl 46:6.ⓕ Of Christ ‘it is written’ in Scripture: (ἐγένετο) ὁ ἔσχατος Ἀδὰμ εἰς πνεῦμα ζῳοποιοῦν 1 Cor 15:45. The scripture pass. upon which the first part of this verse is based is Gen 2:7, where Wsd 15:11 also substitutes the words πνεῦμα ζωτικόν for πνοὴν ζωῆς (cp. Just., D. 6, 2). On the other hand, s. Philo, Leg. All. 1, 42 and s. the lit. s.v. Ἀδάμ ad loc.ⓖ The (divine) Pneuma stands in contrast to everything that characterizes this age or the finite world gener.: οὐ τὸ πν. τοῦ κόσμου ἀλλὰ τὸ πν. τὸ ἐκ τοῦ θεοῦ 1 Cor 2:12; cp. Eph 2:2 and 1 Ti 4:1ab.α. in contrast to σάρξ, which is more closely connected w. sin than any other earthly material (Just., D. 135, 6): J 3:6; Ro 8:4–6, 9a, 13; Gal 3:3; 5:17ab; 6:8. Cp. B 10:9. πᾶσα ἐπιθυμία κατὰ τοῦ πνεύματος στρατεύεται Pol 5:3.β. in contrast to σῶμα (=σάρξ) Ro 8:10 and to σάρξ (=σῶμα, as many hold) J 6:63a (for τὸ πν. ἐστιν τὸ ζῳοποιοῦν cp. Philo, Op. Mund. 30; Herm. Wr. in Cyrill., C. Jul. I 556c=542, 24 Sc. the pneuma τὰ πάντα ζῳοποιεῖ καὶ τρέφει. S. also f above). Cp. Ro 8:11b.γ. in contrast to γράμμα, which is the characteristic quality of God’s older declaration of the divine will in the law: Ro 2:29; 7:6; 2 Cor 3:6ab, 8 (cp. vs. 7).δ. in contrast to the wisdom of humans 1 Cor 2:13.⑥ the Spirit of God as exhibited in the character or activity of God’s people or selected agents, Spirit, spirit (s. HPreisker, Geist u. Leben ’33).ⓐ πνεῦμα is accompanied by another noun, which characterizes the working of the Spirit more definitely: πνεῦμα καὶ δύναμις spirit and power Lk 1:17; 1 Cor 2:4. Cp. Ac 10:38; 1 Th 1:5. πνεῦμα καὶ ζωή J 6:63b. πνεῦμα κ. σοφία Ac 6:3; cp. vs. 10 (cp. TestReub 2:6 πνεῦμα λαλίας). πίστις κ. πνεῦμα ἅγιον 6:5 (cp. Just., D. 135, 6). χαρὰ καὶ πνεῦμα ἅγ. 13:52.ⓑ Unless frustrated by humans in their natural condition, the Spirit of God produces a spiritual type of conduct Gal 5:16, 25 and produces the καρπὸς τοῦ πνεύματος vs. 22 (s. Vögtle under πλεονεξία).ⓒ The Spirit inspires certain people of God B 12:2; B 13:5, above all, in their capacity as proclaimers of a divine revelation (Strabo 9, 3, 5 the πνεῦμα ἐνθουσιαστικόν, that inspired the Pythia; Περὶ ὕψους 13, 2; 33, 5 of the divine πν. that impels prophets and poets to express themselves; schol. on Pla. 856e of a μάντις: ἄνωθεν λαμβάνειν τὸ πνεῦμα καὶ πληροῦσθαι τοῦ θεοῦ; Aristobulus in Eus., PE 8, 10, 4 [=Fgm. 2, 4 p. 136 Holladay] τὸ θεῖον πν., καθʼ ὸ̔ καὶ προφήτης ἀνακεκήρυκται ‘[Moses possessed] the Divine Spirit with the result that he was proclaimed a prophet’; AscIs 1:7 τὸ πν. τὸ λαλοῦν ἐν ἐμοί; AssMos Fgm. f εἶδεν πνεύματι ἐπαρθείς; Just., A I, 38, 1 al.; Ath. 10, 3 τὸ προφητικὸν πν. Cp. Marinus, Vi. Procli 23 of Proclus: οὐ γὰρ ἄνευ θείας ἐπινοίας … διαλέγεσθαι; Orig., C. Cels. 3, 28, 23). προφητεία came into being only as ὑπὸ πνεύματος ἁγίου φερόμενοι ἐλάλησαν ἀπὸ θεοῦ ἄνθρωποι 2 Pt 1:21; cp. Ac 15:29 v.l.; cp. 1 Cl 8:1. David Mt 22:43; Mk 12:36; cp. Ac 1:16; 4:25. Isaiah Ac 28:25. Moses B 10:2, B 9; the Spirit was also active in giving the tables of the law to Moses 14:2. Christ himself spoke in the OT διὰ τοῦ πνεύματος τοῦ ἁγίου 1 Cl 22:1. The ἱεραὶ γραφαί are called αἱ διὰ τοῦ πν. τοῦ ἁγίου 45:2.—The Christian prophet Agabus also ἐσήμαινεν διὰ τοῦ πν. Ac 11:28; cp. Ac 21:11. Likew. Ign. IPhld 7:2. In general the Spirit reveals the most profound secrets to those who believe 1 Cor 2:10ab.—1 Cl claims to be written διὰ τοῦ ἁγ. πν. 63:2. On Ac 19:21 s. 3b.ⓓ The Spirit of God, being one, shows the variety and richness of its life in the different kinds of spiritual gifts which are granted to certain Christians 1 Cor 12:4, 7, 11; cp. vs. 13ab.—Vss. 8–10 enumerate the individual gifts of the Spirit, using various prepositions: διὰ τοὺ πν. vs. 8a; κατὰ τὸ πν. vs. 8b; ἐν τῷ πν. vs. 9ab. τὸ πν. μὴ σβέννυτε do not quench the Spirit 1 Th 5:19 refers to the gift of prophecy, acc. to vs. 20.—The use of the pl. πνεύματα is explained in 1 Cor 14:12 by the varied nature of the Spirit’s working; in vs. 32 by the number of persons who possess the prophetic spirit; on the latter s. Rv 22:6 and 19:10.ⓔ One special type of spiritual gift is represented by ecstatic speaking. Of those who ‘speak in tongues’ that no earthly person can understand: πνεύματι λαλεῖ μυστήρια expresses secret things in a spiritual way 1 Cor 14:2. Cp. vss. 14–16 and s. νοῦς 1b. τὸ πνεῦμα ὑπερεντυγχάνει στεναγμοῖς ἀλαλήτοις the Spirit pleads in our behalf with groans beyond words Ro 8:26b. Of speech that is ecstatic, but expressed in words that can be understood λαλεῖν ἐν πνεύματι D 11:7, 8; cp. vs. 9 (on the subject-matter 1 Cor 12:3; Jos., Ant. 4, 118f; TestJob 43:2 ἀναλαβὼν Ἐλιφᾶς πν. εἶπεν ὕμνον). Of the state of mind of the seer of the Apocalypse: ἐν πνεύματι Rv 17:3; 21:10; γενέσθαι ἐν πν. 1:10; 4:2 (s. γίνομαι 5c, ἐν 4c and EMoering, StKr 92, 1920, 148–54; RJeske, NTS 31, ’85, 452–66); AcPl Ha 6, 27. On the Spirit at Pentecost Ac 2:4 s. KLake: Beginn. I 5, ’33, 111–21. κατασταλέντος τοῦ πν. τοῦ ἐν Μύρτῃ when the Spirit (of prophecy) that was in Myrta ceased speaking AcPl Ha 7, 9.ⓕ The Spirit leads and directs Christian missionaries in their journeys (Aelian, NA 11, 16 the young women are led blindfolded to the cave of the holy serpent; they are guided by a πνεῦμα θεῖον) Ac 16:6, 7 (by dreams, among other methods; cp. vs. 9f and s. Marinus, Vi. Procli 27: Proclus ἔφασκεν προθυμηθῆναι μὲν πολλάκις γράψαι, κωλυθῆναι δὲ ἐναργῶς ἔκ τινων ἐνυπνίων). In Ac 16:6–7 τὸ ἅγιον πν. and τὸ πν. Ἰησοῦ are distinguished.⑦ an activating spirit that is not fr. God, spirit: πν. ἔτερον a different (kind of) spirit 2 Cor 11:4. Cp. 2 Th 2:2; 1J 4:1–3. Because there are persons activated by such spirits, it is necessary to test the var. kinds of spirits (the same problem Artem. 3, 20 περὶ διαφορᾶς μάντεων, οἷς δεῖ προσέχειν καὶ οἷς μή) 1 Cor 12:10; 1J 4:1b. ὁ διάβολος πληροῖ αὐτὸν αὐτοῦ πν. Hm 11:3. Also οὐκ οἴδατε ποίου πνεύματός ἐστε Lk 9:55 v.l. distinguishes betw. the spirit shown by Jesus’ disciples, and another kind of spirit.—Even more rarely a spirit divinely given that is not God’s own; so (in a quot. fr. Is 29:10) a πνεῦμα κατανύξεως Ro 11:8.⑧ an independent transcendent personality, the Spirit, which appears in formulas that became more and more fixed and distinct (cp. Ath. 12, 2; Hippol., Ref. 7, 26, 2.—Ps.-Lucian, Philopatr. 12 θεόν, υἱόν πατρός, πνεῦμα ἐκ πατρὸς ἐκπορευόμενον ἓν ἐκ τριῶν καὶ ἐξ ἑνὸς τρία, ταῦτα νόμιζε Ζῆνα, τόνδʼ ἡγοῦ θεόν=‘God, son of the father, spirit proceeding from the father, one from three and three from one, consider these as Zeus, think of this one as God’. The entire context bears a Christian impress.—As Aion in gnostic speculation Iren. 1, 2, 5 [Harv. I 21, 2]): βαπτίζοντες αὐτοὺς εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ πατρὸς καὶ τοῦ υἱοῦ καὶ τοῦ ἁγίου πνεύματος Mt 28:19 (on the text s. βαπτίζω 2c; on the subject-matter GWalther, Die Entstehung des Taufsymbols aus dem Taufritus: StKr 95, 1924, 256ff); D 7:1, 3. Cp. 2 Cor 13:13; 1 Cl 58:2; IEph 9:1; IMg 13:1b, 2; MPol 14:3; 22:1, 3; Epil Mosq 5. On this s. HUsener, Dreiheit: RhM 58, 1903, 1ff; 161ff; 321ff; esp. 36ff; EvDobschütz, Zwei-u. dreigliedrige Formeln: JBL 50, ’31, 116–47 (also Heinrici Festschr. 1914, 92–100); Norden, Agn. Th. 228ff; JMainz, Die Bed. der Dreizahl im Judentum 1922; Clemen2 125–28; NSöderblom, Vater, Sohn u. Geist 1909; DNielsen, Der dreieinige Gott I 1922; GKrüger, Das Dogma v. der Dreieinigkeit 1905, 46ff; AHarnack, Entstehung u. Entwicklung der Kirchenverfassung 1910, 187ff; JHaussleiter, Trinitarischer Glaube u. Christusbekenntnis in der alten Kirche: BFCT XXV 4, 1920; JLebreton, Histoire du dogme de la Trinité I: Les origines6 1927; RBlümel, Pls u. d. dreieinige Gott 1929.—On the whole word FRüsche, D. Seelenpneuma ’33; HLeisegang, Der Hl. Geist I 1, 1919; EBurton, ICC Gal 1921, 486–95; PVolz, Der Geist Gottes u. d. verwandten Erscheinungen im AT 1910; JHehn, Zum Problem des Geistes im alten Orient u. im AT: ZAW n.s. 2, 1925, 210–25; SLinder, Studier till Gamla Testamentets föreställningar om anden 1926; AMarmorstein, Der Hl. Geist in der rabb. Legende: ARW 28, 1930, 286–303; NSnaith, The Distinctive Ideas of the OT ’46, 229–37; FDillistone, Bibl. Doctrine of the Holy Spirit: Theology Today 3, ’46/47, 486–97; TNicklin, Gospel Gleanings ’50, 341–46; ESchweizer, CDodd Festschr., ’56, 482–508; DLys, Rûach, Le Souffle dans l’AT, ’62; DHill, Gk. Words and Hebr. Mngs. ’67, 202–93.—HGunkel, Die Wirkungen des Hl. Geistes2 1899; HWeinel, Die Wirkungen des Geistes u. der Geister im nachap. Zeitalter 1899; EWinstanley, The Spirit in the NT 1908; HSwete, The Holy Spirit in the NT 1909, The Holy Spirit in the Ancient Church 1912; EScott, The Spirit in the NT 1923; FBüchsel, Der Geist Gottes im NT 1926; EvDobschütz, Der Geistbesitz des Christen im Urchristentum: Monatsschr. für Pastoral-theol. 20, 1924, 228ff; FBadcock, ‘The Spirit’ and Spirit in the NT: ET 45, ’34, 218–21; RBultmann, Theologie des NT ’48, 151–62 (Eng. tr. KGrobel, ’51, I 153–64); ESchweizer, Geist u. Gemeinde im NT ’52, Int 6, ’52, 259–78.—WTosetti, Der Hl. Geist als göttliche Pers. in den Evangelien 1918; HLeisegang, Pneuma Hagion. Der Ursprung des Geistbegriffs der Syn. Ev. aus der griech. Mystik 1922; AFrövig, Das Sendungsbewusstsein Jesu u. der Geist 1924; HWindisch, Jes. u. d. Geist nach Syn. Überl.: Studies in Early Christianity, presented to FCPorter and BWBacon 1928, 209–36; FSynge, The Holy Spirit in the Gospels and Acts: CQR 120, ’35, 205–17; CBarrett, The Holy Spirit and the Gospel Trad. ’47.—ESokolowski, Die Begriffe Geist u. Leben bei Pls 1903; KDeissner, Auferstehungshoffnung u. Pneumagedanke bei Pls 1912; GVos, The Eschatological Aspect of the Pauline Conception of the Spirit: Bibl. and Theol. Studies by the Faculty of Princeton Theol. Sem. 1912, 209–59; HBertrams, Das Wesen des Geistes nach d. Anschauung des Ap. Pls 1913; WReinhard, Das Wirken des Hl. Geistes im Menschen nach den Briefen des Ap. Pls 1918; HHoyle, The Holy Spirit in St. Paul 1928; PGächter, Z. Pneumabegriff des hl. Pls: ZKT 53, 1929, 345–408; ASchweitzer, D. Mystik des Ap. Pls 1930, 159–74 al. [Mysticism of Paul the Apostle, tr. WMontgomery ’31, 160–76 al.]; E-BAllo, RB 43, ’34, 321–46 [1 Cor]; Ltzm., Hdb. exc. after Ro 8:11; Synge [s. above], CQR 119, ’35, 79–93 [Pauline epp.]; NWaaning, Onderzoek naar het gebruik van πνεῦμα bij Pls, diss. Amsterd. ’39; RJewett, Paul’s Anthropological Terms, ’71, 167–200.—HvBaer, Der Hl. Geist in den Lukasschriften 1926; MGoguel, La Notion joh. de l’Esprit 1902; JSimpson, The Holy Spirit in the Fourth Gospel: Exp., 9th ser., 4, 1925, 292–99; HWindisch, Jes. u. d. Geist im J.: Amicitiae Corolla (RHarris Festschr.) ’33, 303–18; WLofthouse, The Holy Spirit in Ac and J: ET 52, ’40/41, 334–36; CBarrett, The Holy Spirit in the Fourth Gospel: JTS 1 n.s., ’50, 1–15; FCrump, Pneuma in the Gospels, diss. Catholic Univ. of America, ’54; GLampe, Studies in the Gospels (RHLightfoot memorial vol.) ’55, 159–200; NHamilton, The Holy Spirit and Eschatology in Paul, ’57; WDavies, Paul and the Dead Sea Scrolls, Flesh and Spirit: The Scrolls and the NT, ed. KStendahl, ’57, 157–82.—GJohnston, ‘Spirit’ and ‘Holy Spirit’ in the Qumran Lit.: NT Sidelights (ACPurdy Festschr.) ’60, 27–42; JPryke, ‘Spirit’ and ‘Flesh’ in Qumran and NT, RevQ 5, ’65, 346–60; HBraun, Qumran und d. NT II, ’66, 150–64; DHill, Greek Words and Hebrew Meanings, ’67, 202–93; WBieder, Pneumatolog. Aspekte im Hb, OCullmann Festschr. ’72, 251–59; KEasley, The Pauline Usage of πνεύματι as a Reference to the Spirit of God: JETS 27, ’84, 299–313 (statistics).—B. 260; 1087. Pauly-W. XIV 387–412. BHHW I 534–37. Schmidt, Syn. II 218–50. New Docs 4, 38f. DELG s.v. πνέω. M-M. Dict. de la Bible XI 126–398. EDNT. TW. Sv. -
19 πρός
πρός prep. expressing direction ‘on the side of’, ‘in the direction of’: w. gen. ‘from’, dat. ‘at’, or acc. (the most freq. usage in our lit.) ‘to’ (s. the lit. s.v. ἀνά. beg.) (Hom.+).① w. gen. (pseudepigr. only TestSol 10:4 C; apolog. exc. Ar.) marker of direction or aspect from which someth. is determined, to the advantage of, advantageous for (Thu. 3, 59, 1 οὐ πρὸς τῆς ὑμετέρας δόξης τάδε; Hdt. 1, 75; Dionys. Hal. 10, 30, 5; Diod S 18, 50, 5; Lucian, Dial. Deor. 20, 3; Mel., HE 4, 26, 8; Ath. 36, 1; B-D-F §240; Rob. 623f) οἱ πρ. ζωῆς μαζοί the life-giving breasts 1 Cl 20:10. πρ. τῆς σωτηρίας in the interest of safety Ac 27:34 (πρὸς τῆς ς. as Jos., Ant. 16, 313).② w. dat. (pesudepigr. only TestSol 6:4 D; TestAbr [s. below]; JosAs 19:1.—Just.; Mel., HE 4, 26, 7; Ath., R. 22 p. 75, 10) marker of closeness of relation or proximityⓐ of place near, at, by (Hom. et al. incl. Aristarch. Samos 398, 20; LXX; TestSol 6:4 D; Jos., Ant 8, 349; 381) Mk 5:11; around Rv 1:13. πρ. τῇ θύρᾳ ἑστηκέναι stand at the door (Menand., Fgm. 420, 1; 830 K.=352, 1; 644 Kö.; JosAs 19:1) J 18:16; cp. 20:11. πρὸς τῇ πύλῃ GJs 4:4; ἐγγίζοντος αὐτοῦ πρ. τῇ καταβάσει τοῦ ὄρους when he came close to the slope of the mountain Lk 19:37 (s. κατάβασις). πρ. τῇ κεφαλῇ, τοῖς ποσίν at the head, at the feet J 20:12. τὰ πρ. ταῖς ῥίζαις the parts near the roots Hs 9, 1, 6; 9, 21, 1. In geographical designations Μαγνησία ἡ πρ. Μαιάνδρῳ Magnesia on the Maeander IMagnMai ins.—(Cp. the temporal use: πρὸς ἑσπέρᾳ ἐστίν it takes place at evening TestAbr B 2 p. 106, 7 [Stone p. 60]; cp. Just., D. 105, 3 and 5; 142, 1.)ⓑ in addition to (Hom. et al.; Polyb., Just.; Mel., HE 4, 26, 7; Ath., R. 22 p. 75, 10; ins) πρὸς τούτοις (SIG 495, 105; 685, 70 and 100; 796 B, 30; 888, 35 al.; UPZ 26, 18; 25 [163 B.C.]; 2 Macc 4:9; 5:23; 9:17, 25; 14:4, esp. 12:2; Philo, Aet. M. 67 al.; Just., A I, 40, 5; D. 93, 4 al.) 1 Cl 17:1.③ w. acc. (pseudepigr. and apolog. throughout) marker of movement or orientation toward someone/someth.ⓐ of place, pers., or thing toward, towards, to, after verbsα. of going; s. ἄγω 5, ἀναβαίνω 1aα, ἀνακάμπτω 1a, ἀπέρχομαι 1b, διαβαίνω, διαπεράω, εἴσειμι, εἰσέρχομαι 1bα, ἐκπορεύομαι 1c, also ἐπισυνάγομαι Mk 1:33, ἔρχομαι 1aβ, ἥκω 1d et al.—προσαγωγὴ πρὸς τὸν πατέρα Eph 2:18. εἴσοδος 1 Th 1:9a.β. of sending; s. ἀναπέμπω Lk 23:7, 15; Ac 25:21, ἀποστέλλω 1bα, πέμπω.γ. of motion gener.; s. βληθῆναι (βάλλω 1b), ἐπιστρέφω 1a, 4ab, κεῖμαι 2, πίπτω 1bαא and ב, προσκολλάω, προσκόπτω 1, προσπίπτω.δ. of leading, guiding; s. ἄγω 1a, ἀπάγω 2a and 4, also ἕλκω 2 end J 12:32, κατασύρω, etc.ε. of saying, speaking; s. ἀποκρίνομαι 1, also δημηγορέω Ac 12:21, εἶπον 1a, λαλέω 2aγ and 2b, λέγω 1bγ et al. Hebraistically λαλεῖν στόμα πρὸς στόμα speak face to face (Jer 39:4; ApcEsdr 6:6 p. 31, 10 Tdf.) 2J 12b; 3J 14 (cp. PGM 1, 39 τὸ στόμα πρὸς τὸ στόμα). πρὸς ἀλλήλους to one another, with each other, among themselves: s. ἀντιβάλλω, διαλαλέω, also διαλέγομαι Mk 9:34, διαλογίζομαι 8:16; Lk 20:14, εἶπον 24:32; J 16:17; 19:24, λαλέω, λέγω et al. πρὸς ἑαυτούς to themselves, to each other: s. διαλογίζομαι 1; εἶπον Mk 12:7; J 7:35; λέγω (Ps.-Callisth. 2, 15, 7 πρὸς ἑαυτὸν ἔλεγεν; Just., D. 62, 2) Mk 10:26; 16:3. διαθήκην ὁ θεὸς διέθετο πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν, λέγων πρὸς Ἀβραάμ God made a covenant with your fathers, when he said to Abraham Ac 3:25 (διατίθημι 1). ὅρκον ὀμνύναι πρ. τινα (ὀμνύω, end) Lk 1:73.ζ. of asking, praying δέομαι Ac 8:24. εὔχομαι (s. εὔχομαι 1; cp. 2 Macc 9:13) 2 Cor 13:7. προσεύχομαι (cp. 1 Km 12:19; 2 Esdr 12: 4; 2 Macc 2:10) Hv 1, 1, 9. γνωρίζεσθαι πρὸς τὸν θεόν Phil 4:6 (γνωρίζω 1).—Also after nouns like δέησις, λόγος et al. Ro 10:1; 15:30; 2 Cor 1:18 al.ⓑ of time near, at, or during (a certain time)α. denoting approach toward (X., Pla. et al.) πρὸς ἑσπέραν toward evening Lk 24:29 (so Just., D. 97, 1; s. ἑσπέρα).β. of temporal duration for πρὸς καιρόν for a time, for a while (καιρός 1a) Lk 8:13; 1 Cor 7:5. πρὸς καιρὸν ὥρας (καιρός 1a) 1 Th 2:17. πρὸς ὥραν for an hour, i.e. for a short time J 5:35; 2 Cor 7:8; Gal 2:5a; Phlm 15; MPol 11:2. πρὸς ὀλίγας ἡμέρας Hb 12:10. Also πρὸς ὀλίγον Js 4:14; GJs 19:2 (ὀλίγος 3). πρὸς τὸ παρόν for the present Hb 12:11 (πάρειμι 1b).α. with conscious purpose for, for the purpose of, on behalf of οὗτος ἦν ὁ πρὸς τὴν ἐλεημοσύνην καθήμενος this was the one who sat (and begged) for alms Ac 3:10. πρὸς τὴν ἔνδειξιν τῆς δικαιοσύνης αὐτοῦ Ro 3:26. τοῦτο πρὸς τὸ ὑμῶν αὐτῶν σύμφορον λέγω 1 Cor 7:35a; cp. 35b. ἐγράφη πρὸς νουθεσίαν ἡμῶν 10:11. Cp. Ro 15:2; 1 Cor 6:5; 2 Cor 4:6; 7:3; 11:8; Eph 4:12.—W. acc. of the inf. (Polyb. 1, 48, 5; PRyl 69, 16; BGU 226, 22; Jer 34:10; 2 Macc 4:45; TestJob 45:4; Jos., Ant. 14, 170; 15, 148 al.; Just., D. 132, 1) πρὸς τὸ θεαθῆναι τοῖς ἀνθρώποις in order to be seen by men Mt 23:5; cp. 6:1. πρὸς τὸ κατακαῦσαι αὐτά 13:30. πρὸς τὸ ἐνταφιάσαι με 26:12. πρὸς τὸ ἀποπλανᾶν εἰ δυνατὸν τοὺς ἐκλεκτούς Mk 13:22. πρὸς τὸ μὴ ἀτενίσαι υἱοὺς Ἰσραήλ 2 Cor 3:13. Cp. Eph 6:11a; 1 Th 2:9; 2 Th 3:8; Js 3:3 v.l.β. gener. of design, destiny (Demetr.[?]: 722 Fgm. 7 Jac. πρὸς τὴν κάρπωσιν; TestJob 42:7 τὰ πρὸς θυσίαν; Jos., Bell. 4, 573 τὸ πρ. σωτηρίαν φάρμακον) τῷ θεῷ πρὸς δόξαν for the glory of God 2 Cor 1:20 (on πρὸς δόξαν cp. SIG 456, 15; 704e, 21; 3 Macc 2:9; Just., A I, 15, 10 μηδὲν πρὸς δόξαν ποιεῖν). τῇ πυρώσει πρὸς πειρασμὸν ὑμῖν γινομένῃ 1 Pt 4:12.—After adjectives and participles for ἀγαθὸς πρὸς οἰκοδομήν Eph 4:29 (ἀγ. 1a) ἀδόκιμος Tit 1:16. ἀνεύθετος πρὸς παραχειμασίαν Ac 27:12. γεγυμνασμένος Hb 5:14. δυνατός 2 Cor 10:4. ἐξηρτισμένος 2 Ti 3:17. ἕτοιμος (q.v. b) Tit 3:1; 1 Pt 3:15. ἱκανός (q.v. 2) 2 Cor 2:16. ὠφέλιμος 1 Ti 4:8ab; 2 Ti 3:16.γ. of the result that follows a set of circumstances (so that) πάντα πρὸς οἰκοδομὴν γινέσθω everything is to be done in such a way that it contributes to edification 1 Cor 14:26; cp. vs. 12; Col 2:23 (but see eδ below); 1 Ti 4:7. ὁ βλέπων γυναῖκα πρὸς τὸ ἐπιθυμῆσαι αὐτήν one who looks at a woman with sinful desire Mt 5:28, but s. eε below. λευκαί εἰσιν πρὸς θερισμόν they (the fields) are white, so that the harvest may begin J 4:35. αὕτη ἡ ἀσθένεια οὐκ ἔστιν πρὸς θάνατον this disease is not of the kind that will lead to death 11:4. Cp. ἁμαρτία πρὸς θάνατον 1J 5:16f.ⓓ of relationship (hostile or friendly), against, forα. hostile against, with after verbs of disputing, etc.; s. ἀνταγωνίζομαι, γογγύζω, διακρίνομαι (διακρίνω 5b), διαλέγομαι 1, πικραίνομαι (πικραίνω 2), στασιάζω, ἔστην (ἵστημι B3). ἐστίν τινι ἡ πάλη πρός Eph 6:12. ἔχειν τι πρός τινα have anything (to bring up) against someone Ac 24:19. μομφὴν ἔχειν πρός τινα Col 3:13. πρᾶγμα ἔχειν πρός τινα 1 Cor 6:1 (πρᾶγμα 4). ἐγένετο γογγυσμὸς τῶν Ἑλληνιστῶν πρὸς τοὺς Ἑβραίους Ac 6:1. τὸ στόμα ἡμῶν ἀνέῳγεν πρὸς ὑμᾶς 2 Cor 6:11 (ἀνοίγω 7). ἐν ἔχθρᾳ ὄντες πρὸς αὐτούς Lk 23:12. βλασφημίαι πρὸς τὸν θεόν Rv 13:6 (cp. TestJob 25:10 εἰπὲ ἓν ῥῆμα πρὸς τὸν θεόν). ἀσύμφωνοι πρ. ἀλλήλους unable to agree among themselves Ac 28:25 (Tat. 25, 2); cp. the structure of Col 2:23.β. friendly to, toward, with, before ἐργάζεσθαι τὸ ἀγαθόν Gal 6:10ab (ἐργάζομαι 2a). μακροθυμεῖν 1 Th 5:14. εἰρήνην ἔχειν πρὸ τὸν θεόν Ro 5:1 (s. εἰρήνη 2b). παρρησίαν ἔχειν πρὸς τ. θεόν 1J 3:21; cp. 5:14. πίστιν ἔχειν πρὸς τ. κύριον Ἰ. Phlm 5. πεποίθησιν ἔχειν πρὸς τ. θεόν 2 Cor 3:4. ἔχειν χάριν πρὸς ὅλον τὸν λαόν Ac 2:47 (FCheetham, ET 74, ’63, 214f). πραΰτητα ἐνδείκνυσθαι Tit 3:2. ἐν σοφίᾳ περιπατεῖν Col 4:5. ἤπιον εἶναι πρὸς πάντας 2 Ti 2:24.—After substantives: πίστις 1 Th 1:8 (cp. 4 Macc 15:24; Just., D. 121, 2); παρρησία 2 Cor 7:4; κοινωνία 6:14; συμφώνησις vs. 15 (cp. Is 7:2).ⓔ to indicate a connection by marking a point of reference, with reference/regard toα. with reference to (Ocellus Luc. c. 42 πρὸς ἡμᾶς=with reference to us) ἔγνωσαν ὅτι πρὸς αὐτοὺς τὴν παραβολὴν εἶπεν they recognized that he had spoken the parable with reference to them Mk 12:12; Lk 20:19; cp. 12:41 (Vita Aesopi cod. G 98 P. οἱ Σάμιοι νοήσαντες πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς εἰρῆσθαι τοὺς λόγους; Just., D. 122, 3 ταῦτα … πρὸς τὸν χριστὸν … εἴρηται). ἔλεγεν παραβολὴν πρὸς τὸ δεῖν προσεύχεσθαι he told them a parable about the need of praying 18:1 (Just., D. 90, 5 σύμβολον … πρὸς τὸν χριστόν). οὐδεὶς ἔγνω πρὸς τί εἶπεν αὐτῷ nobody understood with respect to what (= why) he said (this) to him J 13:28. πρὸς τὴν σκληροκαρδίαν ὑμῶν with reference to (i.e. because of) your perversity Mt 19:8; Mk 10:5 (Just., D. 45, 3). Cp. Ro 10:21a; Hb 1:7f. οὐκ ἀπεκρίθη αὐτῷ πρὸς οὐδὲ ἓν ῥῆμα he did not answer him a single word with reference to anything Mt 27:14 (s. ἀποκρίνομαι 1). ἀνταποκριθῆναι πρὸς ταῦτα Lk 14:6 (s. ἀνταποκρίνομαι). ἀπρόσκοπον συνείδησιν ἔχειν πρὸς τὸν θεόν have a clear conscience with respect to God Ac 24:16.β. as far as … is concerned, with regard to (Maximus Tyr. 31, 3b) πρὸς τὴν πληροφορίαν τῆς ἐλπίδος Hb 6:11. συνιστάνοντες ἑαυτοὺς πρὸς πᾶσαν συνείδησιν ἀνθρώπων we are recommending ourselves as far as every human conscience is concerned = to every human conscience (πρός w. acc. also stands simply for the dative; s. Mayser II/2 p. 359) 2 Cor 4:2. τὰ πρὸς τὸν θεόν that which concerns God or as adverbial acc. with reference to what concerns God (Soph., Phil. 1441; X., De Rep. Lac. 13, 11; Ps.-Isocr. 1, 13 εὐσεβεῖν τὰ πρὸς τ. θεούς; SIG 204, 51f; 306, 38; Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 109, 3 εὐσεβὴς τὰ πρὸς θεούς; Ex 4:16; 18:19; Jos., Ant. 9, 236) Ro 15:17; Hb 2:17; 5:1. τὰ πρός τι that which belongs to someth.; that which is necessary for someth. (Plut., Mor. 109b; Jos., Ant. 12, 405 τὰ πρὸς τὴν μάχην; 14, 27; a standard term in state documents) τὰ πρὸς ἀπαρτισμόν Lk 14:28 v.l. τὰ πρὸς εἰρήνην (TestJud 9) vs. 32; what makes for peace 19:42. Cp. Ac 28:10; 2 Pt 1:3.γ. elliptically τί πρὸς ἡμᾶς (sc. ἐστιν); what is that to us? Mt 27:4. τί πρὸς σέ; how does it concern you? J 21:22f (cp. Epict. 4, 1, 10 τί τοῦτο πρὸς σέ; Plut., Mor. 986b; Vi. Aesopi I 14 p. 265, 4 Eberh. τί πρὸς ἐμέ; ApcMos 11 οὐ πρὸς ἡμᾶς ἡ πλεονεξία σου).δ. in accordance with ὀρθοποδεῖν πρὸς τὴν ἀλήθειαν Gal 2:14. πρὸς τὸ κένωμα in accordance with the emptiness Hm 11:3. πρὸς τὸ θέλημα in accordance w. the will Lk 12:47; Hs 9, 5, 2. πρὸς ἃ ἔπραξεν 2 Cor 5:10. πρὸς ὅ Eph 3:4.—In comparison with, to be compared to (Pind., Hdt. et al.; Ps.-Luc., Halc. 3 πρὸς τὸν πάντα αἰῶνα=[life is short] in comparison to all eternity; Sir 25:19; TestJob 18:8; 23:8; Just., D. 19, 2 οὐδὲν … πρὸς τὸ βάπτισμα τοῦτο τὸ τῆς ζωῆς ἐστι; Tat. 29, 1 ὀρθοποδεῖν πρὸς τὴν ἀλήθειαν) ἄξια πρός Ro 8:18 (RLeaney, ET 64, ’52f; 92 interprets Col 2:23 in the light of this usage). Cp. IMg 12.ε. expressing purpose πρὸς τό w. inf. (s. Mayser II/1 p. 331f) in order to, for the purpose of Mk 13:22; Ac 3:19 v.l. Perh. Mt 5:28 (s. cγ above).ⓕ in adverbial expressions (cp. πρὸς ὀργήν = ὀργίλως Soph., Elect. 369; Jos., Bell. 2, 534. πρὸς βίαν = βιαίως Aeschyl., Prom. 208, 353, Eum. 5; Menand., Sam. 559 S. [214 Kö.]; Philo, Spec. Leg. 3, 3. πρὸς ἡδονήν Jos., Ant. 7, 195; 12, 398; Just., A II, 3, 2 πρὸς χάριν καὶ ἡδονὴν τῶν πολλῶν) πρὸς φθόνον prob.=φθονερῶς jealously Js 4:5 (s. φθόνος, where the lit. is given). πρὸς εὐφρασίαν w. joy AcPl Ox 6, 9f (cp. Aa 1 p. 241, 1 ὑπερευφραινομένη).ⓖ by, at, near πρός τινα εἶναι be (in company) with someone Mt 13:56; Mk 6:3; 9:19a; 14:49; Lk 9:41; J 1:1f; 1 Th 3:4; 2 Th 2:5; 3:10; 1J 1:2. διαμένειν Ac 10:48 D; Gal 2:5b. ἐπιμένειν 1:18; 1 Cor 16:7. παραμένειν 16:6 (v.l. κατα-). μένειν Ac 18:3 D. παρεῖναι 12:20; 2 Cor 11:9; Gal 4:18, 20; cp. παρουσία πρὸς ὑμᾶς Phil 1:26. παρεπιδημεῖν 1 Cl 1:2. ἐποίησεν τρεῖς μῆνας πρὸς τὴν Ἐλισάβεδ GJs 12:3. πρὸς σὲ ποιῶ τὸ πάσχα Mt 26:18b. Cp. also 2 Cor 1:12; 7:12; 12:21; 2 Th 3:1; Phlm 13; 1J 2:1; Hm 11:9b v.l.—πρὸς ἑαυτούς among or to themselves Mk 9:10 (in case πρὸς ἑ. belongs w. τὸν λόγον ἐκράτησαν; B-D-F §239, 1). πρὸς ἑαυτὸν προσηύχετο he uttered a prayer to himself Lk 18:11. Cp. 24:12.—δεδεμένον πρὸς θύραν tied at a door Mk 11:4. τὴν πᾶσαν σάρκα ἀνθρώπων πρὸς ἡδονὴν ἐδέσμευεν (Satan) bound all humankind to self-gratification AcPlCor 2:11. πρὸς τ. θάλασσαν by the seaside Mk 4:1b. On πρὸς τὸ φῶς at the fire Mk 14:54; Lk 22:56 s. B-D-F §239, 3; Rob. 625 (perh. w. the idea of turning toward the fire; s. also 4 Km 23:3). πρὸς ἓν τῶν ὀρέων at one of the mountains 1 Cl 10:7. τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν the place near the door Mk 2:2. πρὸς γράμμα letter by letter Hv 2, 1, 4.—On πρός τι terms s. PWouters, The Treatment of Relational Nouns in Ancient Grammar: Orbis 38, ’95, 149–78 (lit.). M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv. -
20 ἐπιτίθημι
ἐπιτίθημι 3 pl. ἐπιτιθέασιν Mt 23:4, impv. ἐπιτίθει 1 Ti 5:22; impf. 3 pl. ἐπετίθεσαν Ac 8:17 (ἐπετίθουν v.l.); fut. ἐπιθήσω; 1 aor. ἐπέθηκα; 2 aor. ἐπέθην, impv. ἐπίθες, ptc. ἐπιθείς. Mid. fut. ἐπιθήσομαι; 2 aor. ἐπεθέμην (s. τίθημι; Hom.+).① to place someth. on or transfer to (a place or object)ⓐ lay/put uponα. lit.: act., of placing of a physical thing τὶ (which somet. is to be supplied fr. the context; cp. Esth 5:2) ἐπί τι or τινα (X., Cyr. 7, 3, 14; SIG 1173, 9; cp. 1169, 4; PSI 442, 13 [III B.C.]; Gen 22:9; 42:26 al.; JosAs 29:5 αὐτὸν ἐπὶ τὸν ἵππον; ParJer 2:1 χοῦν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλήν) someth. upon someth. or someone Mt 23:4; Lk 15:5; J 9:6 v.l. (most mss. read ἐπέχρισεν), 15; Ac 15:10; 28:3; B 7:8. χεῖρα (χεῖρας) ἐπί τινα or τι lay hand(s) on someone or someth. (SIG 1173, 4; Ex 29:10; Lev 1:4; 4:4 al.—KSudhoff, Handanlegg. des Heilgottes: Archiv f. Gesch. d. Med. 18, 1926, 235–50) Mt 9:18; Mk 8:25 (v.l. ἔθηκεν); 16:18; Ac 8:17; 9:17 (cp. 1QapGen and s. SKotlek, ANRW II Principat 37/3, 2859). Also τινὶ τὰς χεῖρας (Jos., Ant. 9, 268; 16, 365) Mt 19:13, 15; Mk 5:23; 6:5; 8:23; Lk 4:40; 13:13 (v.l. ἐπʼ αὐτῇ); Ac 6:6; 8:19; 9:12; 13:3; 19:6; 28:8 (s. χείρ end [Coppens]); of authorization as an elder 1 Ti 5:22 (Goodsp., Probs. 181f; cp. 1QapGen 20, 29); cp. τὴν χεῖρα Mk 7:32; AcPl Ha 3, 31; 4, 34. ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλήν B 13:5 (Gen 48:18). S. on ἐπίθεσις.—In other combinations ἐ. τί τινι (X., Oec. 17, 9; Esth 2:17; 1 Esdr 4:30; TestJob 7:1; JosAs 10:5; Jos., Ant. 9, 149 ἐπέθεσαν αὐτῷ τ. στέφανον) αὐτῷ τὸν σταυρόν Lk 23:26; στέφανον … αὐτοῦ τῇ κεφαλῇ J 19:2. ἐπειθήσι (=ἐπιθήσει) σοι ἐλευθέριον στέφανον AcPl Ha 2, 31. τοὺς λίθους ἐπετίθουν ἀλλήλαις they placed the stones on one another’s shoulders Hs 9, 3, 5.—τὶ ἐπί τινος (Hdt. 1, 121, 4 al.; 1 Km 6:18; Sus 34; ParJer 5:7; Just., D. 132, 2) Mt 21:7; Lk 8:16 v.l. ἐπέθηκαν ἐπὶ τ. κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ they placed (the crown of thorns) on his head Mt 27:29. ἐπάνω τ. κεφαλῆς put above (his) head vs. 37.—τῷ μνημείῳ λίθον a stone at the grave Lk 23:53 v.l. (λίθοι) ἐπιτιθέμενοι εἰς τ. οἰκοδομήν stones put into the building Hv 3, 5, 2.β. fig.: act. (except Ac 15:28, below) ἐ. πληγάς τινι inflict blows upon someone (BGU 759, 13 [II A.D.] πληγὰς πλείστας ἐπέθηκάν μοι) Ac 16:23; cp. Lk 10:30. Differently ἐπιθήσει ὁ θεὸς ἐπʼ αὐτὸν τ. πληγάς God will bring upon him the plagues Rv 22:18b (cp. δίκην τινί Hdt., Pla. et al., also UPZ 1, 13 [IV B.C.] ὁ θεὸ αὐτῷ τὴν δίκην ἐ. Dt 26:6; τειμωρίαν τινί IAndrosIsis, Kyme 20; 35); s. BOlsson, D. Epilog der Offb. Joh.: ZNW 31, ’32, 84–86.—Pass. Ac 15:28.—ἐ. τινὶ ὄνομα give a surname to someone (cp. Hdt. 5, 68 al.; BGU 1139, 7 [I B.C.]; 2 Esdr 19:7) Mk 3:16f (on the giving of new names to disciples cp. Diog. L. 5, 38: Theophrastus’ name was Τύρταμος; his teacher, Aristotle, μετωνόμασεν and gave him the name Theophrastus because of his god-like eloquence). B 12:8f ἐ. τὸ ἔλεος ἐπί τινα bestow mercy upon someone 15:2.ⓑ give τινί τι someth. to someone, mid. (BGU 1208 1, 4 [27 B.C.]; PRyl 81, 9 τὴν ὅλου τ. πράγματος ἐξουσίαν τοῖς κατασπορεῦσι ἐπεθέμην) ἀναγομένοις τὰ πρὸς τὰς χρείας when we sailed they gave us what we needed Ac 28:10; unless the verb is to rendered here put on board the needed supplies (so NRSV, REB).ⓒ add ἐπί τι, act. ( Hom., et al.) ἐπʼ αὐτά Rv 22:18a.② to set upon, attack, lay a hand on, mid. (Jos., Ant. 1, 328) τινί (Hdt., Aristoph. et al.; Appian, Liby. 102 §482; PTebt 15, 11 [114 B.C.]; PFlor 332, 7; LXX; Philo, Leg. ad Gai. 371; Jos., Ant. 4, 96) foll. by subst. inf. of purpose in gen. (Gen 43:18) οὐδεὶς ἐπιθήσεταί σοι τοῦ κακῶσαί σε in order to harm you Ac 18:10.—M-M. TW.
- 1
- 2
См. также в других словарях:
Giving Up The Ghost — Infobox Television episode | Title = Giving Up The Ghost Series = Ugly Betty Season = 2 Episode = 9 Airdate = November 22, 2007 Production = 209 Writer = Charles Pratt, Jr. Director = Gary Winnick Episode list = Episode chronology Caption = Prev … Wikipedia
Giving — Give Give (g[i^]v), v. t. [imp. {Gave} (g[=a]v); p. p. {Given} (g[i^]v n); p. pr. & vb. n. {Giving}.] [OE. given, yiven, yeven, AS. gifan, giefan; akin to D. geven, OS. ge[eth]an, OHG. geban, G. geben, Icel. gefa, Sw. gifva, Dan. give, Goth.… … The Collaborative International Dictionary of English
Giving In — Infobox Single Name = Giving In Artist = Adema from Album = Adema Recorded = 2000 2001 in Los Angeles, CA Released = 2001 Genre = Nu metal Length = 3:58 Label = Arista Records Writer = Adema Producer = Bill Appleberry, Tobias Miller Chart… … Wikipedia
The Giving Tree — first published in 1964, is a children s book written and illustrated by Shel Silverstein. This book has become one of Silverstein s best known titles and has been translated into more than 30 languages. Storyline The story is a short moral tale … Wikipedia
Life-giving Spring — The Life giving Spring or Life giving Font is both the feast day of a historic church in Constantinople and an icon of the Theotokos (Virgin Mary) which is venerated by the Eastern Orthodox Church and those Eastern Catholic Churches which follow… … Wikipedia
Asshole: How I Got Rich and Happy by Not Giving a Shit About You — Author(s) … Wikipedia
Peace be upon him (Islam) — ṣallā Allāhu ʿalay hi wa sallam, written in Arabic Calligraphy … Wikipedia
List of Sahaba not giving bay'ah to Abu Bakr — There is a List of Sahaba not giving bay ah to Abu Bakr. A bay ah is the Islamic term for a formal oath of allegiance, the Sahaba were the companions of Muhammad.IntroductionAfter the death of the Muhammad, Abu Bakr came into power following the… … Wikipedia
Grant unto Him Eternal Rest — Infobox Television episode Title = Grant Unto Him Eternal Rest Series = Father Ted Caption = Season = 1 Episode = 6 Airdate = 26 May, 1995 Production = Writer = Graham Linehan, Arthur Mathews Director = Declan Lowney Guests = Zara Turner (Laura… … Wikipedia
Hadith of giving Zakat while in Ruku — The Hadith of giving zakat while in Ruku is a hadith which is about The Imam Ali. As it is reported one day the Prophet Mohammed, Ali and some companions were offering prayers in a mosque. A beggar came in and asked for charity. Whilst in their… … Wikipedia
—That Thou art Mindful of Him — Infobox Short story | name = That Thou art Mindful of Him author = Isaac Asimov country = United States language = English series = Robot Series genre = Science fiction short story published in = Fantasy and Science Fiction publisher = Mercury… … Wikipedia